586463
142
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/142
Next page
Operating Instructions
AV Receiver
VSX-1130-K
VSX-
930-K/S
VSX-
830-K/S
2
WARNING
This equipment is not waterproof
. To prevent a fire or
shock hazard, do not place any container filled with
liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower
pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or
moisture.
D3-4-2-1-3_A1_En
WARNING
To
prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame
sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment.
D3-4-2-1-7a_A1_En
CAUTION
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the
AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore, make
sure the unit has been installed so that the power
cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in
case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard, the power
cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet
when left unused for a long period of time (for
example, when on vacation).
D3-4-2-2-2a*_A1_En
CAUTION
T
O PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USE
R-SERVICEABLE
PA
RTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
D3-4-2-1-1_B1_En
WARNING
Store small parts out of the reach of children and
infants. If accidentally swallowed, contact a doctor
immediately.
D41-6-4_A1_En
This product is for general household purposes. Any
failure due to use for other than household purposes
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires
repair will be charged for even during the warranty
period.
K041_A1_En
Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 °C to +35 °C (+41 °F to +95 °F); less than 85 %RH
(cooling vents not blocked)
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or
strong artificial light).
D3-4-2-1-7c*_A2_En
VENTILATION CAUTION
In case of VSX-1130/VSX-93
0
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation
(at least 40 cm at top, 10 cm at rear
, and 20 cm at each
side).
In case of VSX-830
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation
(at least 40 cm at top, 20 cm at rear
, and 20 cm at each
side).
WARNING
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product,
and to protect it from overheating.
To prevent fire
hazard, the openings should never be blocked or
covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths,
curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet
or a bed.
D3-4-2-1-7b*_A1_En
Information for users on collection and disposal of old equipment and used batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean
that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with
general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries,
please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national
legislation.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable
resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the
environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries,
please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale
where you purchased the items.
These symbols are only valid in the European Union.
For countries outside the European Union:
If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and
ask for the correct method of disposal.
K058a_A1_En
Symbol examples
for batteries
Symbol for
equipment
Pb
Radio wave caution
This unit uses a 2.4 GHz radio wave frequency
, which is
a band used by other wireless systems (Microwave
ovens and Cordless phones, etc.). In this event noise
appears in your television image, there is the possibility
this unit (including products supported by this unit) is
causing signal inte
rference with the antenna input
connector of your televisio
n, video, satellite tuner, etc. In
this event, increase the distance between the antenna
input connector and this unit (including products
supported by this unit).
Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction of the
compatible Pioneer product due to communication
error/malfunctions associated with your network
connection and/or your connected equipment. Please
contact your Internet service provider or network
device manufacturer.
A separate contract with/payment to an Internet
service provider is required to use the Internet.
3
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instruc-
tions so you will know how to operate your model properly.
Contents
01 Before you start
Features ............................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Checking what’s in the box ................................................................................................................................................9
Installing the receiver ....................................................................................................................................................... 10
Loading the batteries ........................................................................................................................................................10
Operating range of remote control unit..........................................................................................................................10
02 Controls and displays
Remote control (In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930) .............................................................................................................12
Remote control (In case of VSX-830) ..............................................................................................................................13
Display ...............................................................................................................................................................................15
Front panel ........................................................................................................................................................................16
03 Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930)
Connecting your equipment ............................................................................................................................................19
Rear panel .........................................................................................................................................................................19
Determining the speakers’ application ..........................................................................................................................20
Placing the speakers ........................................................................................................................................................ 22
Connecting the speakers ................................................................................................................................................. 23
Installing your speaker system ........................................................................................................................................ 23
About the audio connection ............................................................................................................................................ 26
About the video converter ................................................................................................................................................ 26
About HDMI ......................................................................................................................................................................27
Connecting your TV and playback components ............................................................................................................ 27
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box ...........................................................................................29
Connecting other audio components .............................................................................................................................30
Connecting the subwoofer ..............................................................................................................................................31
Connecting AM/FM antennas ......................................................................................................................................... 31
Making MULTI-ZONE connections .................................................................................................................................32
Connecting to the network through LAN interface .......................................................................................................33
Connecting an iPod .......................................................................................................................................................... 34
Connecting a USB device ................................................................................................................................................ 34
Connecting an MHL-compatible device ......................................................................................................................... 34
Connecting an HDMI-equipped component to the front panel input .........................................................................34
Connecting an IR receiver ...............................................................................................................................................35
Plugging in the receiver ...................................................................................................................................................35
04 Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-830)
Connecting your equipment ............................................................................................................................................37
Rear panel .........................................................................................................................................................................37
Determining the speakers’ application ..........................................................................................................................37
Placing the speakers ........................................................................................................................................................ 38
Connecting the speakers ................................................................................................................................................. 39
Installing your speaker system ........................................................................................................................................ 39
About the audio connection ............................................................................................................................................ 40
About HDMI ......................................................................................................................................................................41
Connecting your TV and playback components ............................................................................................................ 41
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box ...........................................................................................43
Connecting other audio components .............................................................................................................................44
Connecting the subwoofer ..............................................................................................................................................45
Connecting AM/FM antennas ......................................................................................................................................... 45
Connecting to the network through LAN interface .......................................................................................................46
Connecting an iPod .......................................................................................................................................................... 46
Connecting a USB device ................................................................................................................................................ 46
Connecting an MHL-compatible device ......................................................................................................................... 47
Plugging in the receiver ...................................................................................................................................................47
05 Basic Setup
Initial settings of this receiver ..........................................................................................................................................49
Setting with a special application (Start-up Navi) .........................................................................................................49
Perform settings using the AVNavigator built into this receiver ..................................................................................49
Setting by referring to the operating instructions .........................................................................................................51
06 Basic playback
Playing a source ...............................................................................................................................................................62
Playing an iPod .................................................................................................................................................................63
Playing a USB device .......................................................................................................................................................64
Playing an MHL-compatible device ................................................................................................................................65
Listening to the radio ........................................................................................................................................................66
Music playback using Bluetooth wireless technology ..................................................................................................67
07 Listening to your system
Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes .................................................................................... 71
Selecting MCACC presets ...............................................................................................................................................73
Choosing the input signal ................................................................................................................................................73
Better sound using Phase Control ..................................................................................................................................73
Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control ...............................................................................74
08 Playback with NETWORK features
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................................76
Playback with Network functions....................................................................................................................................77
About network playback...................................................................................................................................................79
About playable file formats .............................................................................................................................................. 80
4
09 Control with HDMI function
About the Control with HDMI function ...........................................................................................................................82
Making Control with HDMI connections ........................................................................................................................82
HDMI Setup.......................................................................................................................................................................82
Before using synchronization ..........................................................................................................................................83
About synchronized operations ......................................................................................................................................83
Sound Retriever Link ........................................................................................................................................................83
Cautions on the Control with HDMI function ................................................................................................................83
10 Using other functions
Setting the Audio options ................................................................................................................................................85
Setting the Video options ................................................................................................................................................. 87
Switching the output (OUTPUT PARAMETER) ..............................................................................................................88
HDMI 4K/60p signal output setting ................................................................................................................................88
Changing the channel level while listening ...................................................................................................................89
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls ..................................................................................................................................... 89
Network settings from a web browser ............................................................................................................................ 89
Using the sleep timer .......................................................................................................................................................90
Dimming the display ........................................................................................................................................................90
Checking your system settings .......................................................................................................................................90
Resetting the system ........................................................................................................................................................ 91
11 Operation of other devices by remote control (excluding VSX-830)
About the Remote Setup menu.......................................................................................................................................93
Operating multiple receivers ...........................................................................................................................................93
Setting the remote to control other components .......................................................................................................... 93
Selecting preset codes directly .......................................................................................................................................93
Programming signals from other remote controls .......................................................................................................94
Erasing one of the remote control button settings ........................................................................................................94
Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function .............................................................................................95
Using All Zone Standby ....................................................................................................................................................95
Setting the switching time for the receiver operation mode ........................................................................................95
Resetting the remote control settings ............................................................................................................................ 95
Controlling components ..................................................................................................................................................96
12 The MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/Advanced MCACC (VSX-830) menu
Making receiver settings from the MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/Advanced MCACC (VSX-830) menu ..........99
Automatic MCACC (Expert) ............................................................................................................................................. 99
Manual MCACC setup ...................................................................................................................................................101
Checking MCACC Data ..................................................................................................................................................103
Data Management..........................................................................................................................................................104
13 The System Setup and Other Setup menus
Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu.............................................................................................106
Manual speaker setup ....................................................................................................................................................106
MHL Setup ......................................................................................................................................................................109
The Other Setup menu ................................................................................................................................................... 109
Making network settings using Safari .......................................................................................................................... 111
Using Safari to set a friendly name ............................................................................................................................... 111
Using Safari to update the firmware ............................................................................................................................. 112
14 FAQ
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................................. 114
Power ............................................................................................................................................................................... 114
No sound .........................................................................................................................................................................114
Other audio problems ....................................................................................................................................................115
BT AUDIO ........................................................................................................................................................................116
Video ................................................................................................................................................................................116
Settings ............................................................................................................................................................................116
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output ............................................................................................................. 117
Display .............................................................................................................................................................................117
Remote control ...............................................................................................................................................................117
HDMI ................................................................................................................................................................................118
MHL..................................................................................................................................................................................119
Built-in AVNavigator ....................................................................................................................................................... 119
USB interface .................................................................................................................................................................. 119
iPod ..................................................................................................................................................................................120
Network ...........................................................................................................................................................................120
Wireless LAN ...................................................................................................................................................................122
15 Additional information
About Wi-Fi
®
....................................................................................................................................................................124
SABRE DAC
TM
.................................................................................................................................................................124
About HDMI ....................................................................................................................................................................124
HTC Connect ................................................................................................................................................................... 124
About iPod .......................................................................................................................................................................124
Windows 8 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 125
MHL..................................................................................................................................................................................125
About Bluetooth wireless technology ...........................................................................................................................125
Software license notice .................................................................................................................................................. 125
Surround sound formats ...............................................................................................................................................126
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats ............................................................127
Speaker Setting Guide....................................................................................................................................................128
About messages displayed when using network functions ....................................................................................... 129
Important information regarding the HDMI connection ............................................................................................129
Cleaning the unit ............................................................................................................................................................129
Declaration of Conformity with regard to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC ................................................................ 130
Glossary ...........................................................................................................................................................................131
Features index ................................................................................................................................................................. 134
Specifications .................................................................................................................................................................135
Preset code list................................................................................................................................................................137
5
Flow of settings on the receiver
Flow for connecting and setting the receiver
The unit is a full-fledged AV receiver equipped with an abundance of functions and terminals. It can be used eas-
ily after following the procedure below to make the connections and settings.
Required setting item: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 10
Setting to be made as necessary: 6, 7, 9, 11, 12, 13, 14
Important
Using Wiring Navi on AVNavigator of this receiver, you can make the initial settings of the receiver on your com-
puter or mobile device. In that case, you can use Wiring Navi to make the same connections or settings that are
performed in Steps 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, and 9. For details of how to use AVNavigator, refer to How to use the built-in
AVNavigator on page 49 .
1 Before you start
! Checking what’s in the box on page 9
! Loading the batteries on page 10
j
2 Determining the speakers’ application (page 20 (VSX-1130/VSX-930), page 37
(VSX-830))
In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930
! [A] 7.2 channel surround system (Surround back/Top middle) connection
! [B] Dolby Enabled Speaker system connection
! [C] 7.2 channel surround system (Surround back/Front wide) connection
! [D] 7.2 channel surround system & Speaker B connection
! [E] 5.2 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)
! [F] 5.2 channel surround system & HDZONE connection (Multi Zone)
In case of VSX-830
! [A] 5.2 channel surround system connection
! [B] Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)
j
3 Connecting the speakers
! Placing the speakers (page 22 (VSX-1130/VSX-930), page 38 (VSX-830))
! Connecting the speakers (page 23 (VSX-1130/VSX-930), page 39 (VSX-830))
! Installing your speaker system (page 23 (VSX-1130/VSX-930), page 39 (VSX-830))
! Bi-amping your speakers (page 25 (VSX-1130/VSX-930), page 40 (VSX-830))
j
4 Connecting the components
! About the audio connection (page 26 (VSX-1130/VSX-930), page 40 (VSX-830))
! Excluding VSX-830: About the video converter on page 26
! Connecting your TV and playback components (page 27 (VSX-1130/VSX-930), page 41 (VSX-830))
! Connecting AM/FM antennas (page 31 (VSX-1130/VSX-930), page 45 (VSX-830))
! Plugging in the receiver (page 35 (VSX-1130/VSX-930), page 47 (VSX-830))
j
5 Power On
j
6 Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language) (page 60 )
j
7 Using the AVNavigator functions (page 49 )
j
8 MCACC speaker settings
! Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 57
j
9 The Input Setup menu (page 59 )
(When using connections other than the recommended connections)
j
10 Basic playback (page 61 )
j
11 Switching the HDMI output (page 88 )
j
12 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired
! Using the various listening modes (page 70 )
! Better sound using Phase Control (page 73 )
! Measuring the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL CH ADJ/FRONT ALIGN) (page 99 )
! Changing the channel level while listening (page 108 )
! Switching on/off the Acoustic Calibration EQ, Auto Sound Retriever or Dialog Enhancement (page 85 )
! Setting the Audio options (page 85 )
! Setting the Video options (page 87 )
j
13 Other optional adjustments and settings
! Control with HDMI function (page 81 )
! The Advanced MCACC menu (page 98 )
! The System Setup and Other Setup menus (page 105 )
j
14 Making maximum use of the remote control
! Operating multiple receivers (page 93 )
! Setting the remote to control other components (page 93 )
6
 
Features ............................................................................................................................................ 7
Checking what’s in the box ............................................................................................................9
Installing the receiver ....................................................................................................................10
Loading the batteries ....................................................................................................................10
Operating range of remote control unit ......................................................................................10
Before you start
7
Before you start
01
Features
Audio
% Dolby Atmos
Excluding VSX-830
This AV receiver supports the latest Dolby Atmos surround sound system. Dolby Atmos is a new technology in
which, through real time calculation of audio data and meta data (position and time information) included in the
audio signal, a surround sound space is achieved irrespective of the speaker layout and number of speakers.
Dolby Atmos contents are required to enjoy Dolby Atmos. For Blu-ray discs with Dolby Atmos, Dolby Atmos can
be played by connecting most conventional Blu-ray discs with this receiver using HDMI.
% ESS-24bit-DAC-equipped
Excluding VSX-830
All channels are equipped with ESS SABRE Premier Audio DACs. The Jitter Eliminators achieve clearer sound.
% Hi-bit 24 Audio Processing
Excluding VSX-830
Creates a wider dynamic range with digital sources like CDs or DVDs. 16- and 20-bit PCM as well as compressed
audio is requantized to 24 bits, and the high frequency component is interpolated upon data processing to enable
smoother, more subtle musical expression.
% Easy setup using MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/Advanced MCACC (VSX-830)
The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate surround sound setup, which includes the advanced fea-
tures of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ.
% Auto Phase Control Plus
For discs created with standards other than Phase Control, the LFE channel is delayed upon recording in the first
place. This function automatically corrects phase shifting on such discs and broadcasts. This function is particu-
larly effective when playing multi-channel music containing low frequency effects (LFE).
% Full Band Phase Control
Excluding VSX-830
The further advanced Full Band Phase Control technology focuses on the group delay in the speaker network
filter, and compensates with special digital signal processing (DSP), to adjust the phase of each unit as well as
the group delay for each speaker. Full Band Phase Control gives multi-range speakers the sound coherence of
full-range speakers, while retaining the wide frequency range advantage.
% Subwoofer EQ
The EQ for subwoofer output can be corrected. In addition to the results of MCACC automatic adjustment, the
subwoofer output can be adjusted to match the viewing environment or your taste by manual correction.
% Virtual Speakers
By turning on the ‘Virtual Surround Back’, ‘Virtual Height’, and ‘Virtual Wide’ modes, it is possible to realize a
maximum of 11.1 channels combining the speakers that are actually installed and the virtual speakers. This
makes for a smoother connection between the sounds and an improved 3D feel.
Video
% Ultra HD (with 4K/60p video support) - Pass-through and upscaling -
Up to 4K/60p resolution images can be passed through and displayed as such, and the HD (High Definition) or
Full HD images of DVDs, Blu-ray discs and HD broadcasts can be upscaled to a resolution of up to 4K/60p and
displayed. A separate monitor supporting Ultra HD (4K video) is required.
% HDMI (4K60p, 3D, Audio Return Channel)
A compatible component is required to use the above function.
% HDCP 2.2
This receiver is compatible with the HDCP 2.2 standard, which has stringent copyright protection technology.
 
8
Before you start
01
Network
% Built-in Wi-Fi
This receiver is compatible with Wi-Fi standards, and supports the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz dual bands.
% Wireless Direct
With this receiver, you can enjoy music playback without a router by direct wireless connection using an iPhone
or other Wi-Fi mobile device.
% Spotify Connect
Spotify is a digital music-streaming service that gives you access to millions of songs instantly. This receiver is
ready for Spotify Connect, which lets you play music on your audio system, using the Spotify app as a remote. For
service availability in your country check www.spotify.com.
% Compatible with Windows 8.1
This receiver is compatible with Windows 8.1, letting you easily stream music from compatible PCs on your home
network.
% Apple AirPlay
With AirPlay you can stream music from iTunes to this receiver and play it through your home theater system.
You can even use the receiver to view metadata including song titles, artist’s names as well as the album art on a
connected display. You can easily enjoy your iTunes music in any room in the house.
% DLNA Certified (1.5)
This receiver is a DLNA certified (1.5) device, enabled to work not only as a DMP (Digital Media Player) for playing
DMS (Digital Media Server) audio files, but also as a DMR (Digital Media Renderer) to be controlled remotely by a
device such as a smartphone or PC.
% Internet Radio
When you connect this receiver to the network, you can listen to internet radio from around the world. You can
register your favorite broadcasting stations in this receiver.
% Multi-channel Music File playback
This receiver enables multi-channel music file playback with a resolution of up to 96 kHz/24 bit. Playback of WAV
and FLAC files via the front USB port and network is supported.
% DSD File Music playback (via Network, Front USB and HDMI)
Playback of high sound quality DSD music (DSD files and DSD discs (SACDs)) is supported.
% High Resolution Music Playback
High resolution music files with resolutions of 96 kHz/24 bit to 192 kHz/24 bit can be played. Playback of AIFF,
Apple Lossless, WAV and FLAC files via the front USB port and network is supported.
% Gapless Playback
The silent section between tracks is skipped when playing music files, eliminating the interruptions that usually
occur when playing live or concert contents.
This receiver plays back AAC or MP3 format files with a minimum gap even though it is fundamentally impossible
to play back without a gap.
Connectivity
% Built-in Bluetooth Wireless Technology
This receiver, equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology, lets you enjoy music files on an iPhone or other
Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device wirelessly.
% MHL
TM
(Mobile High-definition Link)-compatible device playback
An incorporates MHL 2 mobile device can be connected to enjoy 3D videos, full-HD videos, high quality multi-
channel audio, and photos etc., with charge the battery on the receiver.
% HTC Connect
HTC Connect makes it easy to wirelessly stream your favorite music straight from your HTC phone. There’s no
need for a separate app; HTC Connect is built right in your phone’s music player.
% iPod Playback
Your iPod and iPhone can be connected to the receiver’s USB terminal to play the music files on the iPod or
iPhone. Also, the iPod or iPhone is charged when it is connected to the receiver.
 
9
Before you start
01
Installation
% Built-in AVNavigator
With the built-in AVNavigator that included in this receiver, Wiring Navi can be used to interactively connect and
set initial settings of this receiver with a smart phone, tablet, PC or Mac through a home network. In addition,
with VSX-1130 and VSX-930, the Interactive Operation Guide can also be used, which visually explains func-
tions and operations by actually experiencing operations with content linked with the main receiver.
% iControlAV5 Remote Application
This is an application that allows intuitive operation of many of the receiver’s functions. This application is avail-
able on the App Store for iPhone, iPod touch and iPad. You can also get it on Google Play for Android smart-
phones. The application can be downloaded free of charge.
% HDZONE output
Excluding VSX-830
This receiver supports output of the HDMI output to a subzone room. Powerful images can be enjoyed simply by
connecting this receiver to a TV supporting 4K/Full-HD/3D. In addition, a multi-channel environment can be cre-
ated by connecting this receiver to another AV receiver in the subzone room.
% ZONE Ready
Excluding VSX-830
This receiver is equipped with HDZONE. HDZONE supports HD audio/video streaming to a separate room via
HDMI. Multi-Zone enables music and movie playback from different sources in three zones at the same time.
% Energy Saving Design
This AV receiver has an ecological design. In addition to even lower power consumption in standby, the receiver
is equipped with an ‘eco mode’ for low power consumption when playing contents as well. Furthermore, the eco
mode can easily be set with a dedicated button on the remote control of using iControlAV5.
Checking what’s in the box
Please check that you’ve received the following supplied accessories:
! Setup microphone (cable: 5 m)
! Remote control unit
! AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries (to confirm system operation) x2
! AM loop antenna
! FM wire antenna
! Power cord
! CD-ROM
! Quick start guide
! Safety Brochure
! Warranty sheet
Note
The operating instructions explains the operation using mainly illustrations of VSX-1130. In addition, the illustra-
tions are modified and simplified for explanation purposes and may be different from the actual product.
Handling the CD-ROM
Precautions For Use
! This CD-ROM is for use with a personal computer. It cannot be used with a DVD player or music CD player.
Attempting to play this CD-ROM with a DVD player or music CD player can damage speakers or cause
impaired hearing due to the large volume.
License
! Please agree to the “Terms of Use” indicated below before using this CD-ROM. Do not use if you are unwilling
to consent to the terms of its use.
Terms of Use
! Copyright to data provided on this CD-ROM belongs to PIONEER HOME ELECTRONICS CORPORATION.
Unauthorized transfer, duplication, broadcast, public transmission, translation, sales, lending or other such
matters that go beyond the scope of “personal use” or “citation” as defined by Copyright Law may be subject to
punitive actions. Permission to use this CD-ROM is granted under license by PIONEER HOME ELECTRONICS
CORPORATION.
General Disclaimer
! PIONEER HOME ELECTRONICS CORPORATION does not guarantee the operation of this CD-ROM with
respect to personal computers using any of the applicable OS. In addition, PIONEER HOME ELECTRONICS
CORPORATION is not liable for any damages incurred as a result of use of this CD-ROM and is not responsible
for any compensation. The names of private corporations, products and other entities described herein are the
registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective firms.
 
10
Before you start
01
Installing the receiver
! When installing this unit, make sure to put it on a level and stable surface.
! Don’t install it on the following places:
on a color TV (the screen may distort)
near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.
in direct sunlight
in damp or wet areas
in extremely hot or cold areas
in places where there is vibration or other movement
in places that are very dusty
in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)
! Do not touch this receiver’s bottom panel while the power is on or just after it is turned off. The bottom panel
becomes hot when the power is on (or right after it is turned off) and could cause burns.
Loading the batteries
The batteries included with the unit are to check initial operations; they may not last over a long period. We rec-
ommend using alkaline batteries that have a longer life.
! The remote control setting may be restored to the default after the batteries are replaced. If this happens, reset
it (page 92 (VSX-1130/VSX-930), page 13 (VSX-830)).
VSX-1130/VSX-930
VSX-830
WARNING
! Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a
heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or perfor-
mance of batteries.
CAUTION
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:
! Never use new and old batteries together.
! Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries properly according to the marks in the battery case.
! When inserting the batteries, make sure not to damage the springs on the battery’s (–) terminals. This can
cause batteries to leak or overheat.
! Batteries with the same shape may have different voltages. Do not use different batteries together.
! When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public insti-
tution’s rules that apply in your country/area.
Operating range of remote control unit
The remote control may not work properly if:
! There are obstacles between the remote control and the receiver’s remote sensor.
! Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the remote sensor.
! The receiver is located near a device that is emitting infrared rays.
! The receiver is operated simultaneously with another infrared remote control unit.
30°
30°
7 m
 
11
 
Remote control (In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930) ..........................................................................12
Remote control (In case of VSX-830) ............................................................................................ 13
Display ............................................................................................................................................ 15
Front panel ..................................................................................................................................... 16
Controls and displays
12
Controls and displays
02
Remote control (In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930)
This section explains how to operate the remote control for the receiver.
RECEIVER
D.ACCESS
DIMMER SLEEP
RCU SETUP
MPX
PRESET TUNE
BAND PTY
iPod
TUNER
INPUT
USB ADPTROKU
BT
TV
TV
MHL
CD
OUT P.
DVDBD
ALL ZONE STBY
SOURCE
STANDBY/ON
MAIN
SAT
SUB ZONE CONTROL
SOURCE CONTROL
MUTE
VOLUME
VOL
TOP
MENU
HOME
MENU
TOOLS
MENU
ENTER
RETURN
CLASS
ENTER
CLR
CH
CH
2
546
8
0
79
13
AUDIO
DISP
SURRAUTO
CH LV.
ADV
STATUS
AUDIO P. VIDEO P.
Z2 Z3 HDZ
LISTENING MODE
HDMI
NET
ALL
Fav
RECEIVER
1
2
4
3
9
10
11
12
5
6
7
8
13
14
17
18
15
16
6
The remote has been conveniently color-coded according to component control using the following system:
! White – Receiver control, TV control
! Blue – Operation of other devices and each input (TUNER, etc.) (See pages 63 , 64 , 66 , 67 and 96 .)
1 u STANDBY/ON
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.
2 ALL ZONE STBY
Use this button to perform unique operations (page 95 ).
3 MAIN RECEIVER
Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to select the white commands).
Switch to perform operations in the main zone.
4 SOURCE CONTROL buttons
Switches the input. Also, switches remote control operation mode for operating other devices or each input
(TUNER, etc.) (page 93 ).
The input for HDMI , NET and ALL switches each time these buttons are pressed.
5 TV control buttons
These buttons can be used to perform operations on the TV to which the TV INPUT button is assigned. The TV can
be operated with these buttons regardless of the input set for the remote control’s operation mode (page 93 ).
6 Receiver Control buttons
! STATUS – Displays the IP address and information such as selected/set functions and input signals on the
display (page 90 ).
! OUT P. (OUTPUT PARAMETER) – Switches the output terminal of the HDMI signal or speaker terminal to be
played (page 88 ).
! RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.
! CH LV. (CHANNEL LEVEL) – Press repeatedly to select a channel, then use k/l to adjust the level (pages
89 and 108 ).
7 Receiver setting buttons
Press MAIN RECEIVER first to access:
! AUDIO P. (AUDIO PARAMETER) – Use to access the Audio options (page 85 ).
! VIDEO P. (VIDEO PARAMETER) – Use to access the Video options (page 87 ).
! HOME MENU – Use to access the Home Menu (pages 59 , 60 , 82 , 99 and 106 ).
8 i/j/k/l/ENTER
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround sound system (see page 99 ) and the Audio or Video
options (page 85 or 87 ).
9 LISTENING MODE buttons
! AUTO (AUTO SURROUND/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) – Switches between Auto Surround (page 71 ), Auto
Level Control mode and Stream Direct mode (page 72 ).
! SURR (STANDARD SURROUND) – Press for Standard decoding and to switch various modes (Dolby, DTS,
etc.) (page 71 ).
! ADV (ADVANCED SURROUND) – Use to switch between the various surround modes (page 72 ).
10 Source device operation button
Operates other devices or each input (TUNER, etc.).
11 DIMMER
Dims or brightens the display (page 90 ).
12 SLEEP
Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and select the amount of time before sleep (page 90 ).
 
13
Controls and displays
02
13 u SOURCE
Press to turn on/off the power to the Pioneer device connected to the receiver.
14 Remote control LED
Lights when a command is sent from the remote control.
15 SUB ZONE CONTROL buttons
! Z2 (ZONE 2) – It is not used with this receiver.
! Z3 (ZONE 3) – It is not used with this receiver.
! HDZ (HDZONE) – Holding down this button (for 1.5 seconds) until the remote control LED flashes one time,
the mode changes to HDZONE operation.
16 VOLUME +/–
Use to set the listening volume.
To adjust the main zone sound volume, press MAIN RECEIVER first and then press this button. When in the sub
zone, press the SUB ZONE CONTROL button first and then press this button.
17 MUTE
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).
To mute the main zone sound volume, press MAIN RECEIVER first and then press this button. When in the sub
zone, press the SUB ZONE CONTROL button first and then press this button.
18 RCU SETUP
Used to set the remote control (page 93 ).
Remote control (In case of VSX-830)
This section explains how to operate the remote control for the receiver.
1
2
4
3
9
10
11
12
5
5
6
7
8
13
14
15
 
14
Controls and displays
02
The remote has been conveniently color-coded according to component control using the following system:
! White – Receiver control, TV control
! Blue – Operation of other devices and each input (TUNER, etc.) (See pages 63 , 64 , 66 , 67 and 96 .)
1 u STANDBY/ON
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.
2 SLEEP
Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and select the amount of time before sleep (page 90 ).
3 MAIN RECEIVER
Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to select the white commands).
4 Input function buttons
Switches the input. Also, switches remote control operation mode for operating other devices or each input
(TUNER, etc.) (page 93 ).
The input for HDMI , NET and ALL switches each time these buttons are pressed.
5 Receiver Control buttons
! STATUS – Displays the IP address and information such as selected/set functions and input signals on the
display (page 90 ).
! SP-A/B – Switches the speaker output on/off. No sounds will be made from the speaker when SP OFF is
selected.
! CH LV. (CHANNEL LEVEL) – Press repeatedly to select a channel, then use k/l to adjust the level (pages
89 and 108 ).
! RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.
6 Receiver setting buttons
Press MAIN RECEIVER first to access:
! AUDIO P. (AUDIO PARAMETER) – Use to access the Audio options (page 85 ).
! VIDEO P. (VIDEO PARAMETER) – Use to access the Video options (page 87 ).
! HOME MENU – Use to access the Home Menu (pages 59 , 60 , 82 , 99 and 106 ).
7 i/j/k/l/ENTER
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround sound system (see page 99 ) and the Audio or Video
options (page 85 or 87 ).
8 Component control buttons
The main buttons (d, g, etc.) are used to control a component after you have selected it using the input function
buttons.
The BD, DVD, and CD operation using the component control buttons are limited only to Pioneer components.
The controls above these buttons can be accessed after you have selected the corresponding input function but-
ton (BD, DVD and CD). These buttons also function as described below.
Press TUNER first to access:
Use TUNE +/ can be used to find radio frequencies and PRESET +/ can be used to select preset radio stations
(page 66 ).
9 SHIFT
It is not used with this receiver.
10 u SOURCE
Press to turn on/off the power to the Pioneer device connected to the receiver.
11 DIMMER
Dims or brightens the display (page 90 ).
12 TV control buttons
Operates a TV. When operating other manufacturer’s TV, setup as follows.
! u – Use to turn on/off the power of the TV.
! INPUT – Use to select the TV input signal.
! CH +/– – Use to select channels.
! VOL +/– – Use to adjust the volume on your TV.
While holding down TV u button, press the input function buttons (listed in the table below) for component you
want to control for about five seconds.
This may not operate depending on the TV.
Default setting: Pioneer
TV preset
Input function button TV Brand
MAIN RECEIVER Pioneer
BD
Panasonic
HDMI
Sharp
ALL
Sony
DVD
Toshiba
SAT
Mitsubishi
MHL
Philips/AOC/TPV
iPod
Vizio
CD
Samsung
BT
LG Electric
TUNER
Skyworth
TV
Hisense
NET
TCL
13 MUTE
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).
To mute the sound volume, press MAIN RECEIVER first and then press this button.
14 VOLUME +/–
Use to set the listening volume.
15 LISTENING MODE buttons
! AUTO (AUTO SURROUND/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) – Switches between Auto Surround (page 71 ), Auto
Level Control mode and Stream Direct mode (page 72 ).
! SURR (STANDARD SURROUND) – Press for Standard decoding and to switch various modes (Dolby, DTS,
etc.) (page 71 ).
! ADV (ADVANCED SURROUND) – Use to switch between the various surround modes (page 72 ).
 
15
Controls and displays
02
Display
HDMI
DIGITAL
ANALOG
L C R
SL SR
XL XR
XC
LFE
AUTO
DIGITAL PLUS
AUTO SURROUND
STREAM DIRECT
PROLOGIC
Neo:6
ADV.SURROUND
STANDARD
SP
AB
SLEEP
DSD PCM
DTS HD ES 96/24
MSTR
S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX
MONO
dB
MULTI-ZONE
STEREO
TrueHD
TUNED RDS
ALC
AT T
USB
TV
DVD
HDMI
DVR
BD
CD
TUNER
iPod
[ 2 ]
[ 3 ]
[ 4 ]
21 3 974 108 11 12 13
19 2015 16 17 18
146
FULL BAND
5
6
1 Signal indicators
Light to indicate the currently selected input signal. AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input sig-
nal automatically (page 73 ).
2 Program format indicators
Light to indicate the channels to which digital signals are being input.
Excluding VSX-830: With Dolby Atmos content, the light will not be on when the object base signal is being
decoded.
! L/R – Left front/Right front channel
! C – Center channel
! SL/SR – Left surround/Right surround channel
! LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the (( )) indicators light when an LFE signal is being input)
! XL/XR – Two channels other than the ones above
! XC – Either one channel other than the ones above, the mono surround channel or matrix encode flag
3 Digital format indicators
Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format is detected.
! DIGITAL – Lights with Dolby Digital decoding.
! DIGITAL PLUS – Lights with Dolby Digital Plus decoding.
! TrueHD – Lights with Dolby TrueHD decoding.
! DTS – Lights with DTS decoding.
! DTS HD – Lights with DTS-HD decoding.
! 96/24 – Lights with DTS 96/24 decoding.
! DSD – Lights during playback of DSD (Direct Stream Digital) signals.
! DSD PCM – Light during DSD (Direct Stream Digital) to PCM conversion.
! PCM – Lights during playback of PCM signals.
! MSTR – Lights during playback of DTS-HD Master Audio signals.
4 MULTI-ZONE
Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active (page 89 ).
5 FULL BAND
Excluding VSX-830: Lights when the Full Band Phase Control is switched on (page 74 ).
6 Listening mode indicators
! ALC – Lights when the ALC (Auto level control) mode is selected (page 71 ).
! AUTO SURROUND – Lights when the Auto Surround feature is switched on (page 71 ).
! STREAM DIRECT – Lights when Direct/Pure Direct is selected (page 72 ).
! ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of the Advanced Surround modes has been selected (page 72 ).
! STANDARD – Lights when one of the Standard Surround modes is switched on (page 71 ).
7 (PHASE CONTROL)
Lights when the Phase Control is switched on (page 73 ).
8 ATT
Lights when the input signal level is lowered to reduce distortion (page 85 ).
9 SOUND
Lights when the DIALOG E (Dialog Enhancement) or TONE (tone controls) features is selected (page 85 ).
10 Tuner indicators
! TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being received.
! STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode.
! MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set using MPX.
! RDS – Lights when an RDS broadcast is received.
11
Lights when the sound is muted.
12 Master volume level
Shows the overall volume level.
---” indicates the minimum level, and “+12dB” indicates the maximum level.
13 Input function indicators
Light to indicate the input function you have selected.
14 Scroll indicators
Light when there are more selectable items when making the various settings.
15 Speaker indicators
In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930: Lights to indicate the current speaker system using OUT P. (page 88 ).
In case of VSX-830: When the front panel’s SPEAKERS or remote control’s SP-A/B are pressed, the currently
selected speaker terminal indicator lights.
16 SLEEP
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 90 ).
17 Matrix decoding format indicators
! PRO LOGIC II (VSX-830 only) – This lights to indicate Pro Logic II decoding (page 71 ).
! Neo:6 – When one of the Neo:6 modes of the receiver is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 processing (page
71 ).
18 S.RTRV
Lights when the Auto Sound Retriever function is active (page 85 ).
19 Character display
Displays various system information.
20 Remote control mode indicator
Excluding VSX-830: Lights to indicate the receiver’s remote control mode setting. (Not displayed when set to 1.)
(page 110 )
 
16
Controls and displays
02
Front panel
VSX-1130/VSX-930
1 2 5
33
467 8
10 119 12
13 14 1615
VSX-830
1 2 5
67 8
10 119
1213 14
17 18
15
1 u STANDBY/ON
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.
2 INPUT SELECTOR dial
Use to select an input function.
3 Indicators
! MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/ADVANCED MCACC (VSX-830) – Lights when EQ is set to ON in the
AUDIO PARAMETER menu (page 85 ).
! FL OFF – Lights when “off” (nothing displayed) is selected with the display’s dimmer adjustment (page 90 ).
! HDMI – Blinks when connecting an HDMI-equipped component; lights when the component is connected
(page 27 ).
! WIRELESS – Lights when connected to the network with wireless. The light slowly blinks during WAC
(Wireless Accessary Configuration) mode (page 53 ).
4 MULTI-ZONE controls
Excluding VSX-830
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (page 32 ) use these controls to control the sub zone from the main
zone (page 89 ).
5 Character display
See Display on page 15 .
6 TUNER controls
! BAND – Switches between AM and FM radio bands (page 66 ).
! TUNER EDIT – Use with TUNE i/j, PRESET k/l and ENTER to memorize and name stations for recall
(page 66 ).
! TUNE i/j – Find radio frequencies (page 66 ).
! PRESET k/l – Find preset stations (page 66 ).
7 Remote sensor
Receives the signals from the remote control (page 10 ).
8 MASTER VOLUME dial
9 PHONES jack
Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.
10 MCACC SETUP MIC jack
Use to connect the supplied microphone (page 57 ).
11 SPEAKERS
Use to change the speaker terminal (page 88 ).
12 Listening mode buttons
! AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT – Switches between Auto Surround (page 71 ), Auto Level Control and
Stream Direct mode (page 72 ).
! STANDARD SURROUND – Press for Standard decoding and to switch various modes ( Pro Logic, Neo:6,
Stereo, etc.) (page 71 ).
! ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch between the various surround modes (page 72 ).
13 STATUS
Displays the IP address and information such as selected/set functions and the input signal on the display (page
90 ).
14 iPod iPhone DIRECT CONTROL
Change the receiver’s input to the iPod and enable iPod operations on the iPod (page 63 ).
 
17
Controls and displays
02
15 iPod/iPhone terminals
Use to connect your Apple iPod/iPhone as an audio source (page 34 ), or connect a USB device for audio and
photo playback (page 34 ).
16 HDMI 5 INPUT terminal
Excluding VSX-830
Use for connection to a compatible HDMI device (Video camera, etc.) (page 34 ).
17 DIMMER
VSX-830 only.
Dims or brightens the display (page 90 ).
18 ECO
VSX-830 only.
Use to switch the eco mode type (page 72 ).
 
18
 
Connecting your equipment .........................................................................................................19
Rear panel ......................................................................................................................................19
Determining the speakers’ application ........................................................................................20
Placing the speakers ...................................................................................................................... 22
Connecting the speakers ...............................................................................................................23
Installing your speaker system .....................................................................................................23
About the audio connection .........................................................................................................26
About the video converter ...........................................................................................................26
About HDMI ...................................................................................................................................27
Connecting your TV and playback components .........................................................................27
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box ........................................................29
Connecting other audio components ..........................................................................................30
Connecting the subwoofer ........................................................................................................... 31
Connecting AM/FM antennas .......................................................................................................31
Making MULTI-ZONE connections ................................................................................................32
Connecting to the network through LAN interface ...................................................................33
Connecting an iPod........................................................................................................................34
Connecting a USB device ..............................................................................................................34
Connecting an MHL-compatible device ....................................................................................... 34
Connecting an HDMI-equipped component to the front panel input ...................................... 34
Connecting an IR receiver .............................................................................................................35
Plugging in the receiver ................................................................................................................35
Connecting your equipment
(In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930)
19
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930)
03
Connecting your equipment
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This chapter
explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.
CAUTION
! Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.
! When making connections, also keep the power cords of the devices being connected unplugged from the
power outlets.
! Depending on the device being connected (CD, DVD or BD player, etc.), the methods of connection and ter-
minal names may differ from the explanations in this manual. Also refer to the operating instructions of the
respective devices.
Rear panel
A
1
TOP MIDDLE
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
CENTER
5.2.2ch
5.2ch
SPEAKER B
5.2.2ch
HDZONE / BI-AMP
FRONT
RLRL
RL
RL
(
Single
)
B
OUT
IN
/MHLBD
6
16-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
IR
P
R
P
B
Y
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM UNBAL
75
AM LOOP
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
1
2
DVD
ANALOG
1
(CD)
ASSIGNABLE
L
R
L
R
SAT/CBL
SELECTABLE
ARC CONTROL
(
DVD
)(
SAT/CBL
)
7.2ch
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
MAIN
HDZONE/MAIN
NETWORK
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
(SAT/CBL)
VIDEO
DVD
SAT/
CBL
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO IN
ANTENNA
CONTROL
12
(
TV
)
(
SAT/CBL
)
1
1
DIGITAL IN
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AC IN
Note
The input functions below are assigned by default to the receiver’s different input terminals. Refer to The Input
Setup menu on page 59 to change the assignments if other connections are used.
Input function
Input Terminals
HDMI Audio Component
BD
(BD)
DVD IN 1
SAT/CBL IN 2 COAXIAL IN
HDMI 3 IN 3
HDMI 4 IN 4
HDMI 5
(front panel)
IN 5
HDMI 6/MHL IN 6
TV OPTICAL
CD ANALOG-1
 
20
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930)
03
Determining the speakers’ application
This unit permits you to build various surround systems, in accordance with the number of speakers you have.
! Be sure to connect speakers to the front left and right channels (L and R).
! It is also possible to only connect one of the surround back speakers (SB) or neither.
! If you have two subwoofers, the second subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2 terminal.
Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction. In this
case, the same sound is output from the two subwoofers.
! When neither the top middle, surround back, or front wide speaker is connected, Dolby Atmos does not play.
Choose one from Plans [A] to [F] below.
Important
! The Speaker System setting must be made if you use any of the connections shown below other than [A] (see
Speaker system setting on page 106 ).
! The speakers from which sound is output can be switched according to the speaker layout/usage pattern
(sound is not necessarily output from all connected speakers). Use the OUT P. button to switch the speakers
from which sound is output. For details, see Switching the speaker terminals on page 88 .
[A] 7.2 channel surround system (Surround back/Top middle) connection
*Default setting
! Speaker System setting: 7.2ch/5.2.2ch
SBR
TMdL TMdR
SBL
SRSL
R
SW2
C
SW1
L
A 7.2 ch surround system connects the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
top middle speakers (TMdL/TMdR), the left and right surround speakers (SL/SR), the left and right surround back
speakers (SBL/SBR), and the subwoofers (SW 1/SW 2).
It is not possible to produce sound simultaneously from the surround back speakers and the top middle speakers.
This surround system produces a more true-to-life sound from above.
The speakers from which sound is output can be switched using the OUT P. button. For details, see Switching
the speaker terminals on page 88 .
Playback of Dolby Atmos requires a connection with surround back speakers or top middle speakers.
[B] Dolby Enabled Speaker system connection
*Default setting
! Speaker System setting: 7.2ch/5.2.2ch
Speaker Setting: Dolby Sp (Front)
SBR
TMdL
TMdR
SBL
SRSL
R
SW2
C
SW1
L
Speaker Setting: Dolby Sp (Surr)
SBR
TMdL TMdR
SBL
SRSL
R
SW2
C
SW1
L
7.2 ch surround system that consists of connected front left/right speakers (L/R), center speaker (C), left/right
surround speakers (SL/SR), left/right surround back speakers (SBL/SBR), subwoofer (SW 1/SW 2), Dolby Enabled
Speaker (TMdL/TMdR). For information on Dolby Enabled Speaker, refer to page 24 .
Audio will not be output at the same time from the surround back speaker and a Dolby Enabled Speaker.
This surround system produces a more true-to-life sound from above.
The speakers from which sound is output can be switched using the OUT P. button. For details, see Switching
the speaker terminals on page 88 .
Playback of Dolby Atmos requires a connection with surround back speakers or top middle speakers that use
Dolby Enabled Speakers.
 
21
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930)
03
[C] 7.2 channel surround system (Surround back/Front wide) connection
! Speaker System setting: 7.2ch SB/FW
SBRSBL
SRSL
FWR
FWL R
SW2
C
SW1
L
A 7.2 ch surround system connects the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
front wide speakers (FWL/FWR), the left and right surround speakers (SL/SR), the left and right surround back
speakers (SBL/SBR), and the subwoofers (SW 1/SW 2).
It is not possible to produce sound simultaneously from the surround back speakers and the front wide speakers.
The speakers from which sound is output can be switched using the OUT P. button. For details, see Switching
the speaker terminals on page 88 .
Playback of Dolby Atmos requires a connection with a surround back speaker or front wide speaker.
[D] 7.2 channel surround system & Speaker B connection
! Speaker System setting: Speaker B
SBRSBL
SR
RL
SL
R
SW2
C
SW1
L
Speaker B
With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.2-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo
playback of the same sound on the B speakers. The same connections also allow for 7.2-channel surround sound
in the main zone when not using the B speakers.
The speakers from which sound is output can be switched using the OUT P. button. For details, see Switching
the speaker terminals on page 88 .
Playback of Dolby Atmos requires a connection with surround back speakers. However, when SP: d A+B ON or
Speaker B is selected, Dolby Atmos playback is not possible.
[E] 5.2 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality
surround)
! Speaker System setting: Front Bi-Amp
SRSL
SW2
C
Front Bi-Amp
SW1
LR
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high sound quality with 5.2-channel surround sound.
You cannot playback Dolby Atmos with this system.
[F] 5.2 channel surround system & HDZONE connection (Multi Zone)
! Speaker System setting: HDZONE
Main zone
Sub zone
HDZONE
SRSL
SW2
C
SW1
LR
RL
With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.2-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo
playback on another component in HDZONE. (The selection of input devices is limited.)
You cannot playback Dolby Atmos with this system.
Other speaker connections
! Your favorite speaker connections can be selected even if you have fewer than 5.2 speakers (except front left/
right speakers).
! When not connecting a subwoofer, connect speakers with low frequency reproduction capabilities to the front
channel. (The subwoofer’s low frequency component is played from the front speakers, so the speakers could
be damaged.)
! After connecting, be sure to conduct the Full Auto MCACC (speaker environment setting) procedure. See
Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 57 .
 
22
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930)
03
Placing the speakers
Refer to the chart below for placement of the speakers you intend to connect.
Listener speaker placement guidelines
Listener speakers, such as Left, Right, Center, Left Surround, and Right Surround, are placed at ear level relative
to the listener position.
L
SW
2SW
1
C
FWL
SL
SBL
SBR
SB
SR
FWR
R
30 30
60
60
60
120 120
! Place the surround speakers at 120º from the center. If you, (1) use the surround back speaker, and, (2) don’t
use the front wide speakers, we recommend placing the surround speaker right beside you.
! If you intend to connect only one surround back speaker, place it directly behind you.
Top speaker placement guidelines
Top middle speakers (TMdL, TMdR) are placed above the listener position on the ceiling.
Layout as seen from above
TMdL
TMdR
30°
30°
! All top speaker pairs should preferably be mounted along a vertical line that is a ±30º horizontal from the
center-front reference. However, these speakers may be placed as far as the side walls and anywhere between
the side walls and the middle of the room, if needed.
! We also recommend that the top forward speakers and top backward speakers be installed at a symmetrical
distance from the front and rear of right above, respectively.
Layout as seen from the side
FL / FR
Height of Front
Listener Speakers
Height of top speakers
(between two times to three
times the height of the front
listener speakers)
TMdL /
TMdR
65° 100°
! The height of the Top Middle speakers mounted on the ceiling should preferably be no more than three times
the height and no less than two times the height of the front speakers at listener height.
! The Top Middle speakers should be directed straight down, rather than directed at a central listener position.
! We recommend that the top middle speakers be installed slightly forward from right above.
Some tips for improving sound quality
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines
should help you to get the best sound from your system.
! The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about ear-level when you’re
listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a
wall is not recommended.
! For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from the TV.
! If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the speakers at a suffi-
cient distance from your CRT TV.
! If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a narrower
angle.
! Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is localized at the TV
screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of the front left
and right speakers.
! It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the size of the room. Use
less of an angle for bigger rooms.
! Surround and surround back speakers should be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm higher than your ears and tilted
slightly downward. Make sure the speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be
more directly behind the listener than for home theater playback.
! Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the front and center speak-
ers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
 
23
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930)
03
Connecting the speakers
Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to match
these up with the terminals on the speakers themselves.
This unit supports speakers with a nominal impedance of 6 W to 16 W.
CAUTION
! These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when con-
necting or disconnecting the speaker cables, disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated
parts.
! Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal. If any
of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.
Bare wire connections
CAUTION
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality, but also reduces the risk
of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of external shocks such as
earthquakes.
1 Twist exposed wire strands together.
2 Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire.
3 Tighten terminal.
123
10 mm
Notes
! Please refer to the manual that came with your speakers for details on how to connect the other end of the
speaker cables to your speakers.
! Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer. It is not possible to connect using speaker cables.
! If you have two subwoofers, the second subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2 terminal.
Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction. In this
case, the same sound is output from the two subwoofers.
Installing your speaker system
At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround speakers should
always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back speaker if you like (it must be con-
nected to the left surround back terminal).
Standard surround connection
! When only connecting one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single) terminals.
TOP MIDDLE
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
CENTER
5.2.2ch
5.2ch
SPEAKER B
5.2.2ch
HDZONE / BI-AMP
FRONT
RLRL
RL
RL
(Single
)
B
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
1
2
7.2ch
AUDIO OUT
A
TOP MIDDLE
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
CENTER
5.2.2ch
5.2ch
SPEAKER B
5.2.2ch
HDZONE / BI-AMP
FRONT
RLRL
RL
RL
(
Single
)
B
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
1
2
7.2ch
AUDIO OUT
A
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
The top middle terminals can also be used for the front wide and Speaker B speakers.
Top middle right To p middle left
7.2 ch SB/FW setting
Front wide right Front wide left
Speaker B setting
Speaker B - right Speaker B - left
Front right Center Subwoofer 2Subwoofer
1F
ront left
Surround back speaker terminals can be
used to connect to the sub zone.
Surround left
7.2 ch/5.2.2 ch setting
Surround back right Surround back left
Surround back right Surround back left
Surround back right Surround back left
HDZONE setting
HDZONE - Right HDZONE - Left
Surround right
7.2 ch/5.2.2 ch setting
7.2 ch SB/FW setting
Speaker B setting
 
24
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930)
03
Dolby Enabled Speaker
Dolby enabled speakers bring a new sense of height and immersion to the listening experience without installa-
tion of overhead speakers.
Ceiling
Listener
Dolby Enabled
Speaker
The front or surround speaker and Dolby Enabled Speaker are explained as one product group for the following
connections. Connect the Standard surround connection on page 23 of the TOP MIDDLE terminal when using
a Dolby Enabled Speaker as an independent product.
! Speaker System setting: 7.2ch/5.2.2ch
Speaker Setting: Dolby Sp (Front)
TOP MIDDLE
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
CENTER
5.2.2ch
5.2.ch
SPEAKER B
5.2.2ch
HDZONE / BI-AMP
FRONT
RLRL
RL
RL
(Single
)
B
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
1
2
7.2.ch
AUDIO OUT
A
TOP MIDDLE
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
CENTER
5.2.2ch
5.2ch
SPEAKER B
5.2.2ch
HDZONE / BI-AMP
FRONT
RLRL
RL
RL
(
Single
)
B
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
1
2
7.2ch
AUDIO OUT
A
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
Front right
Top middle right
Dolby Enabled Speaker
Dolby Enabled Speaker
Center
Subwoofer 2
Subwoofer 1
Front left
Top middle left
Surround left
Surround back right Surround back left
Surround right
When only connecting one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single) terminals.
 
25
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930)
03
! Speaker System setting: 7.2ch/5.2.2ch
Speaker Setting: Dolby Sp (Surr)
TOP MIDDLE
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
CENTER
5.2.2ch
5.2.ch
SPEAKER B
5.2.2ch
HDZONE / BI-AMP
FRONT
RLRL
RL
RL
(
Single
)
B
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
1
2
7.2.ch
AUDIO OUT
A
TOP MIDDLE
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
CENTER
5.2.2ch
5.2ch
SPEAKER B
5.2.2ch
HDZONE / BI-AMP
FRONT
RLRL
RL
RL
(
Single
)
B
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
1
2
7.2ch
AUDIO OUT
A
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
Top middle right Top middle left
Front right Center Subwoofer 2Subwoofer
1F
ront left
Surround leftSurround right
Surround back right
Surround back left
Dolby Enabled Speaker Dolby Enabled Speaker
When only connecting one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single) terminals.
Bi-amping your speakers
Speaker System setting: Front Bi-Amp
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver and low frequency driver of your speakers to different
amplifiers for better crossover performance. Your speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate termi-
nals for high and low) and the sound improvement will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.
TOP MIDDLE
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
CENTER
5.2.2ch
5.2ch
SPEAKER B
5.2.2ch
HDZONE / BI-AMP
FRONT
RLRL
RL
RL
(Single
)
B
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
1
2
7.2ch
AUDIO OUT
A
TOP MIDDLE
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
CENTER
5.2.2ch
5.2ch
SPEAKER B
5.2.2ch
HDZONE / BI-AMP
FRONT
RLRL
RL
RL
(
Single
)
B
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
1
2
7.2ch
AUDIO OUT
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
High
Low
High
Low
Center Subwoofer 2Subwoofer 1
Surround leftSurround right
Front right Front left
Bi-amp compatible
speaker
Bi-amp compatible
speaker
A
CAUTION
! Most speakers with both High and Low terminals have two metal plates that connect the High to the Low
terminals. These must be removed when you are bi-amping the speakers or you could severely damage the
amplifier. See your speaker manual for more information.
! If your speakers have a removable crossover network, make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing so
may damage your speakers.
! When neither the top middle, surround back, or front wide speaker is connected, Dolby Atmos does not play.
 
26
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930)
03
Bi-wiring your speakers
Your speakers can also be bi-wired if they support bi-amping.
! With these connections, the Speaker System setting makes no difference.
CAUTION
! Don’t connect different speakers from the same terminal in this way.
! When bi-wiring as well, heed the cautions for bi-amping shown above.
% To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to the speaker terminal on the receiver.
About the audio connection
Transferable audio signals
Sound signal priority
HDMI HD audio
Digital (Coaxial)Conventional digital audio
RCA (Analog)
(White/Red)
Conventional analog audio
Digital (Optical)
Types of cables and terminals
! With an HDMI cable, video and audio signals can be transferred in high quality over a single cable.
! For HD audio, see About HDMI on page 27 .
About the video converter
The video converter ensures that all video sources are output through the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2
terminals.
If the TV is only connected to the receiver’s composite VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, all the other video devices
must be connected through composite connections.
If several video components are assigned to the same input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 59 ),
the converter gives priority to HDMI, component, then composite (in that order).
VIDEO IN
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
Y
P
B
PR
HDMI IN HDMI OUT
High picture quality
Video signals
can be output
Terminal for connection
with source device
Terminal for connection
with TV monitor
Notes
! Among the HDMI input signals for this receiver, 1080p can be up-converted to 4K. However, this is limited to
when connected with 4K compatible televisions. Please set SCAL settings to AUTO (page 87 ).
! The video converter may not operate and the video may not be output depending on the input signal. In such
case, put the SCAL settings to PURE and connect both the input equipment and the TV with the same type of
cable (page 87 ).
! In principle, input signals from COMPONENT VIDEO IN and VIDEO IN are output from the HDMI terminal
without resolution conversion. Depending on the resolution of the connected television, there maybe cases
where video does not output to the screen.
This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.
 
27
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930)
03
About HDMI
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio.
This receiver incorporates High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI
®
/
TM
) technology.
This receiver supports the functions described below through HDMI connections.
! Digital transfer of uncompressed video (contents protected by HDCP (1080p/24, 1080p/60, etc.))
! HDCP 2.2 compatible terminal: BD, DVD (HDMI IN 1), SAT/CBL (HDMI IN 2), HDMI OUT 1, HDMI OUT 2
! 3D signal transfer
! Deep Color signal transfer
! x.v.Color signal transfer
! ARC (Audio Return Channel)
! 4K signal transfer
This may not operate properly, depending on the connected equipment.
4K 24p, 4K 25p, 4K 30p, 4K 50p and 4K 60p signals are supported.
! Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital audio signals (192 kHz or less) for up to 8 channels
! Input of the following digital audio formats:
Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High bitrate audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio), CD, SACD (DSD signal), OBJECT based audio (Atmos)
! Synchronized operation with components using the Control with HDMI function (see Control with HDMI func-
tion on page 81 )
Notes
! An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High
Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a
separate adaptor (DVIdHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support audio signals. Consult
your local audio dealer for more information.
! If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on
the front panel display. Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be dis-
played, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction.
! Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal
transfers.
! This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage
of these formats, however, make sure that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corre-
sponding format.
! Use a High Speed HDMI
®
/
TM
Cable. If an HDMI cable other than a High Speed HDMI
®
/
TM
Cable is used, it may
not work properly.
! When an HDMI cable with a built-in equalizer is connected, it may not operate properly.
! Signal transfer is only possible when connected to a compatible component.
! HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to be recognized. Due to this, interruption in the
audio may occur when switching between audio formats or beginning playback.
! Turning on/off the device connected to this unit’s HDMI OUT terminal during playback, or disconnecting/con-
necting the HDMI cable during playback, may cause noise or interrupted audio.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and other countries.
“x.v.Color” and are trademarks of Sony Corporation.
Connecting your TV and playback components
Connecting using HDMI
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component (Blu-ray Disc player (BD), etc.), you can connect it
to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable.
If the TV and playback components support the Control with HDMI feature, the convenient Control with HDMI
functions can be used (see Control with HDMI function on page 81 ).
1
(
TV
)
(
SAT/CBL
)
1
1
DIGITAL IN
/MHLBD
6
16-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
SELECTABLE
ARC CONTROL
(
DVD
)(
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
MAIN
HDZONE/MAIN
12
ANALOG
1
(CD)
ASSIGNABLE
L
R
SAT/CBL
AUDIO IN
(
TV
)
(
SAT/CBL
)
1
1
DIGITAL IN
/MHLBD
64321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
SELECTABLE
ARCCONTROL
(
DVD
)(
SAT/CBL
)
MAIN
HDZONE/MAIN
12
ANALOG
1
(CD)
ASSIGNABLE
L
R
SAT/CBL
AUDIO IN
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIAL OPTICAL
ANALOG
RL
AUDIO OUT
HDMI INHDMI OUTHDMI OUT
HDMI/DVI-compatible
Blu-ray Disc player
Other HDMI/DVI-
equipped component
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor
Select one
This connection is required in
order to listen to the sound of
the TV over the receiver.
 
28
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930)
03
! When connecting to an HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor using the HDMI OUT 2 terminal, switch the HDMI
output setting to OUT 2 or OUT 1+2. See Switching the HDMI output on page 88 .
Also, MAIN/HDZONE must be set to MAIN beforehand (page 111 ).
! For input components, connections other than HDMI connections are also possible (see Connecting your DVD
player with no HDMI output on page 28 ).
! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio cables.
When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC (Audio
Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV can be input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT terminal, so
there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set ARC at HDMI Setup to ON (see HDMI Setup on
page 82 ).
After setting the ARC, some time may be required for the connected device to be recognized and the sound to
be produced.
If you use a coaxial digital audio cable or RCA (analog) audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digi-
tal or analog audio input you connected the TV to (see The Input Setup menu on page 59 ).
Please refer to the TV’s operation manual for directions on connections and setup for the TV.
! If the TV to be connected using HDMI supports 4K/60p, you can switch the 4K/60p signal output setting in
accordance with TV performance. When the 4K/60p setting is changed to 4:4:4, the video image may not be
output normally unless the HDMI cable supports 4K/60p 4:4:4 24 bit (18 Gbps transmission). In such a case,
select 4:2:0 (page 88 ).
! You cannot input 4K/60p 4:4:4 24 bit video from HDMI IN 3 to the IN 6 terminal. Use the BD IN, HDMI IN 1 or
HDMI IN 2 terminal.
! The HDMI OUT 2 terminal outputs 4K/60p 4:4:4 24 bit video when MAIN/HDZONE is set to MAIN. When it is
set to HDZONE, the 4K/60p 4:4:4 24 bit video is not output.
Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component with no
HDMI output) to the receiver.
1
1
/MHLBD
6
16-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
P
R
P
B
Y
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT
VIDEO
DVD
ANALOG
1
(CD)
ASSIGNABLE
L
R
L
R
SAT/CBL
SELECTABLE
ARC CONTROL
(
DVD
)(
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
MAIN
HDZONE/MAIN
AUDIO IN
(SAT/CBL)
VIDEO
DVD
SAT/
CBL
VIDEO IN
12
(
TV
)
(
SAT/CBL
)
1
1
DIGITAL IN
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
1
/MHLBD
6
16-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
PR
PB
Y
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT
VIDEO
DVD
ANALOG
1
(CD)
ASSIGNABLE
L
R
L
R
SAT/CBL
SELECTABLE
ARCCONTROL
(
DVD
)(
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
MAIN
HDZONE/MAIN
AUDIO IN
(SAT/CBL)
VIDEO
DVD
SAT/
CBL
VIDEO IN
12
(
TV
)
(
SAT/CBL
)
1
1
DIGITAL IN
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
HDMI IN
ANALOG
RL
AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIALOPTICAL
Select one
VIDEO
VIDEO OUT
Select one
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor
DVD player, etc.
! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio cables
(page 27 ).
When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC (Audio
Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV can be input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT 1 terminal, so
there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set ARC at HDMI Setup to ON (see HDMI Setup on
page 82 ).
! When connecting to a DVD player with an optical digital audio cable or a coaxial digital audio cable, perform-
ing input terminal settings are necessary (page 59 ).
! If HDZONE is set to on, video images connected using a video cable or component cable are not output from
the HDMI terminal. To output video images, turn HDZONE off (page 89 ).
 
29
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930)
03
Connecting your TV with no HDMI input
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component) to
the receiver.
Important
! With these connections, the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected with an HDMI
cable. Connect the receiver and TV using the same type of video cable as used to connect the receiver and
player.
! Also, when the receiver and TV are connected by anything other than an HDMI cable, the OSD function allow-
ing display of the receiver’s settings, operations, etc., on the TV’s screen cannot be used. In this case, watch
the receiver’s front panel display while performing the various operations and making settings.
1
1
/MHLBD
6
16-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
P
R
P
B
Y
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT
VIDEO
DVD
ANALOG
1
(CD)
ASSIGNABLE
L
R
L
R
SAT/CBL
SELECTABLE
ARC CONTROL
(
DVD
)(
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
MAIN
HDZONE/MAIN
AUDIO IN
(SAT/CBL)
VIDEO
DVD
SAT/
CBL
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO IN
12
(
TV
)
(
SAT/CBL
)
1
1
DIGITAL IN
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
1
/MHLBD
6
16-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
PR
PB
Y
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT
VIDEO
DVD
ANALOG
1
(CD)
ASSIGNABLE
L
R
L
R
SAT/CBL
SELECTABLE
ARCCONTROL
(
DVD
) (
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
MAIN
HDZONE/MAIN
AUDIO IN
(SAT/CBL)
VIDEO
DVD
SAT/
CBL
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO IN
12
ASSIGNABLE
(
TV
)
(
SAT/CBL
)
1
1
DIGITAL IN
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO IN
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIALOPTICAL
ANALOG
RL
AUDIO OUT
Select one
HDMI OUT
TV
DVD player, etc.
! In order to listening to HD audio with this receiver, connect an HDMI cable, and use analog video cable for
video signal input.
Depending on the player, it may not be possible to output video signals to both HDMI and other video output
(composite, etc.) simultaneously, and it may be necessary to make video output settings. Please refer to the
operating instructions supplied with your player for more information.
! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio cables
(page 27 ).
! When connecting to a DVD player with an optical digital audio cable or a coaxial digital audio cable, perform-
ing input terminal settings are necessary (page 59 ).
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top box to (see The
Input Setup menu on page 59 ).
1
1
/MHLBD
6
16-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
P
R
P
B
Y
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT
VIDEO
DVD
ANALOG
1
(CD)
ASSIGNABLE
L
R
L
R
SAT/CBL
SELECTABLE
ARC CONTROL
(
DVD
)(
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
MAIN
HDZONE/MAIN
AUDIO IN
(SAT/CBL)
VIDEO
DVD
SAT/
CBL
VIDEO IN
12
(
TV
)
(
SAT/CBL
)
1
1
DIGITAL IN
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
1
/MHLBD
6
16-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
PR
PB
Y
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT
VIDEO
DVD
ANALOG
1
(CD)
ASSIGNABLE
L
R
L
R
SAT/CBL
SELECTABLE
ARCCONTROL
(
DVD
)(
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
MAIN
HDZONE/MAIN
AUDIO IN
(SAT/CBL)
VIDEO
DVD
SAT/
CBL
VIDEO IN
12
(
TV
)
(
SAT/CBL
)
1
1
DIGITAL IN
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
VIDEO
VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIALOPTICAL
ANALOG
RL
AUDIO OUT
Select one
STB
! If HDZONE is set to on, video images connected using a video cable or component cable are not output from
the HDMI terminal. To output video images, turn HDZONE off (page 89 ).
! If you use an optical digital audio cable or RCA (analog) audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digi-
tal input you connected the set-top box to (see The Input Setup menu on page 59 ).
 
30
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930)
03
! If your set-top box is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we recommend connecting it to the receiver’s
HDMI SAT/CBL IN terminal. When doing so, also connect the receiver and TV by HDMI (see Connecting using
HDMI on page 27 ).
/MHLBD
6
16-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
SELECTABLE
ARCCONTROL
(
DVD
) (
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
MAIN
HDZONE/MAIN
12
ASSIGNABLE
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor
STB
! Even if your set-top box is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, in some cases the sound is output from
the digital audio output (optical or coaxial) and only the video is output from the HDMI output terminal. In this
case, make the HDMI and digital audio connections as shown below.
/MHLBD
6
16-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
SELECTABLE
ARCCONTROL
(
DVD
) (
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
MAIN
HDZONE/MAIN
12
ASSIGNABLE
(
TV
)
(
SAT/CBL
)
1
1
DIGITAL IN
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIALOPTICAL
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor
STB
If you use an optical digital audio cable or RCA (analog) audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which
digital input you connected the set-top box to (see The Input Setup menu on page 59 ).
Connecting other audio components
This receiver has both digital and analog inputs, allowing you to connect audio components for playback.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see
also The Input Setup menu on page 59 ).
1
/MHLBD
6
16-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
SELECTABLE
ARC CONTROL
(
DVD
)(
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
MAIN
HDZONE/MAIN
12
ANALOG
1
(CD)
ASSIGNABLE
L
R
SAT/CBL
AUDIO IN
(
TV
)
(
SAT/CBL
)
1
1
DIGITAL IN
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
/MHLBD
64321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
SELECTABLE
ARCCONTROL
(
DVD
)(
SAT/CBL
)
MAIN
HDZONE/MAIN
12
ANALOG
1
(CD)
ASSIGNABLE
L
R
SAT/CBL
AUDIO IN
(
TV
)
(
SAT/CBL
)
1
1
DIGITAL IN
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIALOPTICAL
ANALOG
RL
AUDIO OUT
Select one
CD player, etc.
! If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the ANALOG IN 1
(CD) inputs instead.
 
31
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930)
03
Connecting the subwoofer
2
MONITOR OUT
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
1
AUDIO OUT
2
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
1
AUDIO OUT
ANALOG
INPUT
Powered
subwoofer 1
ANALOG
INPUT
Powered
subwoofer 2
! If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front speaker setting (see Speaker Setting on page 103 ) to
LARGE.
! If you have two subwoofers, the second subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2 terminal.
Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction. In this
case, the same sound is output from the two subwoofers.
Connecting AM/FM antennas
Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire antenna as shown below. To improve reception and sound quality,
connect external antennas (see Connecting external antennas on page 31 ).
FM UNBAL
75
AM LOOP
ANTENNA
1
3
ab c
4
5
2
1 Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna wires.
2 Push open the tabs, then insert one wire fully into each terminal, then release the tabs to
secure the AM antenna wires.
3 Fix the AM loop antenna to the attached stand.
To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the direction indicated by the arrow (fig. a) then clip the loop onto the
stand (fig. b).
! If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a wall or other surface, secure the stand with screws (fig. c) before
clipping the loop to the stand. Make sure the reception is clear.
4 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and in a direction giving the best reception.
5 Connect the FM wire antenna into the FM antenna socket.
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.
Connecting external antennas
To improve FM reception, connect an external FM antenna to FM UNBAL 75 W.
FM UNBAL
75
AM LOOP
ANTENNA
75 Ω coaxial cable
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m length of vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP terminals without
disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna.
For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally outdoors.
FM UNBAL
75
AM LOOP
ANTENNA
Outdoor antenna
Indoor antenna
(vinyl-coated wire)
5 m to 6 m
 
32
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930)
03
Making MULTI-ZONE connections
Equipment connected to this receiver in a different room (sub zone) from a room with this receiver (main zone)
can be played by operating this receiver (multi-zone function). This receiver can configure a HDZONE system
apart from the main zone. Not only can the same source be played simultaneously in the main and sub zones,
different sources can also be played.
By preparing a different amplifier with a HDMI input terminal in the sub zone, the other amplifier and TV monitor
can be connected to this receiver. When there is no other amplifier, the speaker terminal of this receiver can be
used. High resolution via HDMI can be enjoyed in the sub zone (HDZONE function).
Important
! The settings must be changed at ZONE Setup in order to use the multi-zone function (page 111 ).
! MAIN/HDZONE at ZONE Setup must be set to HDZONE in order to use the HDZONE function (page 111 ).
MULTI-ZONE listening options
The following table shows the signals that can be output to HDZONE:
Sub Zone Input functions available
HDZONE
(HDMI)
BD, DVD, SAT/CBL, INTERNET RADIO, PANDORA, Spotify, MEDIA SERVER, FAVOR-
ITES, iPod/USB, HDMI 1, HDMI 2, HDMI 3, HDMI 4, HDMI 5, HDMI 6/MHL, BT AUDIO
(Outputs HDMI audio and video signals)
Notes
! The inputs that can be switched differ according to how terminals HDMI IN 1 to IN 6 are assigned. Upon ship-
ment from the factory, the input terminals are assigned to DVD, SAT/CBL, HDMI 3, HDMI 4, HDMI 5 and
HDMI 6, in order starting from terminal HDMI IN 1.
! The video/audio signals of the RCA analog input terminals, the digital input terminals (OPTICAL and
COAXIAL) and the COMPONENT VIDEO input terminals cannot be up-converted and output to the HDZONE.
! When any of the HDMI 3 to HDMI 6/MHL inputs is selected in the main zone, it is only possible to select the
same input as in the main zone for the HDZONE. (Inputs other than the ones listed here can be selected.)
The same limitations apply when one of the above inputs is selected for the HDZONE.
! When any of the INTERNET RADIO, PANDORA, Spotify, MEDIA SERVER, FAVORITES, iPod/USB or
BT AUDIO inputs is selected in the main zone, it is only possible to select the same input as in the main zone
for the HDZONE. (Inputs other than the ones listed here can be selected.)
The same limitations apply when one of the above inputs is selected for the HDZONE.
MULTI-ZONE setup using HDMI terminal (HDZONE)
Important
! MAIN/HDZONE at ZONE Setup must be set to HDZONE in order to use the HDZONE function (page 111 ).
! To use the HDZONE functions, set Control or Control Mode in HDMI Setup to OFF. For details, see HDMI
Setup on page 82 .
% Connect a separate receiver to the HDMI OUT 2 (HDZONE) terminal on this receiver.
Connect speakers and a TV to the HDZONE receiver as shown on the illustration below.
SELECTABLE
ARC CONTROL
HDMI OUT
MAIN
HDZONE/MAIN
12
SELECTABLE
ARCCONTROL
HDMI OUT
MAIN
HDZONE/MAIN
12
HDMI IN
Sub zone (HDZONE) Main zone
 
33
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930)
03
Multi-zone connection using the HDMI terminal and speaker terminals
(HDZONE)
Important
! The settings must be changed at ZONE Setup in order to use the HDZONE function (page 111 ).
! To use the HDZONE functions, set Control or Control Mode in HDMI Setup to OFF. For details, see HDMI
Setup on page 82 .
! You must select HDZONE in Speaker system setting (page 106 ) to use this setup.
1 Connect the speaker to the surround back speaker terminal.
Which speaker terminal is connected defers depending on the Speaker System (page 106 ) setting. For details,
see Installing your speaker system on page 23 .
The following figure shows the connection of the surround back speaker terminal.
2 Connect a TV monitor to the HDMI OUT 2 (HDZONE) terminal on this receiver.
SELECTABLE
ARC CONTROL
HDMI OUT
MAIN
HDZONE/MAIN
12
SURROUND BACK
HDZONE / BI-AMP
RL
(Single
)
SELECTABLE
ARCCONTROL
HDMI OUT
MAIN
HDZONE/MAIN
12
SURROUND BACK
HDZONE / BI-AMP
RL
(
Single
)
RL
HDMI IN
2
1
Sub zone (HDZONE) Main zone
Connecting to the network through LAN interface
By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN terminal, you can listen to Internet radio stations. To listen
to Internet radio stations, you must sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service Provider) beforehand.
When connected in this way, you can play audio files stored on the components on the local network, including
your computer.
1
NETWORK
NETWORK
WAN
321
LAN
Internet
Modem
Router
LAN cable (sold separately)
to LAN port
to LAN port
Computer
NAS
Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to the LAN terminal on your router (with or without the built-in DHCP
server function) with a straight LAN cable (CAT 5 or higher).
Turn on the DHCP server function of your router. In case your router does not have the built-in DHCP server func-
tion, it is necessary to set up the network manually. For details, see Setting network connection on page 51 .
LAN terminal specifications
! LAN terminal : Ethernet jack (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
Notes
! When connecting the wireless LAN, please use with the wireless LAN antenna upright.
! The range of movement of the wireless LAN antenna is as indicated in the diagram below. There is danger that
you may break it if unnecessary force is applied.
1
Wireless LAN antenna
! Refer to the operation manual of the equipment you have as the connected equipment and connection method
may differ depending on your Internet environment.
! When using a broadband Internet connection, a contract with an Internet service provider is required. For
more details, contact your nearest Internet service provider.
 
34
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930)
03
Connecting an iPod
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod
using the controls of this receiver.
5V 1 A
HDMI 5 INPUT
iPod/iPhone
USB cable included with the iPod
Tip
! An iPod/iPhone can be connected to the receiver. For details on supported models and versions of the respec-
tive products, see Playing an iPod on page 63 .
% Switch the receiver into standby, and then use the iPod cable to connect your iPod to the
iPod/iPhone terminal on the front panel of this receiver.
! For the cable connection, also refer to the operating instructions for your iPod.
! When connecting an iPhone to this unit, keep the iPhone at least 20 cm away from this unit. If the iPhone is
kept closer to this unit and a telephone call is received by the iPhone, noise may be output from this device.
! iPod recharging occurs whenever an iPod is connected to this unit. (Recharging is enabled only when the
unit’s power is turned on.)
! For instructions on playing the iPod, see Playing an iPod on page 63 .
Connecting a USB device
It is possible to play audio and photo files by connecting USB devices to this receiver.
5V 1 A
HDMI 5 INPUT
USB mass
storage device
% Switch the receiver into standby then connect your USB device to the USB terminal on the
front panel of this receiver.
! This receiver does not support a USB hub.
! For instructions on playing the USB device, see Playing a USB device on page 64 .
Connecting an MHL-compatible device
An MHL-compatible mobile device can be connected to enjoy 3D/Full-HD videos, high quality multi-channel
audio, and photos etc., with charge the battery on the receiver. Use the MHL cable to connect the device.
/MHLBD
6
16-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
SELECTABLE
ARC CONTROL
(
DVD
)(
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
MAIN
HDZONE/MAIN
12
ASSIGNABLE
1
/MHLBD
6
16-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
SELECTABLE
ARC CONTROL
(
DVD
)(
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
MAIN
HDZONE/MAIN
12
ASSIGNABLE
MHL enabled
device
MHL cable
% Switch the receiver into standby then use the MHL cable to connect your MHL enabled
device to the MHL terminal on the rear panel of this receiver.
! To automatically switch to the MHL input when an MHL-compatible device is connected, see MHL Setup on
page 109 .
! The MHL-compatible device is recharged whenever it is connected to this unit. (Recharging is enabled only
when the unit’s power is turned on.)
! For instructions on playing the MHL-compatible device, see Playing an MHL-compatible device on page 65 .
! Do not place the MHL device on this unit which has the power turned on.
Connecting an HDMI-equipped component to the front panel
input
5V 1 A
HDMI 5 INPUT
Video camera (etc.)
 
35
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930)
03
Connecting an IR receiver
If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote
control in another zone, you can use an optional IR receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your
system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of this receiver.
! Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR
receiver remote sensor window.
! Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your com-
ponent to check for IR compatibility.
! If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote
sensor on the front panel.
1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR IN jack on the rear of this receiver.
1
OUT
IN
IR
CONTROL
OUT
IN
IR
CONTROL
IN
IR
Closet or shelving unit
Non-Pioneer
component
IR receiver
2 Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the IR OUT jack on the rear of this receiver
to link it to the IR receiver.
Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for the type of cable necessary for the connection.
Plugging in the receiver
Only plug in after you have connected all your components to this receiver, including the speakers.
CAUTION
! Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the
power cord when your hands are wet, as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the
unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never make a
knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The power cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be
stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the power cord once
in a while. If you find it damaged, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company for a
replacement.
! Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this unit.
! Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than that described below.
! The receiver should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular use,
e.g., when on vacation.
1 Plug the supplied power cord into the AC IN socket on the back of the receiver.
2 Plug the other end into a power outlet.
 
36
 
Connecting your equipment .........................................................................................................37
Rear panel ......................................................................................................................................37
Determining the speakers’ application ........................................................................................37
Placing the speakers ...................................................................................................................... 38
Connecting the speakers ...............................................................................................................39
Installing your speaker system .....................................................................................................39
About the audio connection .........................................................................................................40
About HDMI ...................................................................................................................................41
Connecting your TV and playback components .........................................................................41
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box ........................................................43
Connecting other audio components ..........................................................................................44
Connecting the subwoofer ........................................................................................................... 45
Connecting AM/FM antennas .......................................................................................................45
Connecting to the network through LAN interface ...................................................................46
Connecting an iPod........................................................................................................................46
Connecting a USB device ..............................................................................................................46
Connecting an MHL-compatible device ....................................................................................... 47
Plugging in the receiver ................................................................................................................47
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-830)
37
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-830)
04
Connecting your equipment
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This chapter
explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.
CAUTION
! Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.
! When making connections, also keep the power cords of the devices being connected unplugged from the
power outlets.
! Depending on the device being connected (CD, DVD or BD player, etc.), the methods of connection and ter-
minal names may differ from the explanations in this manual. Also refer to the operating instructions of the
respective devices.
Rear panel
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
1
1
SURROUND / BI-AMPCENTER
SPEAKER A
DIGITAL IN
FRONT
RL
RL
/MHLBD
5
15-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
FM UNBAL
75
AM LOOP
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
1
2
DVD
LR
SAT/CBL
ARC CONTROL
(
DVD
)(
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
OUT
NETWORK
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO INVIDEO IN
MONITOR OUT
ANTENNA
AC IN
Note
The input functions below are assigned by default to the receiver’s different input terminals. Refer to The Input
Setup menu on page 59 to change the assignments if other connections are used.
Input function
Input Terminals
HDMI Audio
BD
(BD)
DVD IN 1
SAT/CBL IN 2
HDMI 3 IN 3
HDMI 4 IN 4
HDMI 5/MHL
IN 5
TV OPTICAL
CD COAXIAL
Determining the speakers’ application
This unit permits you to build various surround systems, in accordance with the number of speakers you have.
! Be sure to connect speakers to the front left and right channels (L and R).
! If you have two subwoofers, the second subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2 terminal.
Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction. In this
case, the same sound is output from the two subwoofers.
Important
! The Speaker System setting must be made if you use any of the connections shown below other than [A] (see
Speaker system setting on page 106 ).
! Speaker play can be switched on or off by pressing the SP-A/B button (audio may not be output from all con-
nected speakers).
[A] 5.2 channel surround system connection
*Default setting
! Speaker System setting: 5.2ch
SRSL
R
SW2
C
SW1
L
The 5.2 channel surround system is the most commonly-used in home theaters.
 
38
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-830)
04
[B] Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)
! Speaker System setting: Front Bi-Amp
R
SW2
C
SW1
L
Front Bi-Amp
Play the front speaker in high sound quality (bi-amp).
Other speaker connections
! Your favorite speaker connections can be selected even if you have fewer than 5.2 speakers (except front left/
right speakers).
! When not connecting a subwoofer, connect speakers with low frequency reproduction capabilities to the front
channel. (The subwoofer’s low frequency component is played from the front speakers, so the speakers could
be damaged.)
! After connecting, be sure to conduct the Full Auto MCACC (speaker environment setting) procedure. See
Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 57 .
Placing the speakers
Refer to the chart below for placement of the speakers you intend to connect.
Listener speaker placement guidelines
Listener speakers, such as Left, Right, Center, Left Surround, and Right Surround, are placed at ear level relative
to the listener position.
L
SW
2SW
1
C
SL SR
R
30 30
60
60
120120
Some tips for improving sound quality
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines
should help you to get the best sound from your system.
! The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about ear-level when you’re
listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a
wall is not recommended.
! For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from the TV.
! If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the speakers at a suffi-
cient distance from your CRT TV.
! If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a narrower
angle.
! Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is localized at the TV
screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of the front left
and right speakers.
! It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the size of the room. Use
less of an angle for bigger rooms.
! Surround speakers should be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm higher than your ears and tilted slightly downward.
Make sure the speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly behind
the listener than for home theater playback.
! Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the front and center speak-
ers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
 
39
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-830)
04
Connecting the speakers
Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to match
these up with the terminals on the speakers themselves.
This unit supports speakers with a nominal impedance of 6 W to 16 W.
CAUTION
! These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when con-
necting or disconnecting the speaker cables, disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated
parts.
! Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal. If any
of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.
Bare wire connections
CAUTION
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality, but also reduces the risk
of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of external shocks such as
earthquakes.
1 Twist exposed wire strands together.
2 Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire.
3 Tighten terminal.
123
10 mm
Notes
! Please refer to the manual that came with your speakers for details on how to connect the other end of the
speaker cables to your speakers.
! Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer. It is not possible to connect using speaker cables.
! If you have two subwoofers, the second subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2 terminal.
Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction. In this
case, the same sound is output from the two subwoofers.
Installing your speaker system
At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround speakers should
always be connected as a pair.
Standard surround connection
Speaker System setting: 5.2ch
SURROUND / BI-AMPCENTER
SPEAKER A
FRONT
RL
RL
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
1
2
AUDIO OUT
SURROUND / BI-AMPCENTER
SPEAKER A
FRONT
RL
RL
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
1
2
AUDIO OUT
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
Front right Center Subwoofer 2Subwoofer
1F
ront left
Surround leftSurround right
 
40
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-830)
04
Bi-amping your speakers
Speaker System setting: Front Bi-Amp
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver and low frequency driver of your speakers to different
amplifiers for better crossover performance. Your speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate termi-
nals for high and low) and the sound improvement will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.
SURROUND / BI-AMPCENTER
SPEAKER A
FRONT
RL
RL
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
1
2
AUDIO OUT
SURROUND / BI-AMPCENTER
SPEAKER A
FRONT
RL
RL
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
1
2
AUDIO OUT
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
High
Low
High
Low
Center Subwoofer 2Subwoofer 1
Front right Front left
Bi-amp compatible
speaker
Bi-amp compatible
speaker
CAUTION
! Most speakers with both High and Low terminals have two metal plates that connect the High to the Low
terminals. These must be removed when you are bi-amping the speakers or you could severely damage the
amplifier. See your speaker manual for more information.
! If your speakers have a removable crossover network, make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing so
may damage your speakers.
Bi-wiring your speakers
Your speakers can also be bi-wired if they support bi-amping.
! With these connections, the Speaker System setting makes no difference.
CAUTION
! Don’t connect different speakers from the same terminal in this way.
! When bi-wiring as well, heed the cautions for bi-amping shown above.
% To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to the speaker terminal on the receiver.
About the audio connection
Transferable audio signals
Sound signal priority
HDMI HD audio
Digital (Coaxial)Conventional digital audio
RCA (Analog)
(White/Red)
Conventional analog audio
Digital (Optical)
Types of cables and terminals
! With an HDMI cable, video and audio signals can be transferred in high quality over a single cable.
! For HD audio, see About HDMI on page 41 .
 
41
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-830)
04
About HDMI
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio.
This receiver incorporates High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI
®
/
TM
) technology.
This receiver supports the functions described below through HDMI connections.
! Digital transfer of uncompressed video (contents protected by HDCP (1080p/24, 1080p/60, etc.))
! HDCP 2.2 compatible terminal: BD, DVD (HDMI IN 1), SAT/CBL (HDMI IN 2), HDMI OUT
! 3D signal transfer
! Deep Color signal transfer
! x.v.Color signal transfer
! ARC (Audio Return Channel)
! 4K signal transfer
This may not operate properly, depending on the connected equipment.
4K 24p, 4K 25p, 4K 30p, 4K 50p and 4K 60p signals are supported.
! Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital audio signals (192 kHz or less) for up to 8 channels
! Input of the following digital audio formats:
Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High bitrate audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio), CD, SACD (DSD signal)
! Synchronized operation with components using the Control with HDMI function (see Control with HDMI func-
tion on page 81 )
Notes
! An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High
Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a
separate adaptor (DVIdHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support audio signals. Consult
your local audio dealer for more information.
! If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on
the front panel display. Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be dis-
played, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction.
! Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal
transfers.
! This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage
of these formats, however, make sure that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corre-
sponding format.
! Use a High Speed HDMI
®
/
TM
Cable. If an HDMI cable other than a High Speed HDMI
®
/
TM
Cable is used, it may
not work properly.
! When an HDMI cable with a built-in equalizer is connected, it may not operate properly.
! Signal transfer is only possible when connected to a compatible component.
! HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to be recognized. Due to this, interruption in the
audio may occur when switching between audio formats or beginning playback.
! Turning on/off the device connected to this unit’s HDMI OUT terminal during playback, or disconnecting/con-
necting the HDMI cable during playback, may cause noise or interrupted audio.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and other countries.
“x.v.Color” and are trademarks of Sony Corporation.
Connecting your TV and playback components
Connecting using HDMI
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component (Blu-ray Disc player (BD), etc.), you can connect it
to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable.
If the TV and playback components support the Control with HDMI feature, the convenient Control with HDMI
functions can be used (see Control with HDMI function on page 81 ).
/MHLBD
5
15-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
ARC CONTROL
(
DVD
)(
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
OUT
ASSIGNABLE
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
1
1
DIGITAL IN
/MHLBD
5
15-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
ARC CONTROL
(
DVD
)(
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
OUT
ASSIGNABLE
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
1
1
DIGITAL IN
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIAL OPTICAL
HDMI INHDMI OUTHDMI OUT
HDMI/DVI-compatible
Blu-ray Disc player
Other HDMI/DVI-
equipped component
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor
Select one
This connection is required in
order to listen to the sound of
the TV over the receiver.
 
42
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-830)
04
! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio cables.
When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC (Audio
Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV can be input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT terminal, so
there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set ARC at HDMI Setup to ON (see HDMI Setup on
page 82 ).
After setting the ARC, some time may be required for the connected device to be recognized and the sound to
be produced.
If you use a coaxial digital audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digital or analog audio input you
connected the TV to (see The Input Setup menu on page 59 ).
Please refer to the TV’s operation manual for directions on connections and setup for the TV.
! If the TV to be connected using HDMI supports 4K/60p, you can switch the 4K/60p signal output setting in
accordance with TV performance. When the 4K/60p setting is changed to 4:4:4, the video image may not be
output normally unless the HDMI cable supports 4K/60p 4:4:4 24 bit (18 Gbps transmission). In such a case,
select 4:2:0 (page 88 ).
! You cannot input 4K/60p 4:4:4 24 bit video from HDMI IN 3 to the IN 5 terminal. Use the BD IN, HDMI IN 1 or
HDMI IN 2 terminal.
About video outputs connection
This receiver is not loaded with a video converter. When you use HDMI cables for connecting to the input device,
the same cables should be used for connecting to the TV.
The signals input from the analog (composite) video inputs of this unit will not be output from the HDMI OUT
terminal.
VIDEO
VIDEO
IN
IN
HDMI
MONITOR
OUT
HDMI
OUT
Playback component
Terminal for connection
with source device
Terminal for connection
with TV monitor
The OSD will not
appear.
TV
Video signals can be output.
 
43
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-830)
04
Connecting your TV with no HDMI input
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component) to
the receiver.
Important
! With these connections, the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected with an HDMI
cable. Connect the receiver and TV using the same type of video cable as used to connect the receiver and
player.
! Also, when the receiver and TV are connected by anything other than an HDMI cable, the OSD function allow-
ing display of the receiver’s settings, operations, etc., on the TV’s screen cannot be used. In this case, watch
the receiver’s front panel display while performing the various operations and making settings.
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
1
1
DIGITAL IN
/MHLBD
5
15-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
DVD
LR
SAT/CBL
ARC CONTROL
(
DVD
)(
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
OUT
AUDIO INVIDEO IN
MONITOR OUT
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
1
1
DIGITAL IN
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
DVD
LR
ARC CONTROL
OUT
AUDIO INVIDEO IN
MONITOR OUT
SAT/CBL
/MHLBD
5
15-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
(
DVD
) (
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
ASSIGNABLE
VIDEO
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO IN
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIALOPTICAL
ANALOG
RL
AUDIO OUT
HDMI OUT
TV
DVD player, etc.
Select one
! In order to listening to HD audio with this receiver, connect an HDMI cable, and use analog video cable for
video signal input.
Depending on the player, it may not be possible to output video signals to both HDMI and other video output
(composite, etc.) simultaneously, and it may be necessary to make video output settings. Please refer to the
operating instructions supplied with your player for more information.
! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio cables
(page 41 ).
! When connecting to a DVD player with an optical digital audio cable or a coaxial digital audio cable, perform-
ing input terminal settings are necessary (page 59 ).
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top box to (see The
Input Setup menu on page 59 ).
ASSIGNABLE
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
1
1
DIGITAL IN
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
DVD
LR
ARC CONTROL
OUT
AUDIO INVIDEO IN
MONITOR OUT
SAT/CBL
/MHLBD
5
15-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
(
DVD
) (
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
1
1
DIGITAL IN
/MHLBD
5
15-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
SAT/CBL
ARC CONTROL
(
DVD
)(
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
OUT
AUDIO INVIDEO IN
ASSIGNABLE
VIDEO
VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIALOPTICAL
ANALOG
RL
AUDIO OUT
STB
Select one
 
44
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-830)
04
! When connecting to a satellite/cable TV tuner with an optical digital audio cable or a coaxial digital audio
cable, performing input terminal settings are are necessary (page 59 ).
! If your set-top box is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we recommend connecting it to the receiver’s
HDMI SAT/CBL IN terminal. When doing so, also connect the receiver and TV by HDMI (see Connecting using
HDMI on page 41 ).
/MHLBD
5
15-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
ARC CONTROL
(
DVD
) (
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
OUT
ASSIGNABLE
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor
STB
! Even if your set-top box is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, in some cases the sound is output from
the digital audio output (optical or coaxial) and only the video is output from the HDMI output terminal. In this
case, make the HDMI and digital audio connections as shown below.
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
1
1
DIGITAL IN
/MHLBD
5
15-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
ARC CONTROL
(
DVD
) (
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
OUT
ASSIGNABLE
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIALOPTICAL
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor
STB
When connecting to a satellite/cable TV tuner with an optical digital audio cable or a coaxial digital audio
cable, performing input terminal settings are are necessary (page 59 ).
Connecting other audio components
This receiver has both digital and analog inputs, allowing you to connect audio components for playback.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see
also The Input Setup menu on page 59 ).
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
1
1
DIGITAL IN
/MHLBD
5
15-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
ARC CONTROL
(
DVD
)(
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
OUT
ASSIGNABLE
/MHLBD
5
15-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
ARC CONTROL
(
DVD
)(
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
OUT
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
1
1
DIGITAL IN
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIALOPTICAL
Select one
CD player, etc.
! If you use an optical digital audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you connected the
player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 59 ).
 
45
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-830)
04
Connecting the subwoofer
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
1
2
AUDIO OUT
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
1
2
AUDIO OUT
ANALOG
INPUT
Powered
subwoofer 1
ANALOG
INPUT
Powered
subwoofer 2
! If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front speaker setting (see Speaker Setting on page 103 ) to
LARGE.
! If you have two subwoofers, the second subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2 terminal.
Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction. In this
case, the same sound is output from the two subwoofers.
Connecting AM/FM antennas
Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire antenna as shown below. To improve reception and sound quality,
connect external antennas (see Connecting external antennas on page 45 ).
FM UNBAL
75
AM LOOP
ANTENNA
1
3
ab c
4
5
2
1 Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna wires.
2 Push open the tabs, then insert one wire fully into each terminal, then release the tabs to
secure the AM antenna wires.
3 Fix the AM loop antenna to the attached stand.
To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the direction indicated by the arrow (fig. a) then clip the loop onto the
stand (fig. b).
! If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a wall or other surface, secure the stand with screws (fig. c) before
clipping the loop to the stand. Make sure the reception is clear.
4 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and in a direction giving the best reception.
5 Connect the FM wire antenna into the FM antenna socket.
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.
Connecting external antennas
To improve FM reception, connect an external FM antenna to FM UNBAL 75 W.
FM UNBAL
75
AM LOOP
ANTENNA
75 Ω coaxial cable
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m length of vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP terminals without
disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna.
For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally outdoors.
FM UNBAL
75
AM LOOP
ANTENNA
Outdoor antenna
Indoor antenna
(vinyl-coated wire)
5 m to 6 m
 
46
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-830)
04
Connecting to the network through LAN interface
By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN terminal, you can listen to Internet radio stations. To listen
to Internet radio stations, you must sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service Provider) beforehand.
When connected in this way, you can play audio files stored on the components on the local network, including
your computer.
NETWORK
WAN
321
LAN
NETWORK
Internet
Modem
Router
LAN cable (sold separately)
to LAN port
to LAN port
Computer
NAS
Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to the LAN terminal on your router (with or without the built-in DHCP
server function) with a straight LAN cable (CAT 5 or higher).
Turn on the DHCP server function of your router. In case your router does not have the built-in DHCP server func-
tion, it is necessary to set up the network manually. For details, see Setting network connection on page 51 .
LAN terminal specifications
! LAN terminal : Ethernet jack (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
Notes
! When connecting the wireless LAN, please use with the wireless LAN antenna upright.
! The range of movement of the wireless LAN antenna is as indicated in the diagram below. There is danger that
you may break it if unnecessary force is applied.
1
Wireless LAN antenna
! Refer to the operation manual of the equipment you have as the connected equipment and connection method
may differ depending on your Internet environment.
! When using a broadband Internet connection, a contract with an Internet service provider is required. For
more details, contact your nearest Internet service provider.
Connecting an iPod
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod
using the controls of this receiver.
5V 1 A
iPod/iPhone
USB cable included with the iPod
Tip
! An iPod/iPhone can be connected to the receiver. For details on supported models and versions of the respec-
tive products, see Playing an iPod on page 63 .
% Switch the receiver into standby, and then use the iPod cable to connect your iPod to the
iPod/iPhone terminal on the front panel of this receiver.
! For the cable connection, also refer to the operating instructions for your iPod.
! When connecting an iPhone to this unit, keep the iPhone at least 20 cm away from this unit. If the iPhone is
kept closer to this unit and a telephone call is received by the iPhone, noise may be output from this device.
! iPod recharging occurs whenever an iPod is connected to this unit. (Recharging is enabled only when the
unit’s power is turned on.)
! For instructions on playing the iPod, see Playing an iPod on page 63 .
Connecting a USB device
It is possible to play audio and photo files by connecting USB devices to this receiver.
5V 1 A
USB mass
storage device
% Switch the receiver into standby then connect your USB device to the USB terminal on the
front panel of this receiver.
! This receiver does not support a USB hub.
! For instructions on playing the USB device, see Playing a USB device on page 64 .
 
47
Connecting your equipment (In case of VSX-830)
04
Connecting an MHL-compatible device
An MHL-compatible mobile device can be connected to enjoy 3D/Full-HD videos, high quality multi-channel
audio, and photos etc., with charge the battery on the receiver. Use the MHL cable to connect the device.
/MHLBD
5
15-
4321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
ARC CONTROL
(
DVD
)(
SAT/CBL
)
HDMI IN
OUT
/MHLBD
54321
(
OUTPUT 5
V
0.9 A MAX
)
ARC CONTROL
(
DVD
)(
SAT/CBL
)
ASSIGNABLE
MHL enabled
device
MHL cable
% Switch the receiver into standby then use the MHL cable to connect your MHL enabled
device to the MHL terminal on the rear panel of this receiver.
! To automatically switch to the MHL input when an MHL-compatible device is connected, see MHL Setup on
page 109 .
! The MHL-compatible device is recharged whenever it is connected to this unit. (Recharging is enabled only
when the unit’s power is turned on.)
! For instructions on playing the MHL-compatible device, see Playing an MHL-compatible device on page 65 .
! Do not place the MHL device on this unit which has the power turned on.
Plugging in the receiver
Only plug in after you have connected all your components to this receiver, including the speakers.
CAUTION
! Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the
power cord when your hands are wet, as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the
unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never make a
knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The power cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be
stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the power cord once
in a while. If you find it damaged, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company for a
replacement.
! Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this unit.
! Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than that described below.
! The receiver should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular use,
e.g., when on vacation.
1 Plug the supplied power cord into the AC IN socket on the back of the receiver.
2 Plug the other end into a power outlet.
 
48
 
Initial settings of this receiver ......................................................................................................49
Setting with a special application (Start-up Navi) ......................................................................49
Perform settings using the AVNavigator built into this receiver ..............................................49
Setting by referring to the operating instructions .....................................................................51
Basic Setup
49
Basic Setup
05
Initial settings of this receiver
There are three ways to initialize this receiver.
! Setting with a special application (Start-up Navi) on page 49
! Perform settings using the AVNavigator built into this receiver on page 49
! Setting by referring to the operating instructions on page 51
Important
! After unpacking, turning on the power, and returning to initial factory settings (page 91 ), the WIRELESS
indicator slowly flashes. This is not a malfunction.
! This receiver is designed to automatically enter WAC mode when turning on the power of this receiver in the
initial factory settings state. For details about WAC mode, please refer to page 53 . After the network settings
(page 51 ) have been completed, the WIRELESS indicator flashing disappears.
! When the network is not connected, even though the WIRELESS indicator is blinking, there is no problem
using it in this state.
Setting with a special application (Start-up Navi)
If you have a smart phone or tablet, once you download and start the special application, the settings can be done
according to the instructions by the application.
! If you have an iPhone or iPod touch
! If you have an Android device
Perform settings using the AVNavigator built into this receiver
If you have a Windows PC or Mac, the settings can be performed using the AVNavigator built into this receiver.
How to use the built-in AVNavigator
The built-in AVNavigator is equipped with Wiring Navi, which allows you to perform connection of this receiver
and initial settings in interactive mode. By simply following the screen prompts to connect and set the unit, highly
accurate initial settings can be performed easily.
Additionally, in order to use various functions easily, contents linked to the receiver can be used.
Operating Environment
! AVNavigator can be used in the following environments.
Windows PC: Microsoft
®
Windows Vista
®
/Windows
®
7/Windows
®
8/Windows
®
8.1
Mac: OS X v 10.9 or 10.8
iPad/iPhone/iPod touch: iOS 6.1 or later
Android operation confirmation device:
SONY XPERIA Z1 (OS 4.2.2)
SAMSUNG GALAXY S5 (OS 4.4.2)
HTC One S (OS 4.1.1)
Google Nexus 5 (OS 4.4.4)
! AVNavigator uses an Internet browser. The following browsers are supported:
Windows PC: Internet Explorer
®
8, 9, 10, 11
Mac/iPad/iPhone/iPod touch: Safari 6.0, 7.0
Android device: Android browser
! Depending on the computer network setting or security setting, AVNavigator may not operate.
Using AVNavigator
Important
! Connect the LAN terminal to the network (pages 33 , 46 ).
1 Press u STANDBY/ON to switch on the receiver and your computer.
2 Launch AVNavigator.
Operate AVNavigator by following the screen prompts of your computer, etc.
! If using a Windows PC, complete the below steps to start up.
1 Start up Internet Explorer on your PC (open any random Internet page).
2 Press STATUS on the remote control and check the front panel display on the receiver (the IP address of
the receiver will appear).
(Example Text Display)
If 0.0.0.0 or 169.254.112.202 appears in the address, it indicates that the receiver is not connected to the
network. Check to make sure that the receiver and router are properly connected.
3 Enter number in 2 above in the field in Internet Explorer shown below and then press the ENTER key.
(Example Input Format) 192.168.0.124
 
50
Basic Setup
05
! With a Windows PC, you can use the following method to launch AVNavigator.
Launch Explorer and right-click <VSX-1130>, <VSX-930> or <VSX-830> displayed in the ‘Network’ folder,
then click ‘View device webpage’.
! On a Mac, launch Safari and click <VSX-1130>, <VSX-930> or <VSX-830> displayed in ‘Bonjour’ on the
Bookmarks bar.
If ‘Bonjour’ is not displayed, tick the ‘Include Bonjour in the Favorites bar’ check box on the
Advanced’ tab in the Safari ‘Preferences...’ menu.
! When using an iPad/iPhone/iPod touch, from the App Store, download iControlAV5, which is a free applica-
tion. After launching iControlAV5, follow the instructions on the screen. After that, on the Home screen, tap
AVNavigator’ or the icon.
iPad iPhone/iPod touch
! When using an Android device, from Google Play Store, download iControlAV5, which is a free application. After
launching iControlAV5, follow the instructions on the screen. After that, on the Home screen, tap the icon.
3 Select and use the desired function.
AVNavigator includes the following functions:
! Wiring Navi – Guides you through connections and initial settings in dialog fashion. High precision initial
settings can be made easily.
! Interactive Operation Guide (excluding VSX-830): A one-stop guide for learning functions by actually experi-
encing the operation. This receiver will be operated using the remote control on the screen and you can view
function explanations or videos. Explanations of the functions that are operated using the remote control are
also automatically displayed.
! Network Setup – Used to make network-related settings.
 
51
Basic Setup
05
Setting by referring to the operating instructions
Use HOME MENU when referring to the operating instructions for various settings.
About the Home Menu
This receiver’s Home Menu (HOME MENU) can be used to make various settings and to check and adjust items
that have been set.
! With factory default settings, the Home Menu screen will be output from all HDMI output terminals and dis-
played on any TV connected via HDMI cable.
Excluding VSX-830: You can change where the screen is output in the MAIN/HDZONE (page 111 ) and HDMI
output (page 88 ) settings.
! HOME MENU may not start immediately after turning the main power of this receiver on or when settings have
been changed. In such case, operate after a while.
1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode.
2 To display the Home Menu screen, press HOME MENU on the remote control.
Exit
System
Setup
MCACC
PRO
HOME MENU
Network,
Bluetooth
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.
The top level in the Home Menu is as shown below. Refer to the respective explanations to set, check and adjust
as necessary.
! Network, Bluetooth – Conducts the setup necessary to connect this unit to the network (see Setting net-
work connection on page 51 ).
! MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/Advanced MCACC (VSX-830) – Use this to make automatic settings and
detailed manual settings for the surround sound. For details, see Making receiver settings from the MCACC
PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/Advanced MCACC (VSX-830) menu on page 99 .
! System Setup – Use this to make various settings related to this system. For details, see Making receiver set-
tings from the System Setup menu on page 106 .
Setting network connection
This part explains the connection settings for all networks.
WAN
321
LAN
Connecting
this receiver
and router
with a
wireless LAN
WAN
321
LAN
WPS-PBC
Connecting a router
without a WPS-PBC
function with this receiver
WAN
321
LAN
WPS-PBC
Connecting a router with a WPS-PBC function with this receiver
WAN
321
LAN
Connecting this receiver and
router with a wired LAN
If you do not have a router
Directly connecting your smart phone to this receiver
(Wireless Direct)
D
G
C
B
A
H
E
F
Connecting the router with this receiver with your iPhone, iPod touch,
or iPad (iOS version 7.1 or later)
The wireless LAN settings for iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad can be applied to this receiver.
Connecting the router with this receiver with your iPhone, iPod touch,
or iPad (iOS version 5.0 or later)
The wireless LAN settings for iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad can be applied to this receiver.
Directly connect this receiver
with your computer or smart
phone. Configure the settings of
this receiver via a Web browser
from a computer or smart phone.
There is no wireless
LAN function on
your computer or
smart phone
(wired LAN only)
Automatically
setting the
connection
Manually setting
the connection
Your computer or smart phone has
a wireless LAN function
WPS
PS
! When connection method B, C, D, E, F, or G is selected, check that the LAN cable is not connected to this receiver.
! Warning when connecting a wireless LAN router with this receiver
SSID is compatible only with single-byte alphanumerical characters and some symbols such as the underbar.
If characters other than these are used, change the SSID before executing network settings. Refer to the user’s
manual for your router for information on SSID.
! Some network functions may not be used with Wireless Direct. iControl AV5, AirPlay, and HTC connect can be used.
When setting this receiver by A–H, first show the settings screen using the following procedures.
1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and
then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.
2 Select ‘Network, Bluetooth’ from the HOME MENU.
3 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:
! Network Information – The setting status of the following network-related items can be checked (page 56 ).
! Network Type – Select the network connection method.
! Network Connection – Connect to the network.
! Network Option – Set the network other than for connection (page 56 ).
! Bluetooth Setup – Set Bluetooth (page 56 ).
 
52
Basic Setup
05
A: Connecting with a LAN cable (wired LAN)
Simply connect the LAN cable. Network settings are unnecessary.
! When wireless LAN is set once, the following procedures 1 through 3 must be executed.
! Only when connected to a network without a DHCP server function, the following network settings are neces-
sary. Check the setting value with the provider or network administrator in advance when executing the set-
tings. Also refer to the user’s manual for network equipment.
! IP Address
The IP address to be entered must be defined within the following ranges. If the IP address defined is beyond
the following ranges, you cannot play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to
Internet radio stations.
Class A: 10.0.0.1 to 10.255.255.254
Class B: 172.16.0.1 to 172.31.255.254
Class C: 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.255.254
! Subnet Mask
In case an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is directly connected to this receiver, enter the subnet mask
provided by your ISP on paper. In most cases, enter 255.255.255.0.
! Default Gateway
In case a gateway (router) is connected to this receiver, enter the corresponding IP address.
! Primary DNS Server/Secondary DNS Server
In case there is only one DNS server address provided by your ISP on paper, enter it in the
Primary DNS Server’ field. In case there are more than two DNS server addresses, enter
Secondary DNS Server’ in the other DNS server address field.
! Proxy Hostname/Proxy Port
This setting is required when you connect this receiver to the Internet via a proxy server. Enter the IP address
of your proxy server in the ‘Proxy Hostname’ field. Also, enter the port number of your proxy server in the
Proxy Port’ field.
1 Select ‘Network Type’ from the Network, Bluetooth menu.
2 Use k/l to select ‘Wired’.
3 Select ‘OK’, then press ENTER.
The confirmation screen will be displayed. Select ‘YES’ and press ENTER.
The on-screen display will close, and the home menu will be disabled for about 60 seconds. After 60 seconds,
execute the following operation.
4 Press HOME MENU.
5 Select ‘Network, Bluetooth’ from the HOME MENU.
6 Select ‘Network Connection’ from the Network, Bluetooth menu.
7 Select ‘Wired’ from the Network Connection menu.
8 Select the DHCP setting you want.
When you select ON, the network is automatically set up, and you do not need to follow Steps 9. Proceed with
Step 10.
If there is no DHCP server on the network and you select ON, this receiver will use its own Auto IP function to
determine the IP address.
! The IP address determined by the Auto IP function is 169.254.X.X. You cannot listen to an Internet radio sta-
tion if the IP address is set for the Auto IP function.
9 Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, Primary DNS Server and
Secondary DNS Server.
Press i/j to select a number and k/l to move the cursor.
10 Select ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’ for the Enable Proxy Server setting to deactivate or activate the proxy
server.
In case you select ‘OFF’, proceed with Step 13. In case you select ‘ON’, on the other hand, proceed with Step 11.
11 Enter the address of your proxy server or the domain name.
Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.
12 Enter the port number of your proxy server.
Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.
13 Select ‘OK’ to confirm the IP Address/Proxy setup.
B: Setting this receiver with iOS equipment (iOS version 5.0 or later)
The Wi-Fi settings of your iPod/iPhone/iPad (equipment with iOS version 5.0 or later) can be applied to this
receiver.
! The iOS equipment and router must be connected through Wi-Fi.
! Check that the LAN cable is not connected to this receiver.
1 Unlock the iPod/iPhone/iPad.
Check that the Wi-Fi operation mark is shown on the screen of the iOS equipment.
2 Select ‘Network Type’ from the Network, Bluetooth menu.
3 Use k/l to select ‘Wireless’.
4 Select ‘OK’, then press ENTER.
The confirmation screen will be displayed. Select ‘YES’ and press ENTER.
The on-screen display will close, and the home menu will be disabled for about 60 seconds. After 60 seconds,
execute the following operation.
5 Press HOME MENU.
6 Select ‘Network, Bluetooth’ from the HOME MENU.
7 Select ‘Network Connection’ from the Network, Bluetooth menu.
8 Select ‘Wireless’ from the Network Connection menu.
9 Select ‘Wi-Fi Sharing’
10 Connect the iOS equipment to the iPod/iPhone terminal on the front panel.
11 Select ‘START’, then press ENTER.
12 Tap [Allow] on iPod/iPhone/iPad.
The Wi-Fi settings of your iPod/iPhone/iPad is applied to this receiver.
 
53
Basic Setup
05
C: Perform this receiver’s settings using the iOS equipment (iOS version 7.1 or later)
The Wi-Fi settings of your iPod/iPhone/iPad (equipment with iOS version 7.1 or later) can be applied to this
receiver.
! The iOS equipment and router must be connected through Wi-Fi.
! Check that the LAN cable is not connected to this receiver.
1 Unlock the iPod/iPhone/iPad.
Check that the Wi-Fi operation mark is shown on the screen of the iOS equipment.
2 Select ‘Network Type’ from the Network, Bluetooth menu.
3 Use k/l to select ‘Wireless’.
4 Select ‘OK’, then press ENTER.
The confirmation screen will be displayed. Select ‘YES’ and press ENTER.
The on-screen display will close, and the home menu will be disabled for about 60 seconds. After 60 seconds,
execute the following operation.
5 Press HOME MENU.
6 Select ‘Network, Bluetooth’ from the HOME MENU.
7 Select ‘Network Connection’ from the Network, Bluetooth menu.
8 Select ‘Wireless’ from the Network Connection menu.
9 Select ‘Wireless Accessory Config.’.
WAC (Wireless Accessory Configuration) mode is a mode that allows you to set the network settings by operating
this receiver as a Wi-Fi access point.
10 Select ‘START’, then press ENTER.
The SSID and IP address will be displayed when WAC is active.
11 Select ‘OK’, then press ENTER.
12 Operate the screen of the iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad.
! Check that the Wi-Fi mark is displayed on the screen of the iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad.
If the mark is not displayed, activate Wi-Fi, and connect the iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad to a wireless LAN
router.
! Select the settings.
j
! Select [Wi-Fi].
XXXXXX
j
! In [Set new AIRPLAY speaker], select Friendly Name (iOS 7) or SSID (iOS 6 or older).
VSX-1130 *****
XXXXXX
j
! Select [Next].
*****
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
VSX-1130 *****
j
! Wait until the processing is complete.
XXXXXX
VSX-1130 ***** ...
j
 
54
Basic Setup
05
! Select [Complete].
XXXXXX
Note
This screen is iOS 7.1. When software other than iOS 7.1 is installed on an iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad, the opera-
tion for the iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad may change.
D: WPS connection settings
WPS is an abbreviation for “Wi-Fi Protected Setup”. This is a standard stipulated by the Wi-Fi Alliance, and con-
nection to WPS compatible equipment and security settings can be performed using simple operations.
This receiver is compatible with PBC (push button) method and PIN method.
! Check that your router is compatible with PBC. If the router is not PBC-compatible, connect using the PIN
method.
! Check that the LAN cable is not connected to this receiver.
1 Select ‘Network Type’ from the Network, Bluetooth menu.
2 Use k/l to select ‘Wireless’.
3 Select ‘OK’, then press ENTER.
The confirmation screen will be displayed. Select ‘YES’ and press ENTER.
The on-screen display will close, and the home menu will be disabled for about 60 seconds. After 60 seconds,
execute the following operation.
4 Press HOME MENU.
5 Select ‘Network, Bluetooth’ from the HOME MENU.
6 Select ‘Network Connection’ from the Network, Bluetooth menu.
7 Select ‘Wireless’ from the Network Connection menu.
8 Select ‘WPS’.
9 At i/j, select ‘PBC’ or ‘PIN Input’ and press ENTER.
When the router is compatible with the PBC function, select ‘PBC’.
! PBC (Push-button method) – Connection settings are automatically done by simply pressing the WPS but-
ton on wireless LAN equipment that is WPS-compatible. Follow the instructions shown on the screen of this
receiver. This setting method is available when there is a WPS button on the wireless LAN equipment which
is WPS-compatible, and is the easiest method for connection settings.
! PIN Input – Indicate the SSID list of connectable access points, and select the desired access point for con-
nection. Connection settings are performed by entering the access point to which the 8-digit PIN code shown
on the screen of this receiver is to be connected.
1 Select the connection point to which the wireless LAN is to be connected with i/j, and press ENTER.
The PIN code will be shown.
2 Check the PIN code of this receiver.
3 Enter the PIN code in the access point.
Enter in the access point whose indicated PIN code is shown within two minutes after closing the PIN
code confirmation screen. Success or failure of connection will be indicated on the screen.
The PIN code input method varies depending on wireless LAN equipment. For details, refer to the user’s
manual of the wireless LAN equipment.
E: Automatically setting wireless LAN connection
1 Select ‘Network Type’ from the Network, Bluetooth menu.
2 Use k/l to select ‘Wireless’.
3 Select ‘OK’, then press ENTER.
The confirmation screen will be displayed. Select ‘YES’ and press ENTER.
The on-screen display will close, and the home menu will be disabled for about 60 seconds. After 60 seconds,
execute the following operation.
4 Press HOME MENU.
5 Select ‘Network, Bluetooth’ from the HOME MENU.
6 Select ‘Network Connection’ from the Network, Bluetooth menu.
7 Select ‘Wireless’ from the Network Connection menu.
8 At i/j, select ‘Auto’ and press ENTER.
9 Select the connection point to which the wireless LAN is to be connected with i/j, and
press ENTER.
10 Enter the password or WEP KEY at i/j/k/l, and press ENTER.
! k/l – Moves the cursor.
! i/j – Selects the character to be entered.
! VIDEO P. – The cursor switches the input character part and software keyboard part every time the button is
pressed. A character is deleted by pressing the DEL on the software keyboard.
1d2.Friendly Name
Edit Name
New Name
Exit Return
Keyboad
ABCDEFGH IJKLMNOPQR
STUVWXYZ 0123456789
[\]
_` {|}~ !"#$%& '
()*+, -./:;<=>?
@
ADEL
a
OK
11 Select the DHCP setting you want.
Set the IP address of this receiver and the proxy. For details, see A: Connecting with a LAN cable (wired LAN) on
page 52 .
F: Manually setting wireless LAN connection
1 Select ‘Network Type’ from the Network, Bluetooth menu.
2 Use k/l to select ‘Wireless’.
3 Select ‘OK’, then press ENTER.
The confirmation screen will be displayed. Select ‘YES’ and press ENTER.
The on-screen display will close, and the home menu will be disabled for about 60 seconds. After 60 seconds,
execute the following operation.
4 Press HOME MENU.
 
55
Basic Setup
05
5 Select ‘Network, Bluetooth’ from the HOME MENU.
6 Select ‘Network Connection’ from the Network, Bluetooth menu.
7 Select ‘Wireless’ from the Network Connection menu.
8 Select [Manual] with the i/j button, and press the ENTER button.
9 Enter the SSID with the i/j/k/l button, and press the ENTER button.
! k/l – Moves the cursor.
! i/j – Selects the character to be entered.
! VIDEO P. – The cursor switches the input character part and software keyboard part every time the button is
pressed. A character is deleted by pressing the DEL on the software keyboard.
10 Select the encryption method with k/l.
! None – Does not set the encryption method.
! WEP – Set to the WEP method.
! WPA2/WPA, AES+TKIP – Set to the WPA-AES, WPA-TKIP, WPA2-AES, and WPA2-TKIP method.
11 Select ‘OK’, then press ENTER.
When WEP or WPA2/WPA, AES+TKIP is selected, the password entry screen is displayed. Enter the password,
select OK, and press ENTER.
12 Select the DHCP setting you want.
Set the IP address of this receiver and the proxy. For details, see A: Connecting with a LAN cable (wired LAN) on
page 52 .
G: Setting with Web Control
To set with this method, your computer must be compatible with wireless LAN functions.
Network settings are performed on the browser on your computer.
! Check that the LAN cable is not connected to this receiver.
1 Select ‘Network Type’ from the Network, Bluetooth menu.
2 Use k/l to select ‘Wireless’.
3 Select ‘OK’, then press ENTER.
The confirmation screen will be displayed. Select ‘YES’ and press ENTER.
The on-screen display will close, and the home menu will be disabled for about 60 seconds. After 60 seconds,
execute the following operation.
4 Press HOME MENU.
5 Select ‘Network, Bluetooth’ from the HOME MENU.
6 Select ‘Network Connection’ from the Network, Bluetooth menu.
7 Select ‘Wireless’ from the Network Connection menu.
8 Select ‘Wireless Accessory Config.’.
9 Select ‘START’, then press ENTER.
The SSID and IP address will be displayed when WAC is active.
10 Select ‘OK’, then press ENTER.
11 Select [Pioneer Setup] (this receiver) from the list of wireless LAN connections on your
computer.
[Pioneer Setup:xxxxxxxx] will be shown in the SSID field. “xxxxxxxx” represents a number unique to each
product.
! For your computer, iPhone, tablet computer, or wireless equipment, refer to the respective user’s manual.
! Because this connection is not encrypted, there is a slight security risk.
! Operation verification has been done for this setting with OS X v 10.7, Safari 5.1.
12 Start the Web browser.
Access the following URL, and start setting this receiver. The Web Control menu will be shown.
http://192.168.1.1
! If you are using Safari, see Making network settings using Safari on page 111 .
13 Click IP, Proxy Setting.
14 Setup the network settings manually and then press Apply.
SSID items are generally shown automatically, but if they are not shown follow the procedures again and redo the
settings. This receiver will restart and the settings will be applied to this receiver.
Notes
! In case Web Control is not used, the screen above can be shown by entering the IP address of this receiver to
the address field on the Web browser.
! The IP address of this receiver can be checked by pressing the STATUS button on the remote controller (page
90 ) or Network Information (page 56 ).
H: Directly connecting this receiver with a smart phone by wireless (Wireless Direct)
1 Select ‘Network Connection’ from the Network, Bluetooth menu.
2 Select ‘Wireless Direct’ from the Network Connection menu.
3 Select ‘Security Protocol’ at i/j.
4 Select the encryption method with k/l.
! None – Does not set the encryption method.
Because this connection is not encrypted, there is a slight security risk.
When the main power of this receiver is turned off, Wireless Direct is not started when it is turned on next
time, and will operate with the network settings before Wireless Direct is started.
! WEP – Set to the WEP method.
Even when the main power of this receiver is turned off, Wireless Direct will continuously operate the next
time it is turned on.
5 Select ‘Frequency Band’ at i/j.
 
56
Basic Setup
05
6 Select the frequency with k/l.
Select the frequency band of Wireless Direct connection. If you do not know the frequency band of your equip-
ment, select 2.4GHz.
! 2.4GHz – Uses the band of 2.4 GHz.
! 5GHz – Uses the band of 5 GHz.
7 Select ‘OK’, then press ENTER.
When WEP is selected, the WEP KEY input screen is displayed. Enter the WEP KEY in 5 or 13 characters, select
OK, and press ENTER.
8 Select ‘YES’ and press ENTER.
9 Select the SSID shown on the screen of this receiver from the list of wireless connection
LAN’s corresponding to the equipment that you have.
! If the password is requested, enter the WEP KEY in procedure 7.
Checking the Network Information
The setting status of the following network-related items can be checked.
! IP Address (IPv4) – Check the IP address of this receiver.
! IP Address (IPv6) – Check the IP address of this receiver.
! MAC Address – Check the MAC address of this receiver.
! Friendly NameFriendly Name on page 56 .
! SSID – Check the SSID during wireless connection.
! Network Connection – Check the network connection status (Wired/Wireless/Wireless Direct).
% Select ‘Network Information’ from the Network, Bluetooth menu.
Display the setting status of the network-related items.
Performing Bluetooth settings
Switches the Bluetooth function on/off.
1 Select ‘Bluetooth Setup’ from the Network, Bluetooth menu.
2 Use k/l to select the setting.
! ON – Selected when using the Bluetooth function.
! OFF – Selected when the Bluetooth function is not used.
3 Select ‘OK’, then press ENTER.
The confirmation screen will be displayed. Select ‘YES’ and press ENTER.
The on-screen display will close, and the home menu will be disabled for about 60 seconds. After 60 seconds,
execute the following operation.
Other network settings
Set the network other than for connection.
1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and
then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.
2 Select ‘Network, Bluetooth’ from the HOME MENU.
3 Select ‘Network Option’ from the Network, Bluetooth menu.
4 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:
! Network Standby – Even when the unit is in standby mode, it is possible to turn on the power of the unit
from iControlAV5 (page 56 ).
! Friendly Name – The name of the receiver displayed on a computer or other device connected to the network
can be changed (page 56 ).
! AirPlay Password – Set the password to be entered when playing AirPlay with this receiver (page 56 ).
! Parental Lock – Restricts usage of network functions (page 57 ).
! Play ZONE Setup (excluding VSX-830) – Setting of what zone to play the audio content from a device on the
home network (page 57 ).
Network Standby
Set so that the iControlAV5 function connected to the same LAN with the receiver can be used even while the unit
is in standby status.
1 Select ‘Network Standby’ from the Network Option menu.
2 Specify whether the Network Standby is ON or OFF.
! ON – Even when the unit is in standby mode, it is possible to turn on the power of the unit from the device
iControlAV5 that is connected to the network.
! OFF – The iControlAV5 function is not available while the receiver is in standby mode (power consumption
during standby can be suppressed).
Friendly Name
1 Select ‘Friendly Name’ from the Network Option menu.
2 Select ‘Edit Name’ then select ‘Rename’.
If after changing the name you want to restore the name to the default, select Default.
3 Input the name you want.
Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.
AirPlay password
1 Select ‘AirPlay Password’ from the Network Option menu.
2 Enter the password up to 32 characters, select ‘OK’, and press ENTER.
3 Select ‘YES’ and press ENTER.
 
57
Basic Setup
05
Parental Lock
Set restrictions for using Internet services. Also set the password accompanying the usage restrictions.
! Upon shipment from the factory, the password is set to “0000”.
Important
When the INTERNET RADIO, PANDORA, Spotify or FAVORITES input is selected, the setting made here cannot
be reflected.
1 Select ‘Parental Lock’ from the Network Option menu.
2 Input the password.
Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.
3 Specify whether to turn Parental Lock on or off.
! OFF – Internet services are not restricted.
! ON – Internet services are restricted.
4 If you want to change the password, select Change Password.
In this case, the procedure returns to step 2.
Play ZONE Setup
Excluding VSX-830
You can select what zone to play when playing via AirPlay and Bluetooth equipped devices as well as when play-
ing audio content on equipment in the home network in DMR mode.
! For playable DLNA-compatible network devices, see page 76 .
1 Select ‘Play ZONE Setup’ from the Network Option menu.
2 Select the zone in which you want to play the audio contents.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Network Option menu.
Notes
! If another zone is on, it may not be possible to play the audio contents. In this case, turn the other zone off,
then play the audio contents.
! MAIN/HDZONE at ZONE Setup must be set to HDZONE in order to use the HDZONE function (page 111 ).
Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC)
The Full Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area, taking into account
ambient noise, speaker connection and speaker size, and tests for both channel delay and channel level. When
Measurement Type is Expert, in addition to this, Standing Wave, Reverb characteristics, Full Band Phase
Control (excluding VSX-830) and EQ are measured. After you have set up the microphone provided with your
system, the receiver uses the information from a series of test tones to optimize the speaker settings and equal-
ization for your particular room.
Important
! Make sure the microphone and speakers are not moved during the Full Auto MCACC Setup.
! Using the Full Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.
! Before using the Full Auto MCACC Setup, the headphones should be disconnected.
! With factory default settings, the on-screen display will be output from all HDMI output terminals and dis-
played on any TV connected via HDMI cable.
Excluding VSX-830: You can change where the screen is output in the MAIN/HDZONE (page 111 ) and HDMI
output (page 88 ) settings.
CAUTION
! The test tones used in the Full Auto MCACC Setup are output at high volume.
1 Press u STANDBY/ON to switch on the receiver and your TV.
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.
2 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.
Microphone
Tripod
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If
you do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the microphone.
Install the microphone on a stable floor. Placing the microphone on any of the following surfaces may make
accurate measurement impossible:
! Sofas or other soft surfaces.
! High places such as tabletops and sofa tops.
The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the microphone is connected.
Speaker System : 7.2ch/5.2.2ch
Exit
2a.Full Auto MCACC
Return
START
EQ Type : SYMMETRY
SP to ceiling : – – –
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
Dolby Enabled Speaker
: NO
Measurement Type : Expert
! If you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes, the screen saver will appear.
3 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode.
4 Select the parameters you want to set.
When the speaker system is not 7.2ch/5.2.2ch (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/5.2ch (VSX-830), set Speaker System before
measuring full auto MCACC. For details, see Speaker system setting on page 106 .
! Speaker System – Shows the current settings. When this is selected and ENTER is pressed, the speaker
system selection screen appears. Select the proper speaker system, then press RETURN to return.
If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another
room, read through Speaker system setting on page 106 and make sure to connect your speakers as neces-
sary before continuing to step 4.
 
58
Basic Setup
05
! EQ Type – When you select Expert for Measurement Type, set the correction method of the frequency char-
acteristics of the viewing environment. Usually, set SYMMETRY. For details, see Automatic MCACC (Expert)
on page 99 .
! MCACC – The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening posi-
tions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can rename it later in Data Management on page 104 ).
! Dolby Enabled Speaker (excluding VSX-830): Select a speaker that uses (TMd). When a Dolby Enabled
Speaker is not used, select NO (page 24 ).
! SP to ceiling (excluding VSX-830) – When using the Dolby Enabled Speaker, you can input the vertical dis-
tance from the speaker to the ceiling (page 24 ).
! Measurement Type – When Basic is set, the minimum required measurement is performed in a short period
of time. When Expert is set, accurate and precise measurement is performed so it will take some time.
5 Select ‘START’, then press ENTER.
6 Follow the instructions on-screen.
Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to a
comfortable volume level.
7 Wait for the test tones to finish, then confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present
in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while it’s doing this.
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,
the Full Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press
ENTER in step 7.
! With error messages (such as Too much ambient noise! or Check microphone.), select RETRY after check-
ing for ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 58 ) and verifying the mic
connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and continue.
Now Analyzing... 2/9
Environment Check
Ambient Noise : OK
Microphone :
Speaker YES/NO :
L : YES
C : YES
R : YES
TMdR : YES
SR : YES
SBR : YES
SBL : YES
SL : YES
TMdL : YES
SW : YES
OK RETRY
Exit
2a.Full Auto MCACC
Return
Exit
2a.Full Auto MCACC
Return
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the actual speakers you have.
! If you see an ERR message (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a problem
with the speaker connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power and check the speaker con-
nections. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use i/j to select the speaker and k/l to
change the setting and continue.
! If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the
phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are
properly connected.
If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker
connections.
If the connections were wrong, turn off the power, disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly.
After this, perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure again.
If the connections were right, select GO NEXT and continue.
8 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum
receiver settings.
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes.
9 The Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Home Menu menu reappears
automatically.
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Full Auto MCACC Setup.
The settings made in the Full Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system,
but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using The MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/Advanced
MCACC (VSX-830) menu on page 98 or The System Setup and Other Setup menus on page 105 .
! Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12
cm (5 inches) will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual
speaker setup on page 106 .
! The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This set-
ting should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to
be changed.
! If Full Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and view-
ing environment, we recommend adjusting the settings manually.
! Excluding VSX-830: The Dolby Enabled Speaker distance indicates the distance of the ceiling reflection.
Therefore, it is longer than the direct distance but you do not need to change this (page 24 ).
! Excluding VSX-830: When Full Auto MCACC or Auto MCACC is selected, all of the EQ adjustment values for
Dolby Enabled Speaker are set to 0 dB. You can adjust the settings manually.
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup
If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the
walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for
household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch them
off if necessary. If there are any instructions showing in the front panel display, please follow them.
! Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the microphone. If this seems to be happening, switch off
the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.
 
59
Basic Setup
05
The Input Setup menu
You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according
to the default settings (see Input function default and possible settings on page 59 ). In this case, you need to
tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up to which terminal so the buttons on the remote control correspond
to the components you’ve connected.
! With factory default settings, the on-screen display will be output from all HDMI output terminals and dis-
played on any TV connected via HDMI cable.
Excluding VSX-830: You can change where the screen is output in the MAIN/HDZONE (page 111 ) and HDMI
output (page 88 ) settings.
1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and
then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.
2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU.
3 Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System Setup menu.
a.Input Setup
b.HDMI Setup
c.Manual SP Setup
d.MHL Setup
e.OSD Language
f.Other Setup
Input : BD
Input Name : Rename
Audio In :
– – –
HDMI Input : – – –
Input Skip : OFF
Component In :
– – –
Exit
3.System Setup
Return
Exit
3a.Input Setup
Return
4 Select the input function that you want to set up.
The default names correspond with the names next to the terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD or SAT/CBL
which, in turn, correspond with the names on the remote control.
5 Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your component.
For example, if your DVD player only has an optical output, you will need to change the DVD input function’s
Audio In setting from COAXIAL (default) to the optical input you’ve connected it to.
6 When you’re finished, proceed to the settings for other inputs.
There are optional settings in addition to the assignment of the input jacks:
! Input Name – You can choose to rename the input function for easier identification. Select Rename to do so,
or Default to return to the system default.
! Input Skip – When set to ON, that input is skipped when selecting the input using ALL. (DVD and other
inputs can be still be selected directly with the input function buttons.)
7 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the System Setup menu.
Input function default and possible settings
The terminals on the receiver generally correspond to the name of one of the input functions. If you have con-
nected components to this receiver differently from (or in addition to) the defaults below, see The Input Setup
menu on page 59 to tell the receiver how you’ve connected up. The dots (k) indicate possible assignments.
! In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930
Input function
Input Terminals
HDMI Audio Component
BD
(BD)
DVD IN 1
k k
SAT/CBL IN 2 COAXIAL IN
HDMI 1
k
HDMI 2
k
HDMI 3 IN 3
HDMI 4 IN 4
HDMI 5
(front panel)
IN 5
HDMI 6/MHL IN 6
INTERNET RADIO
PANDORA
Spotify
MEDIA SERVER
FAVORITES
iPod/USB
TV
OPTICAL
<a>
CD
ANALOG-1
<b>
TUNER
BT AUDIO
a When ARC at HDMI Setup is set to ON, it is not possible to make assignments to the TV input’s Audio In terminals.
b Only the TV and CD inputs can be assigned to ANALOG-1.
 
60
Basic Setup
05
! In case of VSX-830
Input function
Input Terminals
HDMI Audio
BD
(BD)
DVD IN 1
k
SAT/CBL IN 2
k
HDMI 1
k
HDMI 2
k
HDMI 3 IN 3
HDMI 4 IN 4
HDMI 5/MHL
IN 5
INTERNET RADIO
PANDORA
Spotify
MEDIA SERVER
FAVORITES
iPod/USB
TV
OPTICAL
<a>
CD COAXIAL
TUNER
BT AUDIO
a When ARC at HDMI Setup is set to ON, it is not possible to make assignments to the TV input’s Audio In terminals.
Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language)
The language used on the Graphical User Interface screen can be changed.
! The explanations in these operating instructions are for when English is selected for the GUI screen.
! With factory default settings, the on-screen display will be output from all HDMI output terminals and dis-
played on any TV connected via HDMI cable.
Excluding VSX-830: You can change where the screen is output in the MAIN/HDZONE (page 111 ) and HDMI
output (page 88 ) settings.
1 Press u STANDBY/ON to switch on the receiver and your TV.
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO
jacks on your TV, make sure that the VIDEO input is now selected).
2 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and
then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.
3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu.
4 Select ‘OSD Language’ from the System Setup menu.
5 Select the desired language.
6 Select ‘OK’ to change the language.
The setting is completed and the System Setup menu reappears automatically.
 
61
 
Playing a source ............................................................................................................................. 62
Playing an iPod ..............................................................................................................................63
Playing a USB device .....................................................................................................................64
Playing an MHL-compatible device ..............................................................................................65
Listening to the radio .................................................................................................................... 66
Music playback using Bluetooth wireless technology ...............................................................67
Basic playback
62
Basic playback
06
Playing a source
Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.
VSX-1130/VSX-930
STANDBY/ON
VOLUME
iPod
TUNER
USB ADPTROKU
BT
TV
MHL
CD
DVDBD SAT
SOURCE CONTROL
HDMI
NET
ALL
SURRAUTO ADV
LISTENING MODE
VSX-830
1 Switch on your system components and receiver.
Start by switching on the playback component (for example a DVD player), your TV and subwoofer (if you have
one), then the receiver (press u STANDBY/ON).
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.
2 Select the input function you want to play.
You can use the input function buttons on the remote control or the front panel INPUT SELECTOR dial.
! As necessary, select the type of audio input signal (page 73 ).
3 Press AUTO (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to select ‘AUTO SURROUND’ and start
playback of the source.
For such sound sources as Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD, the surround sound is played. With stereo sound, the
sound is played from the left and right front speakers with the default listening mode.
To play a stereo sound source in multichannel, press SURR or ADV to select your favorite listening mode.
(Example: Press SURR several times to select EXT.STEREO.)
! You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It
should be set to output Dolby Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an
MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.
! See also Listening to your system on page 70 for information on different ways of listening to sources.
It is possible to check on the front panel display whether or not multi-channel playback is being performed prop-
erly. For details, see Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats on page 127 .
When multi-channel speakers (more than the two front left and right channels) are connected, straight decoding
is performed, so the input signal’s format name (for example, TrueHD, DTS-HD MSTR or DTS-HD HI RES) is
displayed.
If the display does not correspond to the input signal and listening mode, check the connections and settings.
4 Use the VOLUME +/– to adjust the volume level.
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.
Note
Depending on the input to be played, the playback operation can in some cases be performed using the on-
screen display.
With factory default settings, the on-screen display will be output from all HDMI output terminals and displayed
on any TV connected via HDMI cable.
Excluding VSX-830: You can change where the screen is output in the MAIN/HDZONE (page 111 ) and HDMI
output (page 88 ) settings.
Turning off the sound
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).
% Press MUTE.
Playing a source with HDMI connection
% Use ALL to select the input function connected to the receiver’s HDMI input terminals.
You can also perform the same operation by using the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing
HDMI on the remote control repeatedly.
! Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 85 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI
audio output from your TV (no sound will be heard from this receiver).
! If the video signal does not appear on your TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or dis-
play. Note that some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In
this case, use an analog video connection.
 
63
Basic playback
06
Playing an iPod
This receiver has the iPod/iPhone terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod
using the controls of this receiver.
Here we describe the procedure for playback on an iPod. For playback on a USB device, see Playing a USB device
on page 64 .
Important
! USB works with iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS,
iPod touch (4th through 5th generation) and iPod nano (4th through 7th generation).
However, some of the functions may be restricted for some models.
! This receiver has been developed and tested for the software version of iPod/iPhone indicated on the website
of Pioneer.
http://pioneer.jp/homeav/support/ios/eu/ (for Europe)
http://pioneer.jp/homeav/support/ios/ao/ (for Australia and New Zealand)
! Installing software versions other than indicated on the website of Pioneer to your iPod/iPhone may result in
incompatibility with this receiver.
! iPod and iPhone are licensed for reproduction of non-copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally
permitted to reproduce.
! Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the
equalizer off before connecting.
! Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any
inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from the iPod failure.
! Excluding VSX-830: When listening to a track on the iPod in the main zone, it is possible to control the sub zone,
but not to listen to a different track in the sub zone from the one playing in the main zone.
1 Press u STANDBY/ON to switch on the receiver and your TV.
For iPod or iPhone connections, refer to page 34 (VSX-1130/VSX-930) or page 46 (VSX-830).
About one minute is required between turning the power on and completion of startup.
! It is also possible to operate the iPod on the iPod itself, without using the TV screen. For details, see
Switching the iPod controls on page 63 .
2 Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.
When the display shows the names of folders and files, you’re ready to play music from the iPod.
Playing back audio files stored on an iPod
To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take advantage of the GUI screen of your TV connected to this receiver.
You can also control all operations for music in the front panel display of this receiver.
! Note that characters that cannot be displayed on this receiver are displayed as #.
! This feature is not available for photos on your iPod.
Finding what you want to play
When your iPod is connected to this receiver, you can browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist, artist name,
album name, song name, genre or composer, similar to using your iPod directly.
1 Use i/j to select a category, then press ENTER to browse that category.
! When o or p is pressed at the list screen, the page switches.
! To return to the previous level any time, press RETURN.
2 Use i/j to browse the selected category (e.g., albums).
! Use k/l to move to previous/next levels.
3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press d to start playback.
! On the playback screen, pressing RETURN displays a list screen. To return to the playback screen, press DISP.
Note
You can play all of the songs in a particular category by selecting the All item at the top of each category list. For
example, you can play all the songs by a particular artist.
Basic playback controls
This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on an iPod.
VSX-1130/VSX-930
TOP
MENU
RETURN
ENTER
HOME
MENU
DISP
VSX-830
Switching the iPod controls
You can switch over the iPod controls between the iPod and the receiver.
1 Press HOME MENU to switch the iPod controls.
This enables operation and display on your iPod, and this receiver’s remote control and GUI screen become
inactive.
2 Press HOME MENU again to switch back to the receiver controls.
Note
Change the receiver’s input to the iPod in one action by pressing the iPod iPhone DIRECT CONTROL button on
the front panel to enable iPod operations on the iPod.
 
64
Basic playback
06
Playing a USB device
It is possible to play files using the USB interface on the front of this receiver.
! Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory drives (particularly key
drives) and digital audio players (MP3 players) of format FAT16/32.
! Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and
assumes no responsibility for any loss of data that may occur when connected to this receiver.
1 Press u STANDBY/ON to switch on the receiver and your TV.
For connection of USB memory, refer to page 34 (VSX-1130/VSX-930) or page 46 (VSX-830).
About one minute is required between turning the power on and completion of startup.
! Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting the USB device.
2 Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.
When the display shows the names of folders and files, you’re ready to play from the USB device.
Note
If an Over Current message lights in the display, the power requirements of the USB device are too high for this
receiver. Try following the points below:
! Switch the receiver off, then on again.
! Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched off.
! Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the device) for USB power.
If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely your USB device is incompatible.
Playing back audio files stored on a USB memory device
The maximum number of levels that you can select in Step 2 (below) is 9.
! Note that non-Roman characters in the playlist are displayed as #.
1 Use i/j to select a folder, then press ENTER to browse that folder.
! To return to the previous level any time, press RETURN.
2 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press d to start
playback.
! Copyrighted audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.
! DRM-protected audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.
! On the playback screen, pressing RETURN displays a list screen. To return to the playback screen, press
DISP.
Basic playback controls
This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on USB memory devices.
! Press iPod USB to switch the remote control to the iPod/USB operation mode.
VSX-1130/VSX-930
TOP
MENU
RETURN
ENTER
HOME
MENU
DISP
VSX-830
Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device
! Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone.
1 Use i/j to select a folder, then press ENTER to browse that folder.
! For high resolution files, some time may be required for the photo to appear.
! To return to the previous level any time, press RETURN.
2 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press ENTER to start
playback.
The selected content is displayed in full screen and a slideshow starts.
Basic playback controls
Button(s) What it does
ENTER, d
Starts displaying a photo and playing a slideshow.
g
Stops the player and returns to the previous menu.
Tip
Slide shows of photo files can be played while listening to music files by returning to the folder/file list display
while playing a music file on a USB device and then playing the photo files. At that time, select music files with a
sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less.
 
65
Basic playback
06
About playable file formats
The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not available
for playback although they are listed as playable file formats.
! For MP3, WAV, AAC, FLAC, AIFF, Apple Lossless, and DSD files, gapless play will be performed when a music
file with identical format, sampling frequency, number of quantization bits, and number of channels is con-
tinuously played.
When AAC or MP3 format is used, sound is reproduced with the minimum gap. If you are conscious about
gaps, use WAV or FLAC files.
Music files
Category Extension Stream
MP3
<a>
.mp3 MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3
Sampling frequency 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit
Channel 2 ch
Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps
VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
WAV .wav LPCM
Sampling frequency
<b>
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz,
192 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 24 bit
Channel 2 ch, 5.0 ch, 5.1 ch
WMA .wma
WMA2/7/8/9
<c>
Sampling frequency 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit
Channel 2 ch
Bitrate 5 kbps to 320 kbps
VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
AAC
.m4a
.aac
.3gp
.3g2
MPEG-4 AAC LC
MPEG-4 HE AAC
Sampling frequency 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit
Channel 2 ch
Bitrate 16 kbps to 320 kbps
VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
Apple Lossless
.m4a
.mp4
Apple Lossless
Sampling frequency
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz,
192 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 24 bit
Channel 2 ch
FLAC
<d>
.flac FLAC
Sampling frequency
<b>
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz,
192 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 24 bit
Channel 2 ch, 5.0 ch, 5.1 ch
AIFF
.aiff
.aif
AIFF
Sampling frequency
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz,
192 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 24 bit
Channel 2 ch
Category Extension Stream
DSD
<e>
.dff
.dsf
DSDIFF
DSF
Sampling frequency
2.8224 MHz, 5.6448 MHz
<f>
Quantization bitrate 1 bit
Channel 2 ch
a “MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”
b 176.4 kHz and 192 kHz support 2-channel audio sources only.
c Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifi-
cally, Pro, Lossless, Voice.
d Uncompressed FLAC files are not supported. Pioneer does not guarantee playback.
e DSD files cannot be played in the sub zone.
f 5.6448 MHz signals cannot be played on the VSX-830.
Photo files
Category Extension Format
JPEG .jpg
Meeting the following conditions:
! Baseline JPEG format
! Y:Cb:Cr – 4:2:2
Playing an MHL-compatible device
MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is an interface standard for transmitting digital signals with mobile devices.
MHL can carry high quality multi-channel audio data and 3D/Full-HD video formats.
The MHL-compatible device’s video signals are output from the TV connected to the receiver, the audio signals
are output from the speakers connected to the receiver or TV.
1 Press u STANDBY/ON to switch on the receiver and your TV.
For connection of MHL standard-compatible equipment, refer to page 34 (VSX-1130/VSX-930) or page 47
(VSX-830).
2 Press MHL on the remote control to switch the receiver to the MHL.
3 Select and play the desired contents on the MHL-compatible device.
Notes
! MHL-compatible devices can be operated with the receiver’s remote control by pressing the remote control’s
MHL button, but depending on the MHL-compatible device being used, some buttons may not be operable.
! To playback from a MHL-compatible device connected to the receiver on a TV that is also connected to the
receiver, the power to the receiver must be turned on.
 
66
Basic playback
06
Listening to the radio
The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and
manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a
station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can memorize the frequency for recall later-see Saving station
presets on page 66 for more on how to do this.
1 Press TUNER to select the tuner.
2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if necessary.
3 Tune to a station.
There are three ways to do this:
! Automatic tuning – To search for stations in the currently selected band, press and hold TUNE +/ for about
a second. The receiver will start searching for the next station, stopping when it has found one. Repeat to
search for other stations.
! Manual tuning – To change the frequency one step at a time, press TUNE +/.
! High speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE +/ for high speed tuning. Release the button at the frequency
you want.
Improving FM sound
Excluding VSX-830
If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn’t light when tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press
MPX to switch the receiver into mono reception mode. This should improve the sound quality and allow you to
enjoy the broadcast.
Tuning directly to a station
1 Press TUNER to select the tuner.
2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if necessary.
3 Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access).
4 Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of the radio station.
For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0.
If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS twice to cancel the frequency and start over.
Saving station presets
If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for easy
recall whenever you want to listen to that station. This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This
receiver can memorize up to 63 stations, stored in seven banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 stations each.
1 Tune to a station you want to memorize.
See Listening to the radio on page 66 for more on this.
2 Press TOOLS (TUNER EDIT).
The display shows PRESET MEMORY, then a blinking memory class.
3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes, then press PRESET +/– to select the station
preset you want.
You can also use the number buttons to select a station preset.
4 Press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop blinking and the receiver stores the station.
Listening to station presets
1 Press TUNER to select the tuner.
2 Press CLASS to select the class in which the station is stored.
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.
3 Press PRESET +/– to select the station preset you want.
! You can also use the number buttons on the remote control to recall the station preset.
Naming station presets
For easier identification, you can name your station presets.
1 Choose the station preset you want to name.
See Listening to station presets on page 66 for how to do this.
2 Press TOOLS (TUNER EDIT).
The display shows PRESET NAME, then a blinking cursor at the first character position.
3 Input the name you want.
Use i/j (or TUNE i/j of front panel) to select a character, k/l (or PRESET k/l of front panel) to set the
position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.
Notes
! To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1 to 3 and input eight spaces instead of a name.
! Once you have named a station preset, you can press DISP when listening to a station to switch the display
between name and frequency.
An introduction to RDS (for Europe)
Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by most FM radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of
information-the name of the station and the kind of show they’re broadcasting, for example.
One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of program. For example, you can search for a station that’s
broadcasting a show with the program type, JAZZ.
You can search the following program types:
! In addition, there are two other program types, TEST and NONE. You can’t search for these.
NEWS - News
AFFAIRS - Current Affairs
INFO - General Information
SPORT - Sport
EDUCATE - Educational
DRAMA - Radio plays, etc.
CULTURE - National or regional culture, theater, etc.
SCIENCE - Science and technology
VARIED - Usually talk-based material, such as quiz shows or
interviews.
POP M - Pop music
ROCK M - Rock music
EASY M - Easy listening
LIGHT M - ‘Light’ classical music
CLASSICS - ‘Serious’ classical music
OTHER M - Music not fitting above categories
WEATHER - Weather reports
FINANCE - Stock market reports, commerce, trading, etc.
CHILDREN - Programs for children
SOCIAL - Social affairs
RELIGION - Programs concerning religion
PHONE IN - Public expressing their views by phone
TRAVEL - Holiday-type travel rather than traffic announce-
ments
LEISURE - Leisure interests and hobbies
JAZZ - Jazz
COUNTRY - Country music
NATION M - Popular music in a language other than English
OLDIES - Popular music from the ’50s and ’60s
FOLK M - Folk music
DOCUMENT - Documentary
 
67
Basic playback
06
Searching for RDS programs
One of the most useful features of RDS is the ability to search for a particular kind of radio program. You can
search for any of the program types listed above.
1 Press TUNER to select the FM band.
! RDS is only possible in the FM band.
2 Press PTY.
PTY SEARCH shows in the display.
3 Press PRESET +/– to select the program type you want to hear.
4 Press ENTER to search for the program type.
The system starts searching through all frequencies for a match. When it finds one, the search stops and the
station plays for five seconds.
5 If you want to keep listening to the station, press ENTER within the five seconds.
If you don’t press ENTER, searching resumes.
If NO PTY is displayed it means the tuner couldn’t find that program type at the time of the search.
! RDS searches all frequencies. If the program type could not be found among all the frequencies, NO PTY is
displayed.
Displaying RDS information
Use the DISP button to display the different types of RDS information available.
! If any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll, some characters may be displayed incorrectly.
! If you see NO RT DATA in the RT display, it means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station.
! If you see NO PS DATA in the PS display, it means no PS data can be received.
! If you see NO PTY DATA in the PTY display, it means no PTY data can be received.
% Press DISP for RDS information.
Each press changes the display as follows:
! Radio Text (RT) – Messages sent by the radio station. For example, a talk radio station may provide a phone
number as RT.
! Program Service Name (PS) – The name of the radio station.
! Program Type (PTY) – This indicates the kind of program currently being broadcast.
! Current tuner frequency.
Music playback using Bluetooth wireless technology
This receiver
Remote control
operation
Music data
Bluetooth
wireless
technology enabled device:
cell phone
Bluetooth
wireless
technology enabled device:
Digital music player
Device not equipped with
Bluetooth
wireless technology:
Digital music player
+
Bluetooth
audio transmitter
(sold commercially)
The unit is capable of playing back music stored on Bluetooth capable devices (cell phones, digital music players
etc.) wirelessly. You can also use a Bluetooth audio transmitter (sold separately) to enjoy music from devices that
do not have Bluetooth functionality. Please refer to the user’s manual for your Bluetooth capable device for more
details.
Notes
! The Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device must support A2DP profiles.
! Pioneer does not guarantee proper connection and operation of this unit with all wireless technology enabled
devices.
Remote control operation
The remote control supplied with this unit allows you to play and stop media, and perform other operations.
Notes
! The Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device must support AVRCP profiles.
! Remote control operations cannot be guaranteed for all Bluetooth wireless technology enabled devices.
 
68
Basic playback
06
Pairing with the unit (Initial registration)
In order for the unit to playback music stored on a Bluetooth capable device, pairing must first be performed.
Pairing should be performed when first using the unit with the Bluetooth capable device, or when the pairing data
on the device has been erased for any reason. Pairing is a step required to allow communication using Bluetooth
wireless technology to be carried out.
! Pairing is performed the first time that you use the unit and the Bluetooth capable device together.
! In order to allow communication using Bluetooth wireless technology to take place, pairing must be performed
on both the unit and the Bluetooth capable device.
! After pressing the BT and switching to BT AUDIO input, perform the pairing procedure on the Bluetooth capa-
ble device. If pairing has been performed correctly, you will not need to perform the pairing procedures for the
unit as shown below.
Please refer to the user’s manual for your Bluetooth capable device for more details.
1 Press BT and after choosing the input for BT AUDIO, perform operations 2 and 3 within 5
minutes.
2 Turn on the power to the Bluetooth capable device that you wish to pair with, and
perform pairing procedure on it.
Pairing will start.
! Place the Bluetooth capable device close to the unit.
! Please refer to the user’s manual for your Bluetooth capable device for details on when pairing can be per-
formed and the procedures required for pairing.
! The name of this receiver indicated on the equipment that has the Bluetooth functionality is “VSX-1130
XXXXXX (equipment unique symbol)”, “VSX-930 XXXXXX (equipment unique symbol)” or “VSX-830 XXXXXX
(equipment unique symbol)”.
3 Confirm on the Bluetooth capable device that pairing has been completed.
If pairing with the Bluetooth capable device has been completed correctly, CONNECTED will be displayed on the
front panel of the unit.
Listen to music on the unit from a Bluetooth capable device
1 A Bluetooth connection will be created between the Bluetooth capable device and the
unit.
Procedures for connecting to the unit should be performed from the Bluetooth capable device.
! Please refer to the user’s manual for your Bluetooth capable device for details of the connection procedures.
2 Playback music from the Bluetooth capable device.
This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology devices.
! When the Network Standby and Bluetooth Setup for Network, Bluetooth settings are set as ON, the
main power of this receiver will automatically be on by playing the equipment using the Bluetooth function.
! When play is started on the equipment with the Bluetooth function, the zone input set at Play ZONE Setup
will automatically switch to BT AUDIO.
! Depending on the Bluetooth wireless technology device you use, operation may differ from what is shown in
the remote control buttons.
VSX-1130/VSX-930 VSX-830
3 While listening to a source, set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then
press ADV repeatedly to select SOUND RETRIEVER AIR.
Notes
! With this receiver, when an iPod is connected or disconnected while the music of a Bluetooth wireless technol-
ogy device is playing, the connection with the Bluetooth wireless technology device may be canceled.
! The SOUND RETRIEVER AIR listening mode can only be selected when the BT AUDIO input.
Radio wave caution
This unit uses a 2.4 GHz radio wave frequency, which is a band used by other wireless systems (see list below).
To prevent noise or interrupted communication, do not use this unit nearby such devices, or make sure these
devices are switched off during use.
! Cordless phones
! Cordless facsimiles
! Microwave ovens
! Wireless LAN devices (IEEE802.11b/g)
! Wireless AV equipment
! Wireless controllers for game systems
! Microwave-based health aids
! Some baby monitors
Other, less common, equipment that may operate on the same frequency:
! Anti-theft systems
! Amateur radio stations (HAM)
! Warehouse logistic management systems
! Discrimination systems for train or emergency vehicles
 
69
Basic playback
06
Notes
! In the event noise appears in your television image, there is the possibility that a Bluetooth wireless technology
enabled device or this unit (including products supported by this unit) are causing signal interference with
the antenna input connector of your television, video, satellite tuner, etc. In this event, increase the distance
between the antenna input connector and the Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device or this unit
(including products supported by this unit).
! If there is something obstructing the path between this unit (including devices supported by this unit) and the
device equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology (such as a metal door, concrete wall, or insulation con-
taining tinfoil), you may need to change the location of your system to prevent signal noise and interruptions.
Scope of operation
Use of this unit is limited to home use. (Transmission distances may be reduced depending on communication
environment).
In the following locations, poor condition or inability to receive radio waves may cause the audio to be interrupted
or stopped:
! In reinforced concrete buildings or steel framed or iron-framed buildings.
! Near large metallic furniture.
! In a crowd of people or near a building or obstacle.
! In a location exposed to the magnetic field, static electricity or radio wave interference from radio communica-
tion equipment using the same frequency band (2.4 GHz) as this unit, such as a 2.4 GHz wireless LAN device
(IEEE802.11b/g) or microwave oven.
! If you live in a heavily populated residential area (apartment, townhouse, etc.) and if your neighbor’s micro-
wave is placed near your system, you may experience radio wave interference. If this occurs, move your unit to
a different place. When the microwave is not in use, there will be no radio wave interference.
Radio wave reflections
The radio waves received by this unit include the radio wave coming directly from the device equipped with
Bluetooth wireless technology (direct wave) and waves coming from various directions due to reflections by walls,
furniture and building (reflected waves). The reflected waves (due to obstacles and reflecting objects) further
produce a variety of reflected waves as well as variation in reception condition depending on locations. If the
audio cannot be received properly due to this phenomenon, try moving the location of the device equipped with
Bluetooth wireless technology a little. Also note that audio may be interrupted due to the reflected waves when
a person crosses or approaches the space between this unit and the device equipped with Bluetooth wireless
technology.
Precautions regarding connections to products supported by this unit
! Complete connections for all devices supported by this unit, including all audio cords and power cables before
connecting them to this unit.
! After completing connections to this unit, check the audio and power cables to confirm that they not twisted
together.
! When disconnecting this unit, confirm that you have sufficient working space in the surrounding area.
! When changing connections of audio or other cables for products supported by this unit, confirm that you
have sufficient working space in the surrounding area.
 
70
 
Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes ................................................71
Selecting MCACC presets .............................................................................................................. 73
Choosing the input signal ............................................................................................................. 73
Better sound using Phase Control ................................................................................................73
Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control ...............................................74
Listening to your system
71
Listening to your system
07
Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in surround sound. However, the options available will depend
on your speaker setup and the type of source you’re listening to.
To play with surround sound, check “Standard surround sound” or “Using the Advanced surround effects” below
and select the desired mode.
To play with the optimum mode for the input signal, see “Auto playback” or “Using Stream Direct”. (The sound is
played in stereo when 2-channel signals are input, in surround when multi-channel signals are input.)
Important
! The listening modes and many features described in this section may not be available depending on the cur-
rent source, settings and status of the receiver.
Auto playback
There are many ways to listen back to sources using this receiver, but the simplest, most direct listening option
is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.
% While listening to a source, press AUTO (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) for auto
playback of a source.
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before showing the decoding or playback format. Check the digi-
tal format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed.
! If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround encoded, the proper decoding format will automatically
be selected and shows in the display.
! When listening to the BT AUDIO input, the SOUND RETRIEVER AIR feature is selected automatically.
ALC – In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this receiver equalizes playback sound levels.
Also, the low and high frequency sounds, dialogs, surround effects, etc., that are difficult to hear when the vol-
ume is low are adjusted to be optimal for the volume level. This mode is particularly optimum when listening at
night.
Note
When ALC is selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options
on page 85 .
Standard surround sound
The following modes provide basic surround sound for stereo and multichannel sources.
In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930
% While listening to a source, press SURR (STANDARD SURROUND).
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.
! If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround encoded, the proper decoding format will automatically
be selected and shows in the display.
With two channel sources, you can select from:
! EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to a stereo source, using all of your speakers
! Dolby Surround – Dolby Surround is played with a maximum of 7.1 ch including top-middle and surround
back using up-mix technology that can expand sound to speakers arranged in three-dimensions, in lieu of the
conventional Pro Logic II, Pro Logix IIx, and Pro Logic IIz.
! Neo:6 CINEMA – Up to 7.1 channel sound (surround back or front wide), especially suited to movie sources
! Neo:6 MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound (surround back or front wide), especially suited to music sources
! STEREO – The audio is heard with your sound settings and you can still use the audio options.
With multichannel sources, if you have connected surround back, top middle, front wide speakers, you can select
(according to format):
! EXT.STEREO – See above
! Dolby Surround – See above
! STEREO – See above
! DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback with DTS encoded sources
! DTS-ES Matrix or DTS-ES Discrete – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback with DTS-ES encoded sources
! Straight Decode – Plays back without the effects above.
Notes
! When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center
image effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 85 ).
! When listening through headphones, you can select STEREO mode only.
! When Dolby Surround is selected, C.SPREAD can be adjusted (page 85 ).
! When Dolby Surround is selected, audio is not output from the front wide speaker and surround back speaker
when it is the only one connected (set).
! When Neo:6 CINEMA or Neo:6 MUSIC is selected, audio is not output from the top middle speaker.
In case of VSX-830
% While listening to a source, press SURR (STANDARD SURROUND).
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.
! If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround encoded, the proper decoding format will automatically
be selected and shows in the display.
With two channel sources, you can select from:
! EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to a stereo source, using all of your speakers
! Pro Logic II MOVIE – Up to 5.1 channel sound, especially suited to movie sources
!
Pro Logic II MUSIC – Up to 5.1 channel sound, especially suited to music sources
!
Pro Logic II GAME – Up to 5.1 channel sound, especially suited to video games
!
PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound (sound from the surround speakers is mono)
! Neo:6 CINEMA – Up to 5.1 channel sound, especially suited to movie sources
! Neo:6 MUSIC – Up to 5.1 channel sound, especially suited to music sources
! STEREO – The audio is heard with your sound settings and you can still use the audio options.
With multichannel sources, if you have connected surround speakers, you can select (according to format):
! EXT.STEREO – See above
! DTS-ES Matrix or DTS-ES Discrete – Allows you to hear 5.1 channel playback with DTS-ES encoded sources
! DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 5.1 channel playback with DTS encoded sources
! Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 5.1 channel playback
! STEREO – See above
! Straight Decode – Plays back without the effects above.
Notes
! When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode, there are three further parameters you
can adjust: C.WIDTH, DIMENSION and PANORAMA. See Setting the Audio options on page 85 to adjust
them.
! When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center
image effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 85 ).
! When listening through headphones, you can select STEREO mode only.
 
72
Listening to your system
07
Using the Advanced surround effects
The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety of additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced
Surround modes are designed to be used with film soundtracks, but some modes are also suited for music
sources. Try different settings with various soundtracks to see which you like.
% Press ADV (ADVANCED SURROUND) repeatedly to select a listening mode.
! ACTION – Designed for action movies with dynamic soundtracks
! DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of dialog
! ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video games
! SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs
! CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type sound
! ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for rock and/or pop music
! F.S.SURROUND – Use to provide a rich surround sound effect directed to the center of where the front left and
right speakers sound projection area converges.
Front left
speaker
Front right
speaker
! SOUND RETRIEVER AIR – Suitable for listening to the sound from a Bluetooth wireless technology device. The
SOUND RETRIEVER AIR listening mode can only be selected when the BT AUDIO input.
! PHONES SURR – When listening through headphones, you can still get the effect of overall surround.
! ECO MODE 1 – Select this to play for example music that has a high audio level with a lower power consump-
tion than usual.
! ECO MODE 2 – Select this to play movies, etc., with a high ratio of low volume scenes and high volume scenes
(a large dynamic ratio) with a lower power consumption than usual. This mode provides greater power savings
than ECO MODE 1.
Notes
! The Front Stage Surround Advance (F.S.SURROUND) function allows you to create natural surround sound
effects using just the front speakers and the subwoofer.
! When ECO MODE 1 or ECO MODE 2 is selected, the front panel’s display lights with the dimmest brightness.
! Since ECO MODE 1 and ECO MODE 2 reduce the power consumption, the speakers are switched in function
of the number of input channels. Because of this, a speaker switching sound (clicking sound) may be pro-
duced when the number of input channels is switched. If this bothers you, switch to a different listening mode.
! When using headphones, SOUND RETRIEVER AIR (only with the BT AUDIO input), PHONES SURR,
ECO MODE 1 and ECO MODE 2 can be selected.
Using Stream Direct
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the truest possible reproduction of a source. All unneces-
sary signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the pure analog or digital sound source.
Processing differs depending on the input signal and whether or not surround back speakers are connected. For
details, see Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats on page 127 .
% While listening to a source, press AUTO (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to select the
mode you want.
Check the digital format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed.
! AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on page 71 .
! ALC – Listening in Auto level control mode (page 71 ).
When ALC is selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio
options on page 85 .
! DIRECT – Plays back sound from the source with the least modification next to PURE DIRECT. With DIRECT,
the only modifications added to PURE DIRECT playback are calibration of the sound field by the MCACC sys-
tem and the Phase Control effect.
! PURE DIRECT – Plays back unmodified sound from source with only minimal digital treatment.
Note
When listening through headphones, you can select ALC or PURE DIRECT mode only.
About Dolby Atmos
Excluding VSX-830
This AV receiver supports the latest Dolby Atmos surround sound system. Dolby Atmos is a new technology in
which, through real time calculation of audio data and meta data (position and time information) included in the
audio signal, a surround sound space is achieved irrespective of the speaker layout and number of speakers.
Dolby Atmos contents are required to enjoy Dolby Atmos. For Blu-ray discs with Dolby Atmos, Dolby Atmos can
be played by connecting most conventional Blu-ray discs with this receiver using HDMI.
In addition, the following connection and settings are necessary to play Dolby Atmos.
! Any one of top-middle, surround back, or front-wide must be selected.
! The listening mode of any one of AUTO SURROUND, DIRECT, PURE DIRECT must be selected.
! Settings for RENDER must be OBJECT (page 85 ).
For details on Dolby Atmos, see page 131 .
Note
When playing back Dolby Atmos content, the program format indicator does not light (page 15 ).
Dolby Atmos’ is displayed in the display of this receiver.
 
73
Listening to your system
07
Selecting MCACC presets
! Default setting: MEMORY 1
If you have calibrated your system for different listening positions, you can switch between settings to suit the
kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a
video game close to the TV).
1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and
then press AUDIO P..
2 Use i/j to select ‘MCACC’.
An indicator such as c M1. MEMORY 1 d is displayed in the front panel display.
3 Use k/l to select the setting.
Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets. See Data Management on page 104 to check and man-
age your current settings.
! These settings have no effect when headphones are connected.
! You can also press k/l to select the MCACC preset.
Choosing the input signal
On this receiver, it is possible to switch the input signals for the different inputs as described below.
! This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz) and DTS (including DTS 96/24) digital
signal formats. The compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM (32 kHz to 192
kHz), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio and SACD.
! You may get digital noise when an LD, CD, DVD or BD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal.
To prevent noise, make the proper digital connections (page 26 ) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.
! Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with
your DVD player.
1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and
then press AUDIO P..
2 Use i/j to select ‘SIGSEL’.
3 Use k/l to select the input signal corresponding to the source component.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
! AUTO – The receiver selects the first available signal in the following order: HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.
! ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.
! DIGITAL – Select an optical or coaxial digital input signal. ‘DIGITL’ is displayed on the front panel display.
! HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.
When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through your TV, not
from this receiver.
When set to DIGITAL, HDMI or AUTO (only selected DIGITAL or HDMI), the indicators light according to the
signal being decoded (see Display on page 15 ).
Better sound using Phase Control
This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses phase correction measures to make sure your sound source arrives at
the listening position in phase, preventing unwanted distortion and/or coloring of the sound.
Phase Control technology provides coherent sound reproduction through the use of phase matching for an opti-
mal sound image. The default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase Control switched on for all sound
sources.
1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and
then press AUDIO P..
2 Use i/j to select ‘PHASE’.
3 Use k/l to switch on phase correction.
The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights.
Notes
! Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in
phase’, they crest and trough together, resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound
signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough, then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image
will be produced.
! For discs created with standards other than Phase Control, the LFE channel is delayed upon recording in the
first place. Phase Control Plus function corrects for phase shifting on such discs. For instructions on setting
the Phase Control Plus, see Setting the Audio options on page 85 .
! If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0º). However, the effect you can
actually feel when PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set
your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of
your subwoofer.
! Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to off. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the
cutoff frequency to a higher value.
! If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.
! The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:
When headphones are plugged in.
When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.
When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Setting the Audio options on page 85 .
 
74
Listening to your system
07
Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control
Excluding VSX-830
This receiver is equipped with the two types of functions that correct phase distortion and group delay: Phase
Control and Full Band Phase Control. Activating Full Band Phase Control is strongly recommended because it
also involves the effects of Phase Control.
The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers connected.
Standard speakers designed exclusively for audio use generally reproduce sound with the divided frequency
bands output from a speaker system consisting of multiple speakers (in case of typical 3-way speakers, for
instance, the tweeter, the squawker (midrange), and the woofer output sound in the high-, middle-, and low-
frequency ranges, respectively). Though these speakers are designed to flatten the frequency-amplitude charac-
teristics across wide ranges, there are cases where the group delay characteristics are not effectively flattened.
This phase distortion of the speakers subsequently causes group delay (the delay of low-frequency sound against
high-frequency sound) during audio signal playback.
This receiver analyzes the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers by measuring test signals output from
the speakers with the supplied microphone, therefore flattening the analyzed frequency-phase characteristics
during audio signal playback - the same correction is made for a pair of left and right speakers. This correction
minimizes group delay between the ranges of a speaker and improves the frequency-phase characteristics across
all ranges.
Furthermore, the enhanced frequency-phase characteristics between channels ensure better surround sound
integration for multichannel setting.
! Upon shipment from the factory, the Phase Control function is in on status. If you perform Full Auto MCACC
(page 57 ) or Full Band Phase Ctrl of Auto MCACC (page 99 ), the Full Band Phase Control function is
automatically turned on after measurement. By turning Full Band Phase Control on, the Phase Control func-
tion is turned on as well. Therefore, we recommend that usually the function be used with Full Band Phase
Control on.
1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and
then press AUDIO P..
2 Use i/j to select ‘PHASE’.
3 Use k/l to select ‘FULLBND’.
Both the Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control functions are switched on. The FULL BAND and indica-
tor, on the front panel lights.
Notes
! The original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics after
correction can be displayed graphically in the GUI screen (see Checking MCACC Data on page 103 ). Also, by
transferring the measurement data to the computer using the CD-ROM, the original characteristics of group
delay of the speakers calibrated and the corrected characteristics of group delay can be displayed in 3-dimen-
sion on your PC. For details, refer to the operating instructions for the MCACC PRO PC Display Application
Software included on the CD-ROM.
! Depending on the input signal and listening mode, it may not be possible to set the Full Band Phase Ctrl
mode to ON.
! The Full Band Phase Ctrl mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:
When headphones are plugged in.
When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.
When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Setting the Audio options on page 85 .
! The Full Band Phase Control function does not work for Dolby Enabled Speakers since they are full-range
speakers.
 
75
 
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................76
Playback with Network functions ................................................................................................ 77
About network playback ..............................................................................................................79
About playable file formats ..........................................................................................................80
Playback with NETWORK features
76
Playback with NETWORK features
08
Introduction
This receiver is equipped with the LAN terminal and you can enjoy the following features by connecting your
components to these terminals.
Listening to Internet radio stations
You can select and listen to your favorite Internet radio station from the list of Internet radio stations created,
edited, and managed by the vTuner database service exclusively for use with the Pioneer products.
dSee Playback with Network functions on page 77 and Listening to Internet radio stations on page 77 .
Playback the music files stored in PCs
You can playback a lot of musics stored in your PCs using this unit.
! Besides a PC, you can also play back audio files stored on your other components with the built-in media
server function based on DLNA 1.0 or DLNA 1.5 framework and protocols (i.e. network-capable hard disks and
audio systems).
dSee Playback with Network functions on page 77 and Playing back audio files stored on components on the
network on page 79 .
Listening to Pandora Internet Radio
dSee Listening to Pandora Internet Radio on page 78 .
Listening to Spotify audio streaming playback
dSee About the Spotify audio stream playback function on page 78 .
Notes
! To listen to Internet radio stations, you must sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service Provider) beforehand.
! Photo or video files cannot be played back.
! With Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12, DRM-protected audio files cannot be played back
on this receiver.
About playable DLNA network devices
This unit allows you to play music on media servers connected on an identical Local Area Network (LAN) as the
receiver. This unit allows for the playing of files stored on the following devices:
! PCs running Microsoft Windows 7 or Windows 8 with Windows Media Player 12 installed
! DLNA-compatible digital media servers (on PCs or other components)
Files stored in a PC or DMS (Digital Media Server) as described above can be played via command from an exter-
nal Digital Media Controller (DMC). Devices controlled by this DMC to play files are called DMRs (Digital Media
Renderers). This receiver supports this DMR function. When in the DMR mode, such operations as playing and
stopping files can be performed from the external controller. Volume adjustment and the muting control are also
possible. The DMR mode is canceled if the remote control unit is operated while in the DMR mode (aside from
certain buttons, including the VOLUME +/, MUTE and DISP).
! Depending on the external controller being used, playback may be interrupted when the volume is adjusted
from the controller. In this case, adjust the volume from the receiver or remote control.
Using AirPlay on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad, and iTunes
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion or later,
and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
To use AirPlay, select your receiver on your iPod touch, iPhone, iPad or in iTunes. *1
The receiver’s input will switch automatically to AirPlay when AirPlay is in use. *2
The following operations can be performed when in AirPlay mode:
! Adjustment of the receiver’s volume from iPod touch, iPhone, iPad or iTunes.
! Pause/resume, next/previous track, and shuffle/repeat from the remote control of the receiver. *3
! Display of the currently playing track information on the receiver’s display, including artist, song and album
name.
*1: For more information, see the Apple website (http://www.apple.com).
*2: The receiver’s power automatically turns on when Network Standby at Network Option is set to ON.
*3: If operation is not possible, press NET, then operate again.
Notes
! A network environment is required to use AirPlay.
! The receiver’s name that shows up in the AirPlay UI on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad and iTunes can be changed by
Friendly Name from Network Option.
! AirPlay provided on this receiver has been developed and tested based on the software versions for the iPod,
iPhone, iPad and the software versions for iTunes that are indicated on the Pioneer website. AirPlay may not
be compatible with iPod, iPhone, iPad or iTunes software versions other than those indicated on the Pioneer
website.
http://pioneer.jp/homeav/support/ios/eu/ (for Europe)
http://pioneer.jp/homeav/support/ios/ao/ (for Australia and New Zealand)
About the DHCP server function
To play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations, you must turn
on the DHCP server function of your router. In case your router does not have the built-in DHCP server function,
it is necessary to set up the network manually. Otherwise, you cannot play back audio files stored on components
on the network or listen to Internet radio stations. See Setting network connection on page 51 for more on this.
Authorizing this receiver
This receiver must be authorized to enable playback. This happens automatically when the receiver makes a
connection over the network to the PC. If not, please authorize this receiver manually on the PC. The authorization
(or permission) method for access varies depending on the type of server currently being connected. For more
information on authorizing this receiver, refer to the instruction manual of your server.
 
77
Playback with NETWORK features
08
About HTC Connect
This receiver features “HTC Connect”, a simple way to enjoy music content from your HTC Connect certified
smart phone.
1 HTC Connect music streaming provided on this product has been developed based on interoperability testing
as defined by the HTC Connect Certification program with the HTC Connect-compatible smartphones.
2 Music Navigation via the music progress bar is not currently supported with HTC Connect.
3 Third party music applications (those other than HTC’s pre-installed “Music” app) have not been tested for
compatibility and may not work. HTC Connect has been tested with MP3, AAC, WMA and WAV encoding for-
mats. Other formats may not be compatible.
4 High network congestion may interfere with the operation of HTC Connect.
HTC Connect Certified Smartphones
The HTC Connect-compatible smartphones, Please check Pioneer website for up to date information about com-
patible devices and audio format support.
http://www.pioneer.eu/eur/content/products/htc-connect.html
Notes
! Specifications and design subject to modification without notice.
! HTC, HTC Connect and the HTC Connect logo are trademarks of HTC Corporation.
Playback with Network functions
Important
! About one minute is required between turning the power on and completion of startup.
! When you play back audio files, ‘Connecting...’ is displayed before playback starts. The display may continue
for several seconds depending on the type of file.
! In case a domain is configured in a Windows network environment, you cannot access a PC on the network
while you are logged onto the domain. Instead of logging onto the domain, log onto the local machine.
! There are cases where the time elapsed may not be correctly displayed.
1 Press NET repeatedly to select the category you want to play back.
It may take several seconds for this receiver to access the network.
Select a category from the following list:
! INTERNET RADIO – Internet radio
When INTERNET RADIO is selected, the radio station that was playing last time is played.
! PANDORA – Internet radio that supports Pandora
! Spotify – Music streaming distribution service
! MEDIA SERVER – Server components on the network
! FAVORITES – Favorite songs currently being registered
Depending on the selected category, the names of folders, files, and Internet radio stations are displayed.
2 Use i/j to select the folder, music files or Internet radio station to play back, and then
press ENTER.
Press i/j to scroll up and down the list and select the desired item. When you press ENTER, playback starts
with the playback screen being displayed for the selected item. To return to the list screen, press RETURN.
When the list screen is displayed from the playback screen, the playback screen reappears automatically if no
operation is performed for three minutes while the list screen is displayed.
Only audio files with the mark can be played. In case of the folders with the mark, use i/j and ENTER to
select the desired folder and audio files.
! When o or p is pressed at the list screen, the page switches.
! To return to the playback screen from the list display, press DISP.
3 Repeat step 2 to play back the desired song.
For detailed operating instructions, refer to the section shown below.
! Internet radio stations – See Listening to Internet radio stations on page 77 .
! Pandora – See Listening to Pandora Internet Radio on page 78 .
! Spotify – See About the Spotify audio stream playback function on page 78 .
! Media server – See Playing back audio files stored on components on the network on page 79 .
! Favorites – See Playing back your favorite songs on page 79 .
Basic playback controls
You can perform the following operations with the remote control of this receiver. Note that some buttons are not
available for operation depending on the category currently being played back.
! Press NET to switch the remote control to the network operation mode.
VSX-1130/VSX-930
TOP
MENU
RETURN
ENTER
TOOLS
MENU
DISP
CLR
Fav
VSX-830
Notes
! When input is MEDIA SERVER or FAVORITES, the following action is taken, depending on the server or file.
e may not work.
m and n may not work or may take the same action as o and p.
! When input is MEDIA SERVER, by pressing TOOLS on the list display screen, you can switch the displayed
titles in alphabetical order or track order.
Listening to Internet radio stations
Internet radio is an audio broadcasting service transmitted via the Internet. There are a large number of Internet
radio stations broadcasting a variety of services from every corner of the world. Some are hosted, managed,
and broadcast by private individuals while others are by the corresponding traditional terrestrial radio stations
or radio networks. Whereas terrestrial, or OTA (over-the-air), radio stations are geographically restricted on the
range of radio waves broadcast from a transmitter through the air, Internet radio stations are accessible from
anywhere in the world, as long as there is a connection to the Internet, as services are not transmitted through
the air but are delivered over the World Wide Web. On this receiver you can select Internet radio stations by genre
as well as by region.
Depending on the Internet line conditions, the sound may not be smooth when playing Internet radio.
 
78
Playback with NETWORK features
08
About list of Internet radio
The list of Internet radio stations on this receiver is created, edited, and managed by the vTuner database service
exclusively for use with this receiver. For details about vTuner, see vTuner on page 132 .
Saving and retrieving Internet radio stations
You can easily save and retrieve saved Internet radio stations. See Playing back your favorite songs on page 79
for more on this.
! To listen to Internet radio stations, you must have high-speed broadband Internet access. With a 56 K or ISDN
modem, you may not enjoy the full benefits of Internet radio.
! The port number varies depending on the Internet radio station. Check the firewall settings.
! A list of Internet radio stations provided by the vTuner database service is subject to change or deletion without
notice due to various reasons.
! Broadcasts may be stopped or interrupted depending on the Internet radio station. In this case, you cannot
listen to a radio station selected from the list of Internet radio stations.
Registering broadcast stations not on the vTuner list from the special Pioneer site
With the receiver, broadcast stations not included on the list of station distributed by vTuner can be registered
and played. Check the access code required for registration on the receiver, use this access code to access the
special Pioneer Internet radio site and register the desired broadcast stations in your favorites. The address of the
special Pioneer Internet radio site is:
http://www.radio-pioneer.com
1 Display the Internet Radio list screen.
To display the Internet Radio list screen, perform step 1 at Playback with Network functions on page 77 .
2 Use i/j to select ‘Help’, then press ENTER.
3 Use i/j to select ‘Get access code’, then press ENTER.
The access code required for registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed. Make a memo of
this address.
The following can be checked on the Help screen:
! Get access code – The access code required for registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site is
displayed.
! Show Your WebID/PW – After registering on the special Pioneer Internet radio site, the registered ID and
password are displayed.
! Reset Your WebID/PW – Resets all the information registered on the special Pioneer Internet radio site.
When reset, all the registered broadcast stations are also cleared. If you want to listen to the same stations,
re-register after resetting.
4 Access the special Pioneer Internet radio site from your computer and perform the
registration process.
http://www.radio-pioneer.com
Access the above site and use the access code in step 3 to perform user registration, following the instructions
on the screen.
5 Register the desired broadcast stations as your favorites, following the instructions on the
computer’s screen.
Both broadcast stations not on the vTuner list and stations on the vTuner list can be registered. In this case they
are registered on the receiver as favorite broadcast stations and can be played.
Listening to Pandora Internet Radio
(For Australian Model Only)
Pandora is personalized internet radio that is designed to help you discover new music you’ll love mixed in with
music you already know.
For details, check the website: http://www.pandora.com
! You must have a registered account in order to listen to songs using Pandora Internet Radio.
Select PANDORA, then follow the instructions on the screen to make the account settings.
! See the Pandora website for regions in which the Pandora service is offered.
! Some functions may be changed at Pandora’s discretion.
Notes
! When disposing of the product, we recommend you reset it to delete the data. See Resetting the system on
page 91 .
! Pandora
®
, the leading internet radio service, gives people music they love anytime, anywhere, through personal-
ized radio stations.
Inputting characters using the software keyboard
1 Press TOOLS to switch to the software keyboard operation mode.
2 Use i/j/k/l to select letters or symbols, then press ENTER.
Repeat this until all the desired characters have been input.
3 Select ‘OK’ on the software keyboard, then press ENTER.
! To quit inputting characters using the software keyboard, press the TOOLS button.
About the Spotify audio stream playback function
Spotify is a music streaming distribution service managed and operated by Spotify Ltd. and distributing music
over the Internet.
Spotify audio streams can be enjoyed using this unit and your smartphone or other mobile digital device.
Preparations (1) Installing the Spotify application on mobile digital devices and
registering a Spotify Premium account
Important
! The Spotify application must be installed on mobile digital devices and you must have registered a Spotify
Premium account (for a charge) in order to use the Spotify audio stream playback function on this unit. For
registration procedures and other Spotify services, see the Spotify website.
http://www.spotify.com/
http://www.spotify.com/connect/
! For information on the countries and regions where Spotify services can be used, see the website below.
http://www.spotify.com/
Spotify functions may be changed without notice.
An Internet connection is required on the mobile digital device in order to use the Spotify application. Using the
mobile telephone line for the Internet connection tends to lead to high packet communication charges, so we
recommend subscribing to a fixed packet rate plan. For details, contact your mobile telephone operator.
 
79
Playback with NETWORK features
08
Preparations (2) Connecting this unit to the network
! Connect this unit to the network and also to the Internet (pages 33 , 46 ).
! Connect the mobile digital device by Wi-Fi to the wireless LAN router of the same network as the one to which
this unit is connected. For instructions on connecting, see the operating instructions of the mobile digital
device and the wireless LAN router.
Using This Device With Spotify Connect
Spotify lets you listen to millions of songs – the artists you love, the latest hits and discoveries just for you.
If you are a Spotify user, you can control this device using your Spotify app.
Step 1. Connect your device to the same wifi network as your phone, tablet or PC running the Spotify app.
Step 2. Open the Spotify app, and play any song.
Step 3. Tap the song image in the bottom left of the screen.
Step 4. Tap the Connect icon
.
Step 5. Pick your device from the list.
For information on how to set up and use Spotify Connect please visit
http://www.spotify.com/connect/
CAUTION
Even if you are away from home, if you start Spotify audio streaming to play music on your mobile digital device
and this unit is selected, the sound will be output from this unit. Depending on the volume level, the output may
be loud, so be sure to check the audio output selection carefully before starting audio streaming. In addition, if
you accidentally select this unit and play the sound on it, switch the audio output selection to the mobile digital
device.
Notes
! A separate contract with/payment to an Internet service provider is required to use the Spotify audio stream
playback function.
! This unit’s name is displayed as the playback device on the Spotify application. Also, this unit’s name can be
changed at Friendly Name in the network settings.
! When this unit is selected with the Spotify application, the account information is registered on this unit as
well. When disposing of this unit, reset this unit’s settings in order to delete the account information registered
on this unit. For instructions on resetting, see this unit’s operating instructions.
Playing back audio files stored on components on the network
This unit allows you to play music on media servers connected on an identical Local Area Network (LAN) as the
receiver. This unit allows for the playing of files stored on the following devices:
! PCs running Microsoft Windows Vista or XP with Windows Media Player 11 installed
! PCs running Microsoft Windows 7 or Windows 8 with Windows Media Player 12 installed
! DLNA-compatible digital media servers (on PCs or other components)
Playing back your favorite songs
Up to 64 favorite tracks on the media server and/or Internet radio stations can be registered in the Favorites
folder. Note that only the audio files stored on components on the network can be registered.
Registering and deleting audio files and Internet radio stations in and from the
Favorites folder
1 Press NET repeatedly to select the INTERNET RADIO or MEDIA SERVER.
2 With the track or Internet radio station you want to register selected, press +Fav (Favorite).
The selected song or Internet radio station is then registered in the Favorite.
Note
To delete tracks or Internet radio stations that have been registered, set the input to FAVORITES, select the track
or station to be deleted, then press the CLR button.
About network playback
The network playback function of this unit uses the following technologies:
Windows Media Player
See Windows Media Player 11/Windows Media Player 12 on page 132 for more on this.
DLNA
DLNA CERTIFIED
TM
Audio Player
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a cross-industry organization of consumer electronics, comput-
ing industry and mobile device companies. Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of digital media
through a wired or wireless network in the home.
The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find products that comply with the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines.
This unit complies with DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1.5.
When a PC running DLNA server software or other DLNA compatible device is connected to this player, some
setting changes of software or other devices may be required. Please refer to the operating instructions for the
software or device for more information.
DLNA
TM
, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED
TM
are trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the Digital
Living Network Alliance.
Content playable over a network
! Even when encoded in a compatible format, some files may not play correctly.
! Movie or Photo files cannot be played back.
! There are cases where you cannot listen to an Internet radio station even if the station can be selected from a
list of radio stations.
! Some functions may not be supported depending on the server type or version used.
! Supported file formats vary by server. As such, files not supported by your server are not displayed on this unit.
For more information check with the manufacturer of your server.
Disclaimer for Third Party Content
Access to content provided by third parties requires a high speed internet connection and may also require
account registration and a paid subscription.
Third party content services may be changed, suspended, interrupted, or discontinued at any time without notice,
and Pioneer disclaims any liability in connection with such occurrences.
Pioneer does not represent or warrant that content services will continue to be provided or available for a particu-
lar period of time, and any such warranty, express or implied, is disclaimed.
 
80
Playback with NETWORK features
08
About playback behavior over a network
! Playback may stall when the PC is switched off or any media files stored on it are deleted while playing content.
! If there are problems within the network environment (heavy network traffic, etc.) content may not be displayed
or played properly (playback may be interrupted or stalled). For best performance, a 100BASE-TX connection
between player and PC is recommended.
! If several clients are playing simultaneously, as the case may be, playback is interrupted or stalled.
! Depending on the security software installed on a connected PC and the setting of such software, network
connection may be blocked.
Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction of the player and/or the NETWORK features due to communica-
tion error/malfunctions associated with your network connection and/or your PC, or other connected equipment.
Please contact your PC manufacturer or Internet service provider.
This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a
license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Media and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
About playable file formats
The NETWORK feature of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not
available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats. Also, the compatibility of file formats var-
ies depending on the type of server. Check with your server to ensure the compatibility of file formats supported
by your server.
! Internet radio playback may be affected by the Internet communications environment, and in this case play-
back may not be possible even with the file formats listed here.
! With MP3, WAV, AAC, FLAC, AIFF and Apple Lossless files, when music files with the same format, sampling
frequency, quantization bit number and number of channels are played successively, they are played with no
gap.
Gapless playback is not possible when the format is being converted (transcoded) by the server.
Gapless playback is not possible in the DMR mode.
When AAC or MP3 format is used, sound is reproduced with the minimum gap. If you are conscious about
gaps, use WAV or FLAC files.
Music files
Category Extension Stream
MP3
<a>
.mp3 MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3
Sampling frequency 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit
Channel 2 ch
Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps
VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
WAV .wav LPCM
Sampling frequency
<b>
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz,
192 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 24 bit
Channel
2 ch, 5.0 ch, 5.1 ch
<c>
Category Extension Stream
WMA .wma
WMA2/7/8/9
<d>
Sampling frequency 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit
Channel 2 ch
Bitrate 5 kbps to 320 kbps
VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
AAC
.m4a
.aac
.3gp
.3g2
MPEG-4 AAC LC
MPEG-4 HE AAC
Sampling frequency 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit
Channel 2 ch
Bitrate 16 kbps to 320 kbps
VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
Apple Lossless
.m4a
.mp4
Apple Lossless
Sampling frequency
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz,
192 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 24 bit
Channel 2 ch
FLAC
<e>
.flac FLAC
Sampling frequency
<b>
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz,
192 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 24 bit
Channel
2 ch, 5.0 ch, 5.1 ch
<c>
AIFF
.aiff
.aif
.aiff
.aif
Sampling frequency
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz,
192 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 24 bit
Channel 2 ch
DSD
<f>
.dff
.dsf
DSDIFF
DSF
Sampling frequency
2.8224 MHz, 5.6448 MHz
<g>
Quantization bitrate 1 bit
Channel 2 ch
a “MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”
b 32 kHz, 176.4 kHz and 192 kHz support 2-channel audio sources only.
c ! When playing the 5.0 channel or 5.1 channel file in the sub zone, only the front left and right sound is played. Multichannel
playback is only available with the main zone.
! Audio for 5.0 ch and 5.1 ch for wireless connection can be played only when the sampling frequency is 48 kHz or below.
d Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifi-
cally, Pro, Lossless, Voice.
e Uncompressed FLAC files are not supported. Pioneer does not guarantee playback.
f DSD files cannot be played in the sub zone.
g 5.6448 MHz signals cannot be played on the VSX-830.
 
81
 
About the Control with HDMI function .......................................................................................82
Making Control with HDMI connections ..................................................................................... 82
HDMI Setup .................................................................................................................................... 82
Before using synchronization .......................................................................................................83
About synchronized operations ...................................................................................................83
Sound Retriever Link .....................................................................................................................83
Cautions on the Control with HDMI function .............................................................................83
Control with HDMI function
82
Control with HDMI function
09
About the Control with HDMI function
Synchronized operations below with a Control with HDMI-compatible Pioneer TV or Blu-ray Disc player are pos-
sible when the component is connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable.
! The receiver’s volume can be set and the sound can be muted using the TV’s remote control.
! The receiver’s input switches over automatically when the TV’s input is changed or a Control with HDMI-
compatible component is played.
! The receiver’s power is also set to standby, when the TV’s power is set to standby.
Important
! With Pioneer devices, the Control with HDMI functions are referred to as “KURO LINK”.
! You cannot use this function with components that do not support Control with HDMI.
! We only guarantee this receiver will work with Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible components. However,
we do not guarantee that all synchronized operations will work with components that support the Control with
HDMI function.
! Use a High Speed HDMI
®
/
TM
cable when you want to use the Control with HDMI function. The Control with
HDMI function may not work properly if a different type of HDMI cable is used.
! For details about concrete operations, settings, etc., refer to also the operating instructions for each
component.
Making Control with HDMI connections
You can use synchronized operation for a connected TV and other components.
! Be sure to connect the TV’s audio cable to the audio input of this unit. When the TV and receiver are connected
by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel) function, the sound of the
TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT 1 terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this
case, set ARC at HDMI Setup to ON (see HDMI Setup on page 82 ).
For details, see Connecting your TV and playback components on page 27 or 41 .
Important
! When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch the power off and disconnect the
power cord from the wall socket. After completing all connections, connect the power cords to the wall socket.
! After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins.
You cannot carry out any operations during this process. The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks
during this process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking. When you set the Control
with HDMI to OFF, you can skip this process. For details about the Control with HDMI feature, see Control with
HDMI function on page 81 .
! To get the most out of this function, we recommend that you connect your HDMI component not to a TV but
rather directly to the HDMI terminal on this receiver.
! The Control with HDMI function can be used with a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal, but not with a
TV connected to the HDMI OUT 2 terminal.
HDMI Setup
You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as the connected Control with HDMI-compatible compo-
nents in order to make use of the Control with HDMI function. For more information see the operating instruc-
tions for each component.
1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and
then press HOME MENU.
2 Select ‘System Setup’, then press ENTER.
3 Select ‘HDMI Setup’, then press ENTER.
4 Select the ‘Control’ setting you want.
Choose whether to set this unit’s Control with HDMI function ON or OFF. You will need to set it to ON to use the
Control with HDMI function.
When using a component that does not support the Control with HDMI function, set this to OFF.
! ON – Enables the Control with HDMI function. Set Control Mode and ARC in the subsequent setting items
to the desired values.
Also, by connecting a player compatible with Sound Retriever Link to this receiver and setting ON, each func-
tion can be linked for operation. For Sound Retriever Link, see Setting the Audio options on page 85 .
! OFF – The Control with HDMI is disabled. The Control Mode and ARC functions in the subsequent setting
items cannot be used.
5 Select the ‘Control Mode’ setting you want.
Choose whether you want to enable synchronized operations.
! ON – Enabled for the synchronized operations.
! OFF – The synchronized operations disabled.
6 Select the ‘ARC’ setting you want.
When a TV supporting the HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel) function is connected to the receiver, the sound of
the TV can be input via the HDMI OUT 1 terminal.
After setting the ARC, some time may be required for the connected device to be recognized and the sound to be
produced.
! ON – The TV’s sound is input via the HDMI terminal.
! OFF – The TV’s sound is input from the Audio input terminals other than HDMI inputs.
7 Select the ‘Standby Through’ setting you want.
It is possible to transfer signals from an HDMI-connected player to the TV when this receiver’s power is on
standby.
Select the HDMI input whose HDMI signal is to be input for through transfer when in the standby mode. When
LAST is selected, the signal being input to the currently selected HDMI input is transferred. When OFF is
selected, no HDMI input is transferred through when in the standby mode. (However, when Control is set to ON,
the HDMI signal is transferred through by the Control with HDMI function even when in the standby mode.)
! When anything other than OFF is set for this setting, the receiver’s HDMI input can be switched even when
the receiver is in the standby mode. (Switch by pointing the remote control at the receiver and pressing the
HDMI, BD, DVD or SAT/CBL button.)
! Setting to anything other than OFF increases power consumption in the standby mode.
! This setting can be used even with devices that are not compatible with the Control with HDMI function.
! The Standby Through function cannot be used with MHL-compatible devices.
8 When you’re finished, press HOME MENU.
 
83
Control with HDMI function
09
Before using synchronization
Once you have finished all connections and settings, you must:
1 Put all components into standby mode.
2 Turn the power on for all components, with the power for the TV being turned on last.
3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is connected to this receiver, and see if video
output from connected components displays properly on the screen or not.
4 Check whether the components connected to all HDMI inputs are properly displayed.
About synchronized operations
Important
! Synchronized operations are enabled when Control Mode is set to ON after setting Control in HDMI Setup to
ON. For details, see HDMI Setup on page 82 .
The Control with HDMI-compatible component connected to the receiver operates in sync as described below.
! From the menu screen of the Control with HDMI-compatible TV, set audio to be played through this receiver,
and the receiver will switch to the synchronized amp mode.
! When in the synchronized amp mode, you can adjust the receiver’s volume or mute the sound using the TV’s
remote control.
! When in the synchronized amp mode, the synchronized amp mode is canceled when the receiver’s power is
turned off. To turn the synchronized amp mode back on, set audio to be played through the receiver from the
TV’s menu screen, etc. This receiver will power up and switch to the synchronized amp mode.
! When the synchronized amp mode is canceled, the receiver’s power turns off if you were viewing an HDMI
input or a TV program on the TV.
! When in the synchronized amp mode, the synchronized amp mode is canceled if an operation that produces
sound from the TV is performed from the TV’s menu screen, etc.
! When the TV’s power is set to standby, the receiver’s power is also set to standby. (Only when the input for a
component connected to the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or when watching the TV.)
! The receiver’s input switches automatically when the Control with HDMI-compatible component is played.
! The receiver’s input switches automatically when the TV’s input is switched.
! The synchronized amp mode remains in effect even if the receiver’s input is switched to a component other
than one connected by HDMI.
The operations below can also be used on Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible TVs.
! When the receiver’s volume is adjusted or the sound is muted, the volume status is displayed on the TV’s
screen.
! When the OSD language is switched on the TV, the receiver’s language setting also switches accordingly.
Sound Retriever Link
These are automatic functions allowing you to output optimum audio and video signals from the receiver using
the Control with HDMI function. When a player supporting the respective function is connected to the receiver
by HDMI, the sound/picture is optimized for the compressed audio/video file played on the player.
! Depending on the compressed audio/video file format, it may not be operated automatically.
! Also see the player’s operating instructions.
When playing a compressed audio file on the player, the file’s bitrate information is acquired using the Control
with HDMI function, and the sound is optimized on the receiver based on this information.
To activate the Sound Retriever Link function, make the setting below.
1 Set the HDMI Setup’s Control to ON, and set the Control Mode setting to ON.
See HDMI Setup on page 82 .
2 Set the S.RTRV (Auto Sound Retriever) setting to ON.
See Setting the Audio options on page 85 .
Cautions on the Control with HDMI function
! Connect the TV directly to this receiver. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter
(such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.
! Only connect components (Blu-ray Disc player, etc.) you intend to use as a source to the HDMI input of this
receiver. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can
cause operational errors.
! When the receiver’s Control is turned ON, even if the receiver’s power is in the standby mode, it is possible
to output the audio and video signals from a player via HDMI to the TV without producing sound from the
receiver, but only when a Control with HDMI-compatible component (Blu-ray Disc player, etc.) and compatible
TV are connected. In this case, the receiver’s power turns on and the power and HDMI indicators light.
! If the Control setting is not set to OFF, the power consumption during standby will increase.
 
84
 
Setting the Audio options ............................................................................................................85
Setting the Video options ............................................................................................................. 87
Switching the output (OUTPUT PARAMETER) ............................................................................88
HDMI 4K/60p signal output setting .............................................................................................88
Changing the channel level while listening ................................................................................89
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls ................................................................................................... 89
Network settings from a web browser .......................................................................................89
Using the sleep timer ....................................................................................................................90
Dimming the display .....................................................................................................................90
Checking your system settings .....................................................................................................90
Resetting the system ..................................................................................................................... 91
Using other functions
85
Using other functions
10
Setting the Audio options
There are a number of additional sound settings you can make using the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. The
defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.
Important
! Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the current
source, settings and status of the receiver.
1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and
then press AUDIO P..
2 Use i/j to select the setting you want to adjust.
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the
table below for notes on this.
3 Use k/l to set as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for each setting.
4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.
Audio parameter menu
Setting What it does Option(s)
MCACC
(MCACC preset)
Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory when multiple preset
memories are saved. When an MCACC preset memory has been
renamed, the given name is displayed.
c M1. MEMORY 1 to
M6. MEMORY 6 d
Default:
M1. MEMORY 1
EQ
(Acoustic Calibration EQ)
Switches on/off the effects of EQ Pro.
ON
OFF
S-WAVE
(Standing Wave)
Switches on/off the effects of Standing Wave Control.
ON
OFF
PHASE
(Phase Control)
Switches on/off the effects of Phase Control (page 73 ).
It is automatically set to FULLBND when Full Band Phase Control
measurement is performed (page 74 ). You cannot select FULLBND
before the measurement.
FULLBND
<d>
ON
OFF
PHASE C+
(Phase Control Plus)
<a>
For discs created with standards other than Phase Control, the LFE
channel is delayed upon recording in the first place. This function
corrects for phase shifting on such discs.
This function is particularly effective when playing multi-channel
music containing low frequency effects (LFE).
When AUTO is selected, not only the low range delay but also the
polarity and correlation are detected to achieve the optimum effect.
c AUTO/0 to 16 (ms) d
Default: AUTO
DELAY
(Sound Delay)
Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video, so the
soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the picture. By adding a
bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to match the presentation of
the video.
c 0 to 800 (ms) d
Default: 0
TONE
(Tone Control)
Applies the treble and bass tone controls to a source, or bypasses
them completely.
VSX-830 only: This setting is only displayed when the listening mode is
STEREO, Auto surround (STEREO) or SOUND RETRIEVER AIR.
BYPASS
ON
Setting What it does Option(s)
BASS
<b>
Adjusts the amount of bass.
c –6 to +6 (dB) d
Default: 0 (dB)
TREBLE
<b>
Adjusts the amount of treble.
c –6 to +6 (dB) d
Default: 0 (dB)
S.RTRV
(Auto Sound Retriever)
<c>
With the Auto Sound Retriever function, DSP processing is used to
compensate for the loss of audio data upon compression, improving
the sound’s sense of density and modulation.
Also, when a player supporting the Sound Retriever Link function is
connected to the receiver by HDMI, by setting this to ON, the bitrate
information of the compressed audio file being played on the player
is acquired using the Control with HDMI function, and the sound is
optimized based on this information (Sound Retriever Link).
OFF
ON
DNR
(Digital Noise Reduction)
May improve the quality of sound in a noisy source (for example, video
tape with lots of background noise) when switched on.
This only has an effect with 2-channel signal inputs.
This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48
kHz or less.
OFF
ON
DIALOG E
(Dialog Enhancement)
Localizes dialog in the center channel to make it stand out from other
background sounds in a TV or movie soundtrack.
c OFF/FLAT d
Default: OFF
Hi-bit24
<d>
<e>
Creates a wider dynamic range with digital sources like CDs, DVDs or
BDs. 16- and 20-bit PCM as well as compressed audio is requantized
to 24 bits, more subtle musical expression.
This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48
kHz or less.
ON
OFF
DUAL
(Dual Mono)
Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital soundtracks should
be played. Dual mono is not widely used, but is sometimes necessary
when two languages need to be sent to separate channels.
CH1 – Channel 1 is
heard only
CH2 – Channel 2 is
heard only
CH1 CH2 – Both chan-
nels heard from front
speakers
SIGSEL
(Signal Select)
Use to switch the input signal type (analog/digital/HDMI) (page 73 ).
AUTO
ANALOG
DIGITAL
<f>
HDMI
Fixed PCM
This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before OFF recognizes
the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.
When ON is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-
PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.
OFF
ON
DRC
(Dynamic Range Control)
<g>
Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie soundtracks optimized
for Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD and
DTS-HD Master Audio (you may need to use this feature when listen-
ing to surround sound at low volumes).
AUTO
MAX
MID
OFF
Loud Mgmt
(Loudness Management)
This is a setting of the post process function of the Dolby TrueHD
decoder. By setting to OFF, you can enjoy higher sound quality.
This can only be set when DRC is set to OFF and the input signal is a
Dolby TrueHD signal.
ON
OFF
 
86
Using other functions
10
Setting What it does Option(s)
LFE
(LFE Attenuate)
Some audio sources include ultra-low bass tones. Set the LFE attenu-
ator as necessary to prevent the ultra-low bass tones from distorting
the sound from the speakers.
When set to the recommended value of 0 dB, the LFE is not restricted.
When set to a value other than 0 dB, the LFE is restricted to the set
value. When OFF is selected, the sound is not output from the LFE
channel.
c OFF/ –20dB/ –15dB/
–10dB/ –5dB/ –4dB/
–3dB/ –2dB/ –1dB/
0dB d
Default: 0dB
INPUT ATT
(Input attenuate)
<h>
If the sound is distorted, this can be used to lower the input signal
level and reduce the distortion.
OFF
ON
HDMI
(HDMI Audio)
<i>
Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this receiver
(amp) or through to a TV. When THROUGH is selected, no sound is
output from this receiver.
AMP
THROUGH
A.DELAY
(Auto delay)
<j>
This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video delay between
components connected with an HDMI cable. The audio delay time
is set depending on the operational status of the display connected
with an HDMI cable. The video delay time is automatically adjusted
according to the audio delay time.
OFF
ON
C.WIDTH
(Center Width)
(Applicable only when using a
center speaker)
<k>
Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center
channel between the front right and left speakers, making it sound
wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings).
c 0 to 7 d
Default: 3
DIMENSION
<k>
Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back,
making the sound more distant (minus settings), or more forward
(positive settings).
c –3 to +3 d
Default: 0
PANORAMA
<k>
Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a
‘wraparound’ effect.
OFF
ON
C.IMAGE
(Center Image)
(Applicable only when using a
center speaker)
<l>
Adjusts the center image to create a wider stereo effect with vocals.
Adjust the effect from 0 (all center channel sent to front right and left
speakers) to 10 (center channel sent to the center speaker only).
c 0 to 10 d
Defaults:
Neo:6 CINEMA: 10
Neo:6 MUSIC: 3
EFFECT
Sets the effect level for the ALC mode.
c 10 to 90 d
Defaults: 50
C.SPREAD
(Center Spread)
<d>
<m>
Center spread expands the center channel signal to the left and right
front speakers to create a wider frontal audio image for the listener.
It is optimized and designed primarily for playback of stereo music
content.
ON
OFF
V.SPs
(Virtual Speakers)
When AUTO is selected, the sound field is created with the surround
back and front wide channels whose Speaker Setting is set to NO
automatically complemented.
To set the respective channels individually, select MANUAL.
AUTO
MANUAL
V.SB
(Virtual Surround Back)
<n>
When you’re not using surround back speakers, selecting this mode
allows you to hear a virtual surround back channel through your sur-
round speakers. You can choose to listen to sources with no surround
back channel information.
OFF
ON
V.HEIGHT
(Virtual Height)
<o>
Settings to create virtual front height channel audio.
OFF
ON
Setting What it does Option(s)
V.WIDE
(Virtual Wide)
<p>
When you’re not using front wide speakers, selecting this mode
allows you to hear a virtual front wide channel through your front
speakers.
This improves the continuity of the sound from the front channel to
the surround channels.
OFF
ON
RENDER
(Rendering Mode)
<d>
<q>
Allows you to choose which signal, object base (OBJECT) or channel
base (LEGACY) to decode when playing back Dolby Atmos content.
OBJECT
LEGACY
a There are disks that cannot be adjusted using AUTO. When ‘---’ is displayed on the front panel display, please adjust manually.
b The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON.
c ! The default value changes depending on the type of input (page 91 ).
! When ON is selected, the Sound Retriever effect is optimized based on the bitrate information of the contents input to the
USB memory audio and INTERNET RADIO, PANDORA, Spotify, MEDIA SERVER, FAVORITES (digital audio input only) to
achieve high sound quality.
! With the iPod/USB, INTERNET RADIO, PANDORA, Spotify, MEDIA SERVER, FAVORITES or BT AUDIO input function, by
default S.RTRV is set to ON.
! When ON is selected, optimum correction of the audio signals input via the HDMI OUT terminal is conducted with the HDMI
ARC (Audio Return Channel) function, and the sound of digital TV broadcasts is produced with HD quality. This is valid when
the input is set to TV and ARC in HDMI Setup is set to ON. (See HDMI Setup on page 82 .)
d Excluding VSX-830
e This function does not work when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz.
f On the front panel display, ‘DIGITL’ is displayed.
g AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby TrueHD.
h ! The attenuator isn’t available when using the Stream Direct (ANALOG DIRECT) modes.
! The attenuator does not function when the listening mode is set to PURE DIRECT with AirPlay.
i ! The HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing synchronized amp mode operations.
! The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play the receiver’s HDMI audio and video input signals from the TV
with the receiver’s power in the standby mode. See About synchronized operations on page 83 .
! VSX-830 only: Even if the THROUGH settings are made, DSD signals cannot be output.
j This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio/video synchronizing capability (‘lipsync’)
for HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A.DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay time manually. For
more details about the lipsync feature of your display, contact the manufacturer directly.
k ! VSX-830 only.
! Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.
l Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 MUSIC/CINEMA mode.
m The default value changes depending on the type of input (page 91 ).
n ! This can be set when MANUAL is selected for V.SPs.
! You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo,
Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.
! Excluding VSX-830: You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is
set to NO or if Front Bi-Amp or HDZONE is selected at Speaker System. It can also be used when Speaker B is selected at
Speaker System and SP:dA+B ON is selected with the OUT P. button.
! VSX-830 only: This setting is available when the surround speaker is on, and Speaker System is 5.2ch.
! This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less.
o ! This can be set when MANUAL is selected for V.SPs.
! You can’t use the Virtual Height mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo, Front
Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.
! Excluding VSX-830: You can only use the Virtual Height mode if the surround speakers are on.
! VSX-830 only: This setting is available when the surround speaker is on, and Speaker System is 5.2ch.
! This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less.
 
87
Using other functions
10
p ! This can be set when MANUAL is selected for V.SPs.
! You can’t use the Virtual Wide mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo, Front
Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.
! Excluding VSX-830: You can only use the Virtual Wide mode if the surround speakers are on and the FW setting is set to NO. It
can also not be used when playing signals containing actual front wide channel information.
! VSX-830 only: This setting is available when the surround speaker is on, and Speaker System is 5.2ch.
! This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less.
q When neither the top middle, surround back, or front wide speaker is connected, Dolby Atmos does not play.
Setting the Video options
Resolution can be set here. Select the settings according to your preference.
Important
! Note that if an option cannot be selected on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the current
source, setting and status of the receiver.
! All of the setting items can be set for each input function.
However, with the audio only input function, VIDEO PARAMETER cannot be set.
! Excluding VSX-830: When MAIN/HDZONE is set to HDZONE, the VIDEO PARAMETER menu setting only
affects the HDMI OUT 1 terminal signal.
1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and
then press VIDEO P..
2 Use i/j to select the setting you want to adjust.
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the
table below for notes on this.
3 Use k/l to set as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for each setting.
4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.
Video parameter menu
Setting What it does Option(s)
SCAL
(Scaling)
<a>
1080p HDMI input video is up scaled to 4K and output.
AUTO
PURE
SUPER RES
(Super resolution)
<b>
Detailed feel of materials and accurate outlines are reproduced.
Setting is made by selecting one of 0 (Off), +1, +2 or +3 and sharper
images are delivered with greater values.
0
+3
(The image is only an example for checking the effect.)
0
+1
+2
+3
a ! Video may not be output properly depending on the HDMI cable that is upscaling to 4K. In that case, switch to PURE.
! When setting the AUTO when connected to a television that is 4K compatible, 1080p/60 is up-scaled to 4K/60p and 1080p/24
is up-scaled to 4K/24p. Input video other than HDMI is output as the input resolution. Also, when selecting PURE, the input reso-
lution is output as is (About the video converter on page 26 ).
! When PURE is selected and the input signal is 480i, the on-screen display cannot be displayed.
b You can perform this setting only when AUTO is selected with SCAL. This is effective when up-scaling 1080p to 4K.
 
88
Using other functions
10
Switching the output (OUTPUT PARAMETER)
You can press OUT P. to switch the output of speaker terminals or HDMI terminals to be played.
Switching the speaker terminals
In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930
If you selected 7.2ch/5.2.2ch, 7.2ch SB/FW or Speaker B at Speaker system setting on page 106 , you can
switch between speakers using the OUT P. button.
If you selected Front Bi-Amp or HDZONE, the button will simply switch your main speaker terminals on or off.
1 Press OUT P..
! You can perform the same operation by pressing SPEAKERS on the front panel.
2 Use i/j to select ‘SP’.
3 Use k/l to switch the speaker terminals to be played.
As mentioned above, if you have selected Front Bi-Amp or HDZONE, the button will simply switch your main
speaker terminal (A) on or off.
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker terminal option:
When you select 7.2ch/5.2.2ch, you can select from:
! SP: SB/TMd ON – Surround back or top middle channels are added to the front, center and surround chan-
nels (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output. The surround back and top middle
channels are switched automatically according to the audio input signal.
! SP: SB ON – Surround back channels are added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5
channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.
! SP: TMd ON – Top middle channels are added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 chan-
nels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.
! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the speakers.
When you select 7.2ch SB/FW, you can select from:
! SP: SB/FW ON – Surround back or front wide channels are added to the front, center and surround channels
(maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output. The surround back and front wide channels
are switched automatically according to the audio input signal.
! SP: SB ON – Surround back channels are added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5
channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.
! SP: FW ON – Front wide channels are added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 chan-
nels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.
! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the speakers.
When you select Speaker B, you can select from:
! SP: A ON – Sound is output from the A-speaker terminals (up to 7 channels (including surround back chan-
nels), depending on the source).
! SP: B ON – Sound is output from the two speakers connected to the B-speaker terminals. Multichannel
sources will not be heard.
! SP: A+B ON – Sound is output from the A-speaker terminals (up to 5 channels, depending on the source), the
two speakers connected to the B-speaker terminals, and the subwoofer. The sound from the B-speaker termi-
nals will be the same as the sound from the A-speaker terminals (multichannel sources will be downmixed to
2 channels).
! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the speakers.
Notes
! The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 106 . However, if
SP: B ON is selected above, no sound is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).
! All speaker systems (except Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.
In case of VSX-830
% Press SP-A/B.
Switches the speaker play on/off.
! You can perform the same operation by pressing SPEAKERS on the front panel.
Switching the HDMI output
Excluding VSX-830
Set which terminal to use when outputting video and audio signals from the HDMI output terminals.
The HDMI OUT 1 terminal is compatible with the Control with HDMI function.
1 Press OUT P..
2 Use i/j to select ‘OUT 1/2’.
3 Use k/l to select the output settings for the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 terminals.
Please wait a while when Please wait ... is displayed.
The output switches among OUT 1+2, OUT 1, OUT 2 and OFF each time the button is pressed.
! The synchronized amp mode is canceled when the HDMI output is switched. If you wish to use the synchro-
nized amp mode, switch to OUT 1, then select the synchronized amp mode on the TV using the TV’s remote
control.
! When MAIN/HDZONE is set to HDZONE, it is not possible to switch to OUT 2 (page 111 ).
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
HDMI 4K/60p signal output setting
If the TV to be connected using HDMI supports 4K/60p, you can switch the 4K/60p signal output setting in accor-
dance with TV performance.
Operation is performed on the front panel of the unit. You cannot perform the setting if the multizone function is
not set to MULTI ZONE OFF (page 89 ).
1 Switch the receiver into standby.
2 While holding down ENTER on the front panel, press u STANDBY/ON.
The display shows RESET c NO d.
3 Select an input terminal that you wish to change settings using i/j.
! 4K/60pBD – Sets the signal for the BD IN terminal.
! 4K/60pH1 – Sets the signal for the HDMI IN 1 terminal.
! 4K/60pH2 – Sets the signal for the HDMI IN 2 terminal.
4 Use k/l to select the signal to set.
! 4:4:4 – Select this setting when connecting to a 4K/60p 4:4:4 24 bit compatible TV using HDMI. More high
quality video images can be enjoyed.
When the HDMI cable does not support 4K/60p 4:4:4 24 bit (18 Gbps transmission), video image may not
be output properly. In that case, select 4:2:0 to watch a 4K/60p 4:2:0 24 bit video image.
! 4:2:0 – Select this setting when connecting to a 4K/60p 4:2:0 24 bit compatible TV using HDMI.
5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
6 Press u STANDBY/ON to switch on the receiver and your TV.
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.
 
89
Using other functions
10
Changing the channel level while listening
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the overall balance of your speaker system, an important factor
when setting up a home theater system.
1 Press CH LV..
2 Use i/j to select the channel you wish to adjust.
3 Adjust the volume using k/l.
The volume can be adjusted in the range of -12.0dB to +12.0dB, 0.5 dB steps.
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
Input Volume Absorber
This can be used to correct for the difference in volume between input sources.
1 Switch to the input whose volume you want to adjust.
2 Press CH LV..
3 Use i/j to select ‘ALL’.
4 Adjust the volume using k/l.
The volume can be adjusted in the range of -12.0dB to +12.0dB, 0.5 dB steps.
5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls
Excluding VSX-830
The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust the sub zone volume and select sources. See HDZONE
remote controls on page 89 .
Important
! The settings must be changed at ZONE Setup in order to use the multi-zone function (page 111 ).
1 Press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel.
The zone switches between on and off each time the button is pressed.
The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the MULTI-ZONE control has been switched ON.
2 Press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.
Each press will switch between main zone and sub zone control.
! When the receiver is on, make sure that any operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE and your
selected sub zone(s) show in the display. If this is not showing, the front panel controls affect the main zone
only.
If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) continue to show
in the display.
3 Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source for the zone you have selected.
For example, HDZONE SAT/CBL sends the source connected to the SAT/CBL inputs to the primary (HDZONE)
sub room.
! If you select TUNER, you can use the tuner controls to select a preset station (see Saving station presets on
page 66 if you’re unsure how to do this). The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time.
Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other zone. Please be careful not
to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.
4 Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the volume for the sub zone.
5 When you’re finished, press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL again to return to the main zone
controls.
You can also press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel to switch off all output to the sub zone.
! You won’t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control
first.
! If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for a while, turn off the power in both the sub and main
rooms so that this receiver is in standby.
Note
When HDZONE is turned on, the video converter function is disabled. For that reason, video connected with the
video cable or component cable is not output from the HDMI terminal. To enable the video converter function,
turn off HDZONE.
HDZONE remote controls
Before operation, hold down HDZ on the remote control (for 1.5 seconds) until the remote control LED flashes
one time.
The following table shows the possible HDZONE remote controls:
Button(s) What it does
u
Switches on/off power in the HDZONE.
ALL
Use to select the input function in the HDZONE.
Input function buttons
Use to select the input function directly (this may not work for some functions) in the
HDZONE.
VOLUME +/
<a>
Use to set the listening volume in the HDZONE.
MUTE
<a>
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also
restores the sound).
a You can operate this only when Speaker System is set to HDZONE.
Network settings from a web browser
Network settings and Pandora account settings can be made using the browser on a computer connected to the
same LAN as the receiver.
1 Press u STANDBY/ON to switch on the receiver.
2 Turn on the computer’s power and launch the Internet browser.
3 Input the receiver’s IP address into the browser’s address input field.
Access the IP address“http://(the receiver’s IP address)” from a web browser. You can display the IP address of
the unit on the unit’s display by pressing the STATUS button on the remote control.
When connected with the receiver, the AVNavigator menu screen appears in the browser.
4 On the AVNavigator menu screen, select Network Setup.
5 Select the item you want to set.
 
90
Using other functions
10
Using the sleep timer
The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without
worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use the remote control to set the sleep timer.
% Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the sleep time.
30 min 60 min
Off 90 min
! You can check the remaining sleep time at any time by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will cycle
through the sleep options again.
! The sleep timer is valid for all zones. If any zone is on, the sleep timer continues functioning.
Dimming the display
You can choose between four brightness levels for the front panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the
display automatically brightens for a few seconds.
Turning off the display is effective for suppressing noise from the display that affects sound quality.
% Press DIMMER repeatedly to change the brightness of the front panel display.
! You can also choose to turn the display off. In this case, the FL OFF indicator lights.
Checking your system settings
Use the status display screen to check your current settings for features such as surround back channel process-
ing and your current MCACC preset.
1 Press STATUS.
2 Use i/j to check the system setting.
The information on the main unit display switches as shown below each time one of the buttons is pressed.
IP address f Wi-Fi status (displayed only when using Wi-Fi) f audio format f sampling frequency f
MCACC memory f Auto phase control plus correction result f Play input source using HDZONE (excluding
VSX-830) f HDMI output settings (excluding VSX-830)
! For some settings, some items are not displayed.
! When the auto phase control plus correction value displays ‘---’, disks cannot be adjusted using AUTO.
Please adjust manually (page 85 ).
3 When you’re finished, press STATUS again to switch off the display.
 
91
Using other functions
10
Resetting the system
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this.
Set MULTI-ZONE to MULTI ZONE OFF.
! Disconnect the iPod and USB memory device from the receiver beforehand.
! Set the Control with HDMI to OFF (see HDMI Setup on page 82 ).
1 Switch the receiver into standby.
2 While holding down ENTER on the front panel, press u STANDBY/ON.
The display shows RESET c NO d.
3 Select ‘RESET’ using PRESET k/l, then press ENTER on the front panel.
The display shows RESET? OK.
4 Press ENTER to confirm.
OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver has been reset to the factory default settings.
! Note that all settings will be saved, even if the receiver is unplugged.
Default system settings
Setting Default
SPEAKERS SB/TMd ON<a>/ON<b>
Speaker System 7.2ch/5.2.2ch<a>/5.2ch<b>
Speaker Setting
Front
SMALL
Center
SMALL
TMd
<a>
SMALL
FW
<a>
SMALL
Surr
SMALL
SB
<a>
SMALLx2
SW
YES
Surround Position
<a>
ON SIDE
Crossover
80Hz
X-Curve
OFF
DIMMER Medium bright
Inputs
See Input function default and possible settings on page 59 .
Input Volume Absorber All Inputs
0dB
HDMI
HDMI Audio
AMP
Control
OFF
Control Mode --- (OFF)
ARC (Audio Return Channel) --- (OFF)
Standby Through
OFF
4K/60pBD
4:2:0
4K/60pH1 (HDMI IN 1)
4:2:0
Setting Default
4K/60pH2 (HDMI IN 2)
4:2:0
DSP
Power On Level
LAST
Volume Limit
OFF
Mute Level
FULL
Phase Control
ON
Auto Sound Retriever
OFF
Sound Delay 0 ms
Dual Mono
CH1
DRC
OFF
LFE Attenuate
0dB
Auto delay
OFF
Digital Safety
OFF
Effect Level ALC (Auto Level Control)
50
Center Spread
<a>
OFF
PL II Music Options
<b>
Center Width
3
Dimension
0
Panorama
OFF
Neo:6 Options Center Image
Neo:6 CINEMA: 10
Neo:6 MUSIC: 3
All Inputs
Listening Mode (2 ch/multi ch)
AUTO SURROUND
Listening Mode (Headphones)
STEREO
See also Setting the Audio options on page 85 for other default DSP settings.
MCACC
MCACC Position Memory
M1. MEMORY 1
Channel Level (M1 to M6) 0.0 dB
Speaker Distance (M1 to M6) 3.00 m
Standing Wave (M1 to M6)
ATT of all channels/filters 0.0 dB
SWch Wide Trim 0.0 dB
EQ Data (M1 to M6)
All channels/bands 0.0 dB
EQ Wide Trim 0.0 dB
Network
Network Standby
ON
DHCP
ON
a Excluding VSX-830
b VSX-830 only.
 
92
 
About the Remote Setup menu ....................................................................................................93
Operating multiple receivers ........................................................................................................ 93
Setting the remote to control other components.......................................................................93
Selecting preset codes directly ..................................................................................................... 93
Programming signals from other remote controls .....................................................................94
Erasing one of the remote control button settings .................................................................... 94
Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function ..........................................................95
Using All Zone Standby .................................................................................................................95
Setting the switching time for the receiver operation mode ....................................................95
Resetting the remote control settings ......................................................................................... 95
Controlling components ...............................................................................................................96
Operation of other devices by remote control
(excluding VSX-830)
93
Operation of other devices by remote control (excluding VSX-830)
11
About the Remote Setup menu
The Remote Setup mode is set by pressing the number button while pressing RCU SETUP. The different items
on the Remote Setup menu are described below. For their setting procedures, refer to the explanations for the
respective items.
Setting What it does
Change RC
mode
If you have multiple Pioneer receivers, amplifiers, etc., this setting can be used to prevent other units from
operating simultaneously when the remote control unit is operated. See Operating multiple receivers on
page 93 .
Preset recall
Preset codes can be set for the various input functions. The remote control codes of a number of other
devices (including products of other brands) are preset in the remote control to allow these devices to be
operated. See Selecting preset codes directly on page 93 .
Code learning
If the desired operations cannot be performed even though you have set the preset codes, the remote control
signals of other devices can be learned directly. See Programming signals from other remote controls on
page 94 .
Erase learning
This function is used to erase remote control codes that have been learned. Codes learned for the different
input functions can be erased individually. See Erasing one of the remote control button settings on page
94 .
Reset function
This is a function for resetting preset codes that have been set. Key resetting can be done for individual input
functions. See Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function on page 95 .
Operation
mode switching
time
You can set to automatically switch to AV amplifier operation mode when a certain period of time elapses
after remote operation of each input function is finished. See Setting the switching time for the receiver
operation mode on page 95 .
All reset
This is a function for resetting all remote control unit settings you have made to the defaults set upon ship-
ment from the factory. See Resetting the remote control settings on page 95 .
Notes
! You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing RCU SETUP.
! After one minute of inactivity, the remote automatically exits the operation.
Operating multiple receivers
Up to four receivers can be operated discretely using this receiver’s remote control when using multiple receiv-
ers, provided they are of the same model as this receiver. The receiver to be operated is switched by inputting the
preset code to set the remote control setting.
! Set the remote modes on the receivers before using this function (see Remote Control Mode Setup on page
110 ).
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘4’ for three seconds.
Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.
! To cancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP.
2 Press the number button for the receiver (“Receiver 1” to “Receiver 4”) you wish to
operate.
For example, to operate “Receiver 2”, press ‘2’.
If the LED lights for one second, the setting has been successfully completed.
When the preset code is input, the LED flashes three times to indicate that the setting has failed.
Setting the remote to control other components
Most components can be assigned to one of the input function buttons (such as DVD or CD) using the compo-
nent’s manufacturer preset code stored in the remote.
However, there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset
code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote control will not work for the model that you are using.
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control, you can still teach the remote
individual commands from another remote control (see Programming signals from other remote controls on
page 94 ).
! With the TV buttons, the TV can be operated regardless of the input set for the remote control’s operation
mode. When using one TV set, we recommend assigning the same TV’s preset codes to the TV INPUT button
and the TV button. When using two TV sets, for better convenience assign the TV connected to the MONITOR
OUT terminals to the TV INPUT button, the other TV to the TV button.
! Devices may be assigned to the following input function buttons.
SOURCE CONTROL
STANDBY/ON
DVDBD SAT
HDMI
TV CD
INPUT
ALL
Selecting preset codes directly
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘1’ for three seconds.
Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.
! To cancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP.
2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control.
To assign the preset codes of the TV to be operated with the TV function, press the TV INPUT button.
The LED of the remote control lights.
3 Use the number buttons to enter the 4-digit preset code.
See Preset code list on page 137 .
If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash, the setting has been successfully completed.
When the preset code is fully input, the LED flashes three times to indicate that the setting has failed. If this hap-
pens, enter the 4-digit preset code again.
4 Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the other components you want to control.
To try out the remote control, switch the component on or off (into standby) by pressing u SOURCE. If it doesn’t
seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there is one).
5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the preset setup mode.
 
94
Operation of other devices by remote control (excluding VSX-830)
11
Programming signals from other remote controls
If the preset code for your component is not available, or the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you
can program signals from the remote control of another component. This can also be used to program additional
operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after assigning a preset code.
The remote can store about 120 preset codes from other components (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer
format only).
Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be learned from other remote controls. The buttons available
are shown below:
STANDBY/ON
ENTER
SOURCE
INPUT
TV VOL
RECEIVER
ENTER
CLR
CH
CH
2
546
8
0
79
13
Fav
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘2’ for three seconds.
Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.
! To “learn” codes at the TV buttons, proceed to step 3.
! To cancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP.
2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control.
The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.
3 Point the two remote controls towards each other, then press the button that will be
doing the learning on this receiver’s remote control.
The LED flashes once, then stops flashing, remaining lit.
! The remote controls should be 3 cm apart.
3 cm
This receiver’s
remote control
Other remote
control
4 Press the corresponding button on the other remote control that is sending (teaching) the
signal to this receiver’s remote control.
If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash, the setting has been successfully completed.
! If the LED flashes for five seconds, it means the memory is full. See Erasing all learnt settings that are in one
input function on page 95 to erase a programmed button you’re not using to free up more memory (note
that some signals may take more memory than others).
! Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the
wrong signal.
! Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to
be moved closer together or farther apart.
5 To program additional signals for the current component repeat steps 3 and 4.
To program signals for another component, exit and repeat steps 2 through 4.
6 Press RCU SETUP to exit the programming mode.
Erasing one of the remote control button settings
This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and restores the button to the factory default.
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘8’ for three seconds.
Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.
! To erase operations registered at the TV buttons, proceed to step 3.
! To cancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP.
2 Press the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased.
The LED flashes once.
3 Press and hold the button to be erased for three seconds.
If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.
4 Repeat step 3 to erase other buttons.
5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the erasing mode.
 
95
Operation of other devices by remote control (excluding VSX-830)
11
Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function
This operation erases all the operational settings of other devices that have been programmed in one input func-
tion, and restores the factory default.
This function is handy for erasing all data programmed for devices no longer being used.
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘9’ for three seconds.
Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.
! To cancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP.
2 Press and hold the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased for
three seconds.
To erase the operations registered at all the TV buttons, press the TV INPUT button for 3 seconds.
If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.
Using All Zone Standby
The All Zone Standby can be used to turn all zones to OFF when the receiver’s power is switched to standby.
Also, when using separate Pioneer amplifiers/receivers for the sub zones, they can also be set to standby
simultaneously.
! In order to set the power of amplifiers/receivers connected to sub zones to the standby mode, the connected
amplifiers/receivers must be installed or connected in such a way that they can receive remote control signals.
! The power of the amplifiers/receivers can be switched to standby with this operation even when using multiple
Pioneer amplifiers/receivers and their Remote Control Mode have been changed.
1 Press ALL ZONE STBY.
The LED continues to flash.
2 Press u STANDBY/ON.
The receiver’s power switches to standby and all zones are turned off.
Setting the switching time for the receiver operation mode
! Default setting: The AV amplifier operation mode is not switched automatically.
After pressing SOURCE CONTROL to operate another device, you need to press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the
mode to receiver operation mode to operate this unit.
You can set to automatically switch to AV amplifier operation mode when a certain period of time elapses after
remote operation of each input function is finished. See Setting the switching time for the receiver operation
mode on page 95 .
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘5’ for three seconds.
The LED flashes once.
2 Press the number buttons of the time you wish to set.
! 1 – The mode is not automatically switched to AV amplifier operation mode.
! 2 – Switches in five minute.
! 3 – Switches in three minute.
! 4 – Switches in one minute.
! 5 – Switches in 30 seconds.
3 Press RCU SETUP to exit the setup.
Resetting the remote control settings
Use this procedure to reset all the remote control’s settings to the factory default.
! When preset codes are set, all the signals learned in the input function buttons are cleared. This function is
convenient when you want to reset some but not all of input function buttons.
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘0’ for three seconds.
Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.
2 Hold down the ENTER button for five seconds.
If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.
Default preset codes
Input function button Preset code
BD
2255
DVD
2197
HDMI
2144
TV
0305
CD
5000
SAT/CBL
6329
TV (INPUT) 0305
ALL
2034
 
96
Operation of other devices by remote control (excluding VSX-830)
11
Controlling components
This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes (see Setting the remote to control
other components on page 93 for more on this). Use the input function buttons to select the component.
TOP
MENU
RETURN
RECEIVER
STANDBY/ON
ENTER
TOOLS
MENU
SOURCE
INPUT
TV VOL
HOME
MENU
ENTER
CLR
CH
CH
2
546
8
0
79
13
AUDIO
DISP
TV and Audio/Video components
Button(s) TV TV (Monitor) BD/DVD
HDD/BDR/
DVR
VCR SAT/CATV
u SOURCE
POWER ON/
OFF
POWER ON/
OFF
POWER ON/
OFF
POWER ON/
OFF
POWER ON/
OFF
POWER ON/
OFF
Number buttons numerics numerics numerics numerics numerics numerics
CLR
! (dot)
KURO LINK CLEAR +
*
ENTER (CLASS) CH ENTER CH ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER
EXIT/INFO EXIT TOP MENU TOP MENU LIST
TOOLS/GUIDE/
EPG
USER MENU
TOOLS
<a>
GUIDE GUIDE
i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l
i/j/k/l
ENTER
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER
HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU
RETURN RETURN RETURN RETURN RETURN
d
d d d d
e
AUTO SETUP
e e e e
g
FREEZE
g g g g
m
m m m m
n
n n n n
o
TV/DTV AV SELECTION
o o
o
p
SCREEN SIZE
p p
p
AUDIO
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
DISP
DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY/INFO
CH +/–
CH +/– CH +/–
Subtitle (CH +)
Popup menu
(CH –)
<a>
Subtitle (CH +)
or CH +/–
CH +/– CH +/–
a Controls for BD.
 
97
Operation of other devices by remote control (excluding VSX-830)
11
Audio/Video components
Button(s) LD CD/CD-R/SACD MD/DAT TAPE
u SOURCE
POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF
Number buttons numerics numerics numerics
CLR +10 >10/CLEAR
CLEAR
<a>
CLEAR
ENTER (CLASS) ENTER DISC/ENTER
OPEN/CLOSE
<a>
ENTER
TOP MENU
MSc
LEGATO LINK
<b>
MSd
i/j/k/l i/j/k/l
e/g/m/n
ENTER
ENTER
SACD SETUP
<b>
RETURN
d d d d d
e e e e e
g g g g g
m m m m m
n n n n n
o o o o o
p p p p p
AUDIO
AUDIO
PURE AUDIO
<b>
DISP
DISPLAY/INFO
TIME
<b>
a Controls for MD.
b Controls for SACD.
TV (Projector)
Button(s) TV (Projector)
u SOURCE
POWER ON
1
MOVIE
2
STANDARD
3
DYNAMIC
4
USER1
5
USER2
6
USER3
7
COLOR+
8
SHARP+
9
GAMMA
0
COLOR–
CLR SHARP–
ENTER (CLASS) COLOR TEMP
EXIT
INFO
i/j/k/l i/j/k/l
ENTER
ENTER
TEST
HIDE
MENU
m
HDMI1
d
HDMI2
n
COMP.
o
VIDEO
e
S-VIDEO
g
BRIGHT–
p
BRIGHT+
AUDIO
POWER OFF
DISP
ASPECT
CH +/–
CONTRAST+/–
 
98
 
Making receiver settings from the MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/
Advanced MCACC (VSX-830) menu ............................................................................................................. 99
Automatic MCACC (Expert)...........................................................................................................99
Manual MCACC setup .................................................................................................................101
Checking MCACC Data ................................................................................................................103
Data Management .......................................................................................................................104
The MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/
Advanced MCACC (VSX-830) menu
99
The MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/Advanced MCACC (VSX-830) menu
12
Making receiver settings from the MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-
930)/Advanced MCACC (VSX-830) menu
The MCACC PRO/Advanced MCACC (Multi Channel ACoustic Calibration) system was developed in Pioneer’s
laboratories with the aim of making it possible for home users to perform adjustments of the same level as in a
studio easily and with high precision. The acoustic characteristics of the listening environment are measured and
the frequency response is calibrated accordingly to allow high precision, automatic analysis and optimal calibra-
tion of the sound field to bring it closer to a studio environment than ever before. Furthermore, while it was previ-
ously difficult to eliminate standing waves, this receiver is equipped with a standing wave control function using
a unique process to perform acoustic analysis and reduce their influence.
This section describes how to calibrate the sound field automatically and fine-adjust the sound field data
manually.
1 Press u STANDBY/ON to switch on the receiver and your TV.
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.
2 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and
then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.
! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the HOME MENU.
3 Select ‘MCACC PRO’ (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/‘Advanced MCACC’ (VSX-830) from the
HOME MENU, then press ENTER.
4 Select the setting you want to adjust.
! Full Auto MCACC – See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 57
for a quick and effective automatic surround setup.
! Auto MCACC – See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 99 for a more detailed MCACC setup.
! Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker settings and customizes the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see Manual
MCACC setup on page 101 ).
! MCACC Data Check – This displays the Advanced MCACC measurement results. Use it to check the MCACC
memory. For details, see Checking MCACC Data on page 103 .
! Data Management – Use this to manage the data in the MCACC memory. For details, see Data Management
on page 104 .
! Demo – No settings are saved and no errors occur. When the speakers are connected to this receiver, the
test tone is output repeatedly. Press RETURN to cancel the test tone.
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
If your setup requires more detailed settings than those provided in Automatically conducting optimum sound
tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 57 , you can customize your setup options below. You can calibrate your
system differently for up to six different MCACC presets, which are useful if you have different listening positions
depending on the type of source (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the
TV).
Important
! Make sure the microphone/speakers are not moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.
! The screen saver will automatically appear after five minutes of inactivity.
CAUTION
! The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are output at high volume.
1 Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/Advanced MCACC (VSX-
830) menu, then press ENTER.
If the Advanced MCACC screen is not displayed, refer to Making receiver settings from the MCACC PRO (VSX-
1130/VSX-930)/Advanced MCACC (VSX-830) menu on page 99 .
2 Select the parameters you want to set.
Use i/j to select the item, then use k/l to set.
! Auto MCACC – The default is ALL (recommended), but you can limit the system calibration to only one set-
ting (to save time) if you want.
When data measurement is taken (after selecting ALL or Keep SP System), the reverb characteristics
data (both before- and after-calibration) that this receiver had been storing will be overwritten.
When measurement is performed with other than SYMMETRY (after selecting ALL or Keep SP System),
the reverberation characteristics after calibration cannot be predicted, so the graph for the characteristics
after calibration (“After”) cannot be displayed. If you will need to display the graph for the characteristics
after calibration (“After”), take the measurement using the EQ Professional menu in the Manual MCACC
setup (page 101 ).
The EQ Pro & S-Wave measurement is also taken when ALL or Keep SP System is selected. See
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 102 for more on this.
Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the
respective MCACC preset. For details, see Setting the Audio options on page 85 .
! EQ Type (only available when the Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – This determines how the
frequency balance is adjusted.
After a single calibration is performed, each of the following three correction curves can be stored separately
in the MCACC memory.
SYMMETRY implements symmetric correction for each pair of left and right speakers to flatten the
frequency-amplitude characteristics.
ALL CH ADJ is a ‘flat’ setting where all the speakers are set individually so no special weighting is given to
any one channel.
FRONT ALIGN sets all speakers in accordance with the front speaker settings (no equalization is applied
to the front left and right channels).
If you selected ALL or Keep SP System as your Auto MCACC menu, you can specify the MCACC preset
where you want to save the SYMMETRY, ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN settings.
EQ of subwoofer is automatically set when in ALL CH ADJ mode.
 
100
The MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/Advanced MCACC (VSX-830) menu
12
! STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only available when the Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – In
addition to measurements at the listening position, you can use two more reference points for which test
tones will be analyzed for standing waves. This is useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration for sev-
eral seating positions in your listening area. Place the microphone at the reference point indicated on-screen
and note that the last microphone placement will be at your main listening position:
12
3
2nd reference
point
3rd reference
point
Main listening
position
! Dolby Enabled Speaker (excluding VSX-830. Setting is possible only when Auto MCACC and ALL are
selected in Speaker Setting): Select a speaker that uses (TMd). When a Dolby Enabled Speaker is not used,
select NO (page 24 ).
! SP to ceiling (excluding VSX-830. When setting to use the Dolby Enabled Speaker, using Auto MCACC, you
can perform the settings when ALL, Keep SP System, and Channel Level & Speaker Distance are selected):
Input the vertical distance from the speaker to the ceiling when using a Dolby Enabled Speaker (page 24 ).
3 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.
Microphone
Tripod
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If
you do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the microphone.
! It may not be possible to measure correctly if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa, etc.
4 When you’re finished setting the options, select START then press ENTER.
5 Follow the instructions on-screen.
6 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish outputting test tones.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present
in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while it’s doing this.
! With error messages (such as Too much ambient noise! or Check microphone.), select RETRY after check-
ing for ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 58 ) and verifying the mic
connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and continue.
! Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.
7 If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen.
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the actual speakers you have.
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in
step 8.
! If you see an ERR message (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a problem
with the speaker connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power and check the speaker con-
nections. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use i/j to select the speaker and k/l to
change the setting and continue.
! If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the
phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are
properly connected.
If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker
connections.
If the connections were wrong, turn off the power, disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly.
After this, perform the Auto MCACC procedure again.
If the connections were right, select GO NEXT and continue.
8 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum
receiver settings.
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
! If you selected a STAND.WAVE Multi-Point setup (in step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd
and 3rd reference points before finally placing it at your main listening position.
9 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Advanced MCACC menu reappears
automatically.
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system, but
it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using the Manual MCACC setup menu (starting below) or
Manual SP Setup menu (starting on page 106 ).
! Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12
cm (5 inches) will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual
speaker setup on page 106 .
! The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This set-
ting should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to
be changed.
! If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing
environment, we recommend adjusting the settings manually.
You can also choose to view the settings by selecting individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check screen
(see Checking MCACC Data on page 103 ).
Press RETURN after you have finished checking each screen. When you’re finished, select RETURN to go back to
the HOME MENU.
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup.
 
101
The MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/Advanced MCACC (VSX-830) menu
12
Manual MCACC setup
You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more
familiar with the system. Before making these settings, you should have already completed Automatically con-
ducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 57 .
You only need to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or
add new speakers).
CAUTION
! The test tones used in the Manual MCACC setup are output at high volume.
Important
! Press the MCACC button while the pertinent setup screens are displayed to select MCACC presets.
! For some of the settings below, you’ll have to connect the setup microphone to the front panel and place it
about ear level at your normal listening position. Press HOME MENU to display the HOME MENU before you
connect the microphone to this receiver.
! See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 58 for notes regarding high background noise
levels and other possible interference.
! If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and turn up the volume to the middle position.
1 Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/Advanced MCACC (VSX-
830) menu, then press ENTER.
See Making receiver settings from the MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/Advanced MCACC (VSX-830) menu on
page 99 if you’re not already at this screen.
2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to make these settings in order.
! Fine Channel Level – Make fine adjustments to the overall balance of your speaker system (see Fine Channel
Level on page 101 ).
! Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay settings for your speaker system (see Fine Speaker Distance on page
101 ).
! Standing Wave – Control overly resonant low frequencies in your listening room (see Standing Wave on
page 102 ).
The last two settings are specifically for customizing the parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
on page 102 :
! EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency balance of your speaker system while listening to test tones (see
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 102 ).
! EQ Professional – Calibrate your system based on the direct sound coming from the speakers and make
detailed settings according to your room’s reverb characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
on page 102 ).
Fine Channel Level
! Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels)
You can achieve better surround sound by properly adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. You can
adjust the Channel Level of each speaker in 0.5 dB increments. The following setting can help you make detailed
adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 106 .
1 Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.
The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference level.
2 Adjust the level of the left channel.
This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want to keep the level around 0.0dB so that you’ll have plenty
of room to adjust the other speaker levels.
! After pressing ENTER, test tones will be output.
3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels (+/–12.0 dB) as necessary.
Use k/l to adjust the volume of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker. When it sounds like
both tones are the same volume, press j to confirm and continue to the next channel.
! For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select.
! If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply use i/j to select it.
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Fine Speaker Distance
! Default setting: 3.00 m (all speakers)
For proper sound depth and separation with your system, it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some
speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. You can adjust the distance of
each speaker in half inch increments. The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may
not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 106 .
1 Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.
2 Adjust the distance of the left channel from the listening position.
Excluding VSX-830: When setting the Dolby Enabled Speaker, input the vertical distance from the speaker to the
ceiling and the distance to each Dolby Enabled Speaker from the listening/viewing position (page 24 ).
3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance as necessary.
Adjust using the k/l button. (excluding VSX-830: If Dolby Enabled Speaker is used, the distance reached by the
speaker sound reflected at the ceiling is displayed (page 24 ).)
Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the target channel. From the listening position, face the two
speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each speaker. Try to make the two tones sound as if they are
arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of you and between your arm span.
! If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your
speakers very slightly.
! The subwoofer’s test tone differs in tone from other channels. Adjust so that the sound of the subwoofer can
be heard distinctly. Note that when adjusting the subwoofer, depending on the low frequency response of
your speaker, it may be difficult to hear the change even when the setting is increased or decreased or when
the position of the speaker is changed. Note that it may be difficult to compare this tone with the other speak-
ers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker).
When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up, press j to confirm and continue to the next channel.
! For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select.
! If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply use i/j to select it.
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
 
102
The MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/Advanced MCACC (VSX-830) menu
12
Standing Wave
! Default setting: ON/ATT 0.0dB (all filters)
Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain conditions, sound waves from your speaker system resonate
mutually with sound waves reflected off the walls in your listening area. This can have a negative effect on the
overall sound, especially at certain lower frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your listening posi-
tion, and ultimately the shape of your room, it results in an overly resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The Standing Wave
Control uses filters to reduce the effect of overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During playback of a
source, you can customize the filters used for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC presets.
! Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI
connection.
1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.
2 Adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave Control.
! Filter Channel – Select the channel to which you will apply the filter(s): MAIN (all except center channel and
subwoofer), Center or SW (subwoofer).
! TRIM (only available when the filter channel above is SW) – Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to compen-
sate for the difference in output post-filter).
! Freq / Q / ATT – These are the filter parameters where Freq represents the frequency you will be targeting
and Q is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation (ATT, the
amount of reduction to the targeted frequency).
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
! Default setting: ON/0.0dB (all channels/bands)
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room equalizer for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It
works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics
that can color the original source material (providing a ‘flat’ equalization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the
adjustment provided in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 57 or
Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 99 , you can also adjust these settings manually to get a frequency balance
that suits your tastes.
1 Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.
2 Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your liking.
Use i/j to select the channel.
Use k/l to select the frequency and i/j to boost or cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to the top of
the screen and press k to return to Ch, then use i/j to select the channel.
! The OVER! indicator shows in the display if the frequency adjustment is too drastic and might distort. If this
happens, bring the level down until OVER! disappears from the display.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Notes
! Changing the frequency curve of one channel too drastically will affect the overall balance. If the speaker bal-
ance seems uneven, you can raise or lower channel levels using test tones with the TRIM feature. Use k/l to
select TRIM, then use i/j to raise or lower the channel level for the current speaker.
! Speaker Setting channels set as SMALL or Dolby Sp at 63Hz cannot be selected.
! The frequencies that can be adjusted by the SW channel are 31Hz, 63Hz, 125Hz and 250Hz.
! Depending on the crossover frequency setting, some frequencies are less effective.
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system based
on the direct sound coming from the speakers.
Performing the Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional procedure is effective when the lower frequencies seem
overly reverberant in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’) as shown at Type A below, or when different
channels seem to exhibit different reverb characteristics as shown at Type B.
! Type A: Reverberance of high vs. low frequencies
Level
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
Low frequencies
High frequencies
Conventional MCACC
EQ calibration range
Time
(in msec)
0
80
160
! Type B: Reverb characteristics for different channels
Level
0
80
160
Time
(in msec)
Front L
Front R
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
Conventional MCACC
EQ calibration range
Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
1 Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press ENTER.
2 Select an option and press ENTER.
! Reverb Measurement – Use this to measure the reverb characteristics before and after calibration.
! Reverb View – You can check the reverb measurements made for specified frequency ranges in each
channel.
If the Reverb View procedure is performed after the Reverb Measurement operation, depending on
the standing wave control setting, differences may appear on the reverb graph. With the Auto MCACC
function, the reverberations are measured with the standing waves controlled, so the reverb character-
istics graph shows the characteristics with the effect of the standing waves eliminated. By contrast, the
Reverb Measurement function measures the reverberations without controlling the standing waves,
so the graph indicates the reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves. If you wish
to check the reverb characteristics of the room itself (with the standing waves as such), we recommend
using the Reverb Measurement function.
! Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the time period that will be used for frequency adjustment and
calibration, based on the reverb measurement of your listening area. Note that customizing system calibra-
tion using this setup will alter the settings you made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full
Auto MCACC) on page 57 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 99 and is not necessary if you’re satis-
fied with these settings.
 
103
The MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/Advanced MCACC (VSX-830) menu
12
3 If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ ON or EQ OFF, and then START.
The following options determine how the reverb characteristics of your listening area are displayed in
Reverb View:
! EQ OFF – You will see the reverb characteristics of your listening area without the equalization performed by
this receiver (before calibration).
! EQ ON – You will see the reverb characteristics of your listening area with the equalization performed by this
receiver (after calibration). Note that the EQ response may not appear entirely flat due to adjustments neces-
sary for your listening area.
The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is
selected. To use another MCACC preset, press MCACC to select the MCACC memory you want to store.
After auto calibration with EQ Type : SYMMETRY (Full Auto MCACC, etc.), the graph for the inferred
reverb characteristics can be displayed by selecting Reverb View. To display the actually measured
reverb characteristics after EQ calibration, measure with EQ ON.
When the reverb measurement is finished, you can select Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 117 for troubleshooting information.
4 If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the reverb characteristics for each channel.
Press RETURN when you’re done.
The reverb characteristics are displayed when the Reverb Measurement measurements are conducted.
Use k/l to select the channel, frequency and calibration setting you want to check. Use i/j to go back and
forth between the three. The reverb characteristics graph before and after EQ calibration can be displayed by
selecting Calibration : Before / After. Note that the markers on the vertical axis indicate decibels in 2 dB steps.
5 If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, select the MCACC memory to be stored, then enter the
desired time setting for calibration, and then select START.
! To specify the place where the MCACC memory is to be stored, press MCACC to select the MCACC memory
you want to store.
Based on the reverb measurement above, you can choose the time period that will be used for the final frequency
adjustment and calibration. Even though you can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is best to use
the measurement results as a reference for your time setting. For an optimal system calibration based on the
direct sound coming from the speakers, we recommend using the 30-50ms setting.
Use k/l to select the setting. Use i/j to switch between them.
Select the setting from the following time periods (in milliseconds): 0-20ms, 10-30ms, 20-40ms, 30-50ms,
40-60ms, 50-70ms and 60-80ms. This setting will be applied to all channels during calibration.
When you’re finished, select START. It will take about 2 to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish.
After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are given the option to check the settings on-screen.
Checking MCACC Data
At the procedure of Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 57 , the pro-
cedure of Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 99 or after fine-adjusting at Manual MCACC setup on page 101 ,
you can check your calibrated settings using the GUI screen.
1 Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/Advanced MCACC
(VSX-830) menu, then press ENTER.
2 Select the setting you want to check.
! Speaker Setting – Used to check the settings of the speaker systems. See Speaker Setting on page 103 for
more on this.
! Channel Level – Used to check the output level of the different speakers. See Channel Level on page 103 for
more on this.
! Speaker Distance – Used to check the distance to the different speakers. See Speaker Distance on page
103 for more on this.
! Standing Wave – Used to check the standing wave control filter settings. See Standing Wave on page 103
for more on this.
! Acoustic Cal EQ – Used to check the calibration values of the listening environment’s frequency response.
See Acoustic Cal EQ on page 104 for more on this.
3 Press RETURN to go back to the MCACC Data Check menu, repeating steps 2 and 3 to check
other settings.
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/Advanced MCACC (VSX-830) menu.
Speaker Setting
Use this to display the speaker size and number of speakers. See Speaker Setting on page 107 for more on this.
1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.
2 Select the channel you want to check.
Use i/j to select the channel. The corresponding channel on the layout diagram is highlighted.
Channel Level
Use this to display the level of the various channels. See Channel Level on page 108 for more on this.
1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.
2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use k/l to select the MCACC preset you want to check.
The level of the various channels set at the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for channels that
are not connected.
Speaker Distance
Use this to display the distance from the different channels to the listening position. See Speaker Distance on
page 108 for more on this.
1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.
2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use k/l to select the MCACC preset you want to check.
The distance from the various channels set at the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for chan-
nels that are not connected.
Standing Wave
Use this to display the standing wave related adjustment values for the various MCACC memories. See Standing
Wave on page 102 for more on this.
1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.
2 When ‘Filter Channel’ is highlighted, use i/j to select the channel for which you want to
check standing wave control.
The standing wave related calibration value for the selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset and its
graph are displayed.
3 Press k to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use i/j to select the MCACC preset you want to
check.
 
104
The MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/Advanced MCACC (VSX-830) menu
12
Acoustic Cal EQ
Use this to display the calibration values for the frequency response of the various channels set in the different
MCACC presets. See Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 102 for more on this.
1 Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.
2 When ‘Ch’ is highlighted, use i/j to select the channel.
The calibration value for the frequency response of the selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset
and its graph are displayed.
3 Press k to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use i/j to select the MCACC preset you want to
check.
Group Delay
Use this to display the calibrated speaker group delay results. See Better sound using Phase Control on page
73 for more on this.
1 Select ‘Group Delay’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.
2 When ‘Channel’ is highlighted, use k/l to select the channel you want to check.
The result of group delay calibration for the selected channel is displayed.
When measurements have been performed with Full Auto MCACC selected at Advanced MCACC or with ALL
or Full Band Phase Ctrl selected when Auto MCACC is selected, the graph before group delay calibration is also
displayed.
When After is selected at Calibration, the group delay after calibration is displayed. Compared to when Before
is selected, with After there is less difference in the delay between frequency bands and the group delay between
the different channels is uniform, allowing you to check the full band phase control effect.
No Data is displayed if the selected group delay has not been measured.
Data Management
This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets, allowing you to calibrate your system for different listen-
ing positions (or frequency adjustments for the same listening position). This is useful for alternate settings to
match the kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies from a sofa,
or playing a video game close to the TV).
From this menu you can copy from one preset to another, name presets for easier identification and clear any
ones you don’t need.
! This can be done in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 57 or
Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 99 , either of which you should have already completed.
1 Select ‘Data Management’ from the MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/Advanced MCACC
(VSX-830) menu, then press ENTER.
2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
! Memory Rename – Name your MCACC presets for easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets on
page 104 ).
! MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings from one MCACC preset to another (see Copying MCACC preset data
on page 104 ).
! MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC presets that you don’t want (see Clearing MCACC presets on
page 104 ).
Renaming MCACC presets
If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re using, you may want to rename them for easier
identification.
1 Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data Management setup menu.
2 Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then select an appropriate preset name.
Use i/j to select the preset, then k/l to select a preset name.
3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary, then press RETURN when you’re finished.
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.
Copying MCACC preset data
If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on page 101 ), we recom-
mend copying your current settings to an unused MCACC preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will give you
a reference point from which to start.
! The settings made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 57 or
Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 99 .
1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the Data Management setup menu.
2 Select the setting you want to copy.
! All Data – Copies all the settings of the selected MCACC preset memory.
! Level & Distance – Copies only the channel level and speaker distance settings of the selected MCACC pre-
set memory.
3 Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the settings ‘From’, then specify where you
want to copy them ‘To’.
Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).
4 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and copy the settings.
When MCACC Memory Copy? is displayed, select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not copied.
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the MCACC preset has been copied, then you automatically
return to the Data Management setup menu.
Clearing MCACC presets
If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration
settings of that preset.
1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the Data Management setup menu.
2 Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.
Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).
3 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and clear the preset.
When MCACC Memory Clear? is displayed, select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not cleared.
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the MCACC preset has been cleared, then you automatically
return to the Data Management setup menu.
 
105
 
Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu .......................................................... 106
Manual speaker setup .................................................................................................................106
MHL Setup ....................................................................................................................................109
The Other Setup menu ................................................................................................................ 109
Making network settings using Safari.......................................................................................111
Using Safari to set a friendly name ............................................................................................ 111
Using Safari to update the firmware .........................................................................................112
The System Setup and Other Setup menus
106
The System Setup and Other Setup menus
13
Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
The following section describes how to change the speaker-related settings manually and make various other
settings (input selection, OSD language selection, etc.).
! With factory default settings, the on-screen display will be output from all HDMI output terminals and dis-
played on any TV connected via HDMI cable.
Excluding VSX-830: You can change where the screen is output in the MAIN/HDZONE (page 111 ) and HDMI
output (page 88 ) settings.
1 Press u STANDBY/ON to switch on the receiver and your TV.
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.
2 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and
then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.
! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the HOME MENU.
3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU, then press ENTER.
4 Select the setting you want to adjust.
! Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve connected to the digital, HDMI and component video inputs (see The
Input Setup menu on page 59 ).
! HDMI Setup – Synchronizes this receiver with your Pioneer component supporting Control with HDMI (page
81 ).
! Manual SP Setup – Sets the type of connection used for surround back terminals and the size, number dis-
tance and overall balance of the connected speakers (see Manual speaker setup on page 106 ).
! MHL Setup – Changes the settings related to MHL (see MHL Setup on page 109 ).
! OSD Language – The GUI screen’s display language can be changed (see Changing the OSD display lan-
guage (OSD Language) on page 60 ).
! Other Setup – Makes customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver (see The Other Setup
menu on page 109 ).
Manual speaker setup
This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to optimize the surround sound performance. You only need
to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new
speakers).
These settings are designed to customize your system, but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in
Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 57 , it isn’t necessary to make all
of these settings.
CAUTION
! The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup are output at high volume.
1 Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press ENTER.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 106 if you’re not already at this screen.
2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:
! Speaker System – Specifies how you are using your surround back speaker terminals and B speaker termi-
nals (page 106 ).
! Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and number of speakers you’ve connected (page 107 ).
! Channel Level – Adjusts the overall balance of your speaker system (page 108 ).
! Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance of your speakers from the listening position (page 108 ).
! X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of your speaker system for movie soundtracks (page 108 ).
3 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each
screen.
Speaker system setting
In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930
! Default setting: 7.2ch/5.2.2ch
This receiver can be used for various applications such as surround back terminal and top middle speaker termi-
nal. Here, application for these terminals are set. Select from the following items.
1 Select ‘Speaker System’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 106 if you’re not already at this screen.
2 Select the speaker system setting.
! 7.2ch/5.2.2ch – Select when connecting surround back or top middle speaker and playing a maximum 7.2 ch
surround.
! 7.2ch SB/FW – Select when connecting surround back or front wide speaker and playing a maximum 7.2 ch
surround.
! Speaker B – Select to use the B speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in another room (see Switching
the speaker terminals on page 88 ).
! Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re bi-amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your speakers on
page 25 ).
! HDZONE – Select to use the surround back speaker terminals for an independent system in HDZONE (see
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 89 ).
3 If you selected 7.2ch/5.2.2ch, 7.2ch SB/FW, or Speaker B in Step 2, select the placement of
the surround speakers.
In a 7.2-channel surround system with surround speakers placed directly at the sides of the listening position,
the surround sound of 5.1-channel sources is heard from the side. This function mixes the sound of the surround
speakers with the surround back speakers so that the surround sound is heard from diagonally to the rear as it
should be.
Depending on the positions of the speakers and the sound source, in some cases it may not be possible to
achieve good results. In this case, set the setting to ON SIDE or IN REAR.
! ON SIDE – Select when the surround speakers is positioned right beside you.
! IN REAR – Select when the surround speaker is positioned obliquely behind you.
4 When ‘Setting Change?’ is displayed, select Yes.
If No is selected, the setting is not changed.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
 
107
The System Setup and Other Setup menus
13
In case of VSX-830
! Default setting: 5.2ch
1 Select ‘Speaker System’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 106 if you’re not already at this screen.
2 Select the speaker system setting.
! 5.2ch – Select when connecting surround speaker and playing a maximum 5.2 ch surround.
! Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re bi-amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your speakers on
page 40 ).
3 When ‘Setting Change?’ is displayed, select Yes.
If No is selected, the setting is not changed.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Speaker Setting
In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930
Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration (size, number of speakers and crossover frequency). It
is a good idea to make sure that the settings made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full
Auto MCACC) on page 57 are correct. Note that this setting applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be set
independently.
1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
2 Choose the set of speakers that you want to set, then select a speaker size.
Use k/l to select the size (and number) of each of the following speakers:
! SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of channels set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when YES
is selected. Choose the PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or you
want deeper bass (the bass frequencies that would normally come out the front and center speakers are also
routed to the subwoofer). If you did not connect a subwoofer choose NO (the bass frequencies are output
from other speakers).
If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers
and PLUS for the subwoofer. This may not, however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker
placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass due low frequency
cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good results,
listen to the bass response with it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL
alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best. If you’re having problems, the easiest option is to
route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL for the front speakers.
! Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you didn’t connect a
subwoofer. Select SMALL to send the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.
! Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to
send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center speaker, choose NO
(the center channel is sent to the front speakers).
! TMd – Select LARGE if your top middle speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to
send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. When setting up the Dolby Enabled Speaker on
the front speaker, please select Dolby Sp (Front). When setting up the Dolby Enabled Speaker on the sur-
round speaker, please select Dolby Sp (Surr). If you didn’t connect the top middle speakers, choose NO (the
top middle channel is sent to the front speakers).
You can adjust this setting only when Speaker System setting is 7.2ch/5.2.2ch.
If you change the setting from Dolby Sp (Surr) or Dolby Sp (Front) to SMALL or LARGE, the set value
for Speaker Distance may be changed. This is because the maximum value of Speaker Distance when
set to Dolby Sp (Surr) or Dolby Sp (Front) is bigger than the maximum value of Speaker Distance when
set to SMALL or LARGE. If the value of Speaker Distance set to Dolby Sp (Surr) or Dolby Sp (Front)
exceeds the maximum value of Speaker Distance for SMALL or LARGE, Speaker Distance for SMALL or
LARGE is set to its maximum value.
! FW – Select LARGE if your front wide speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to
send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front wide speakers, choose
NO (the front wide channel is sent to the front speakers).
You can adjust this setting only when Speaker System setting is 7.2ch SB/FW.
If the surround speakers are set to NO, this setting will automatically be set to NO.
! Surr – Select LARGE if your surround speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALL to send
bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround speakers choose NO (the
sound of the surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a subwoofer).
! SB – Select the number of surround back speakers you have (one, two or none). Select LARGEx2 or LARGEx1 if your
surround back speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALLx2 or SMALLx1 to send bass frequen-
cies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround back speakers choose NO.
You can adjust this setting only when Speaker System setting is 7.2ch/5.2.2ch, 7.2ch SB/FW or
Speaker B.
If the surround speakers are set to NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.
If you select NO for the subwoofer, the front speakers will automatically be fixed to LARGE. Also, the center, top
middle, surround, surround back and front wide speakers can’t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are set to
SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.
3 Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.
Frequencies below this point will be sent to the subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).
! This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or
the subwoofer, and bass sounds playing back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff
will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.
! With Full Auto MCACC setup or Auto MCACC setup (ALL or Speaker Setting), the setting here will not
apply and the crossover frequency will be automatically set. Crossover frequency is a frequency aimed at
achieving the optimal sound field taking into account the bass capacity of all connected speakers and human
aural characteristics.
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
 
108
The System Setup and Other Setup menus
13
In case of VSX-830
Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration (size, number of speakers and crossover frequency). It
is a good idea to make sure that the settings made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full
Auto MCACC) on page 57 are correct. Note that this setting applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be set
independently.
1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
2 Choose the set of speakers that you want to set, then select a speaker size.
Use k/l to select the size (and number) of each of the following speakers:
! SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of channels set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when YES
is selected. Choose the PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or you
want deeper bass (the bass frequencies that would normally come out the front and center speakers are also
routed to the subwoofer). If you did not connect a subwoofer choose NO (the bass frequencies are output
from other speakers).
If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers
and PLUS for the subwoofer. This may not, however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker
placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass due low frequency
cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good results,
listen to the bass response with it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL
alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best. If you’re having problems, the easiest option is to
route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL for the front speakers.
! Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you didn’t connect a
subwoofer. Select SMALL to send the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.
! Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to
send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center speaker, choose NO
(the center channel is sent to the front speakers).
! Surr – Select LARGE if your surround speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALL to send
bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround speakers choose NO (the
sound of the surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a subwoofer).
If you select NO for the subwoofer, the front speakers will automatically be fixed to LARGE. Also, the center and
surround speakers can’t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies
are sent to the subwoofer.
3 Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.
Frequencies below this point will be sent to the subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).
! This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or
the subwoofer, and bass sounds playing back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff
will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.
! With Full Auto MCACC setup or Auto MCACC setup (ALL or Speaker Setting), the setting here will not
apply and the crossover frequency will be automatically set. Crossover frequency is a frequency aimed at
achieving the optimal sound field taking into account the bass capacity of all connected speakers and human
aural characteristics.
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Channel Level
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the overall balance of your speaker system, an important factor
when setting up a home theater system.
1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
The test tones will start.
2 Adjust the level of each channel using k/l.
Use i/j to switch speakers.
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is emitted.
! If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and
adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Speaker Distance
For good sound depth and separation from your system, you need to specify the distance of your speakers from
the listening position. (When Dolby Enabled Speaker is used, specify the distance reached by the speaker sound
reflected at the ceiling (page 24 ).) The receiver can then add the proper delay needed for effective surround
sound.
1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
2 Adjust the distance of each speaker using k/l.
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 0.01 m increments.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Note
For best surround sound, make sure the surround back speakers are the same distance from the listening
position.
X-Curve
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting acts
as a kind of re-equalization for home theater listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie soundtracks.
1 Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
2 Choose the X-Curve setting you want.
Use k/l to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting
at 2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope increases (to a maximum of –3.0dB/oct). Use the following
guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your room size:
Room size (
m
2
)
X-Curve
(dB/oct)
–0.5 –1.0 –1.5 –2.0 –2.5 –3.0
36 48 60 72 300 1000
! If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be flat and the X-Curve has no effect.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
 
109
The System Setup and Other Setup menus
13
MHL Setup
Select whether or not to switch the input automatically to the MHL input when an MHL-compatible device is
connected.
! Default setting: ON
1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and
then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.
! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the HOME MENU.
2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU, then press ENTER.
3 Select ‘MHL Setup’ from the System Setup menu.
4 Select the ‘Auto input switching’ from the MHL Setup menu.
5 Use k/l to select the setting.
! OFF – Does not automaticly switch to MHL input.
! ON – Automatically switches to MHL input.
6 Select ‘OK’, then press ENTER.
Notes
! This is only valid for MHL-compatible devices supporting this function.
! When the power is on, the MHL-compatible device is charged. (This receiver supports charging of devices up
to 0.9 A.)
The Other Setup menu
The Other Setup menu is where you can make customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver.
1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and
then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.
2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU.
3 Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.
4 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:
! Auto Power Down – Sets the power to turn off automatically when the receiver is not being used (page 109 ).
! Volume Setup – Sets up the volume-related operations of this receiver (page 109 ).
! Software Update – Use to update the receiver’s software and check the version (page 110 ).
! On Screen Display Setup (excluding VSX-830) – Setting of whether or not to display the status on the display
when the receiver is operated (page 110 ).
! Remote Control Mode Setup (excluding VSX-830) – Setting remote control mode on the receiver side (page
110 ).
! ZONE Setup (excluding VSX-830) – Sub zone related setting (page 111 ).
5 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each
screen.
Auto Power Down
The power can be set to turn off automatically if no operation has been performed for a specific amount of time
with no audio or video signals being input to the receiver.
Excluding VSX-830: When using HDZONE, the HDZONE power can also be set to turn off, but for HDZONE the
power turns off automatically after the amount of time set here even if signals are being input or operations have
been performed. Different times can be set for the main zone and HDZONE.
1 Select ‘Auto Power Down’ from the Other Setup menu.
2 Select the zone you want to set and set the time after which the power turns off.
! MAIN – The time can be selected from among “15 min”, “30 min”, “60 min” and “OFF”. The power turns off
after there has been no signal and no operation for the selected time.
! HDZONE (excluding VSX-830) – Can select from 30 min, 1 hour, 3 hours, 6 hours, 9 hours and OFF. The
power turns off when the time selected elapses.
Notes
! Depending on the connected devices, the Auto Power Down function may not work properly due to excessive
noise or other reasons.
! When using WAC mode (page 53 ), this feature does not work.
Volume Setup
You can set the maximum volume of this receiver or specify what the volume level will be when the power is
turned on.
1 Select ‘Volume Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.
2 Select the Power ON Level setting you want.
The volume can be set so that it is always set to the same level when the receiver’s power is turned on.
! LAST (default) – When the power is turned on, the volume is set to the same level as when the power was last
turned off.
!---” – When the power is turned on, the volume is set to minimum level.
! –80.0dB to +12.0dB – Specify the volume to be set when the power is turned on, in steps of 0.5 dB.
It is not possible to set a volume level greater than the value specified at Volume Limit setup (see below).
3 Select the Volume Limit setting you want.
Use this function to limit the maximum volume. The volume cannot be increased above the level set here, even by
operating VOLUME button (or the dial on the front panel).
! OFF (default) – The maximum volume is not limited.
! –20.0dB/–15.0dB/–10.0dB/–5.0dB/0.0dB – The maximum volume is limited to the value set here.
4 Select the Mute Level setting you want.
This sets how much the volume is to be turned down when MUTE is pressed.
! FULL (default) – No sound.
! –40.0dB/–20.0dB – The volume will be turned down to the level specified here.
5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
 
110
The System Setup and Other Setup menus
13
Software Update
Use this procedure to update the receiver’s software and check the version. There are two ways to update: via the
Internet and via a USB memory device.
Updating via the Internet is performed by accessing the file server from the receiver and downloading the file.
This procedure is only possible if the receiver is connected to the Internet.
Updating via a USB memory device is performed by downloading the update file from a computer, reading this
file onto a USB memory device then inserting this USB memory device into the USB port on the receiver’s front
panel. With this procedure, the USB memory device containing the update file must first be inserted into the USB
port on the receiver’s front panel.
! If an update file is provided on the Pioneer website, download it onto your computer. When downloading an
update file from the Pioneer website onto your computer, the file will be in ZIP format. Unzip the ZIP file before
saving it on the USB memory device. If there are any old downloaded files or downloaded files for other models
on the USB memory device, delete them.
http://pioneer.jp/homeav/support/ios/eu/ (for Europe)
http://pioneer.jp/homeav/support/ios/ao/ (for Australia and New Zealand)
! If an update file does not exist in the Pioneer’s website, updating the software for the receiver is not necessary.
Important
! DO NOT unplug the power cord during updating.
! When updating via the Internet, do not disconnect the LAN cable. When updating via a USB memory device,
do not disconnect the USB memory device.
! If updating is interrupted before it is completed, start updating over from the beginning.
! The receiver’s settings may be reset when the software is updated. Information on the models for which the
settings are reset is provided on the Pioneer website. Check the website before updating.
1 Select ‘Software Update’ from the Other Setup menu.
2 Select the update procedure.
! Update via Internet – The receiver checks whether updatable software is available via the Internet.
! Update via USB Memory – The receiver checks whether the USB memory device inserted into the USB port
on the receiver’s front panel contains updatable software.
Accessing” is displayed and the update file is checked. Wait a while.
3 Check on the screen whether or not an update file was found.
If “New version found.” is displayed, the update file has been found. The version number and updating time are
displayed.
If “This is the latest version. There is no need to update.” is displayed, no update file has been found.
4 To update, select OK.
The updating screen appears and updating is performed.
! The power turns off automatically once updating is completed.
Software Update messages
Status messages Descriptions
FILE ERROR
Try disconnecting then reconnecting the USB device or storing the update file again. If the error still
occurs, try using a different USB memory device.
No update file was found on the USB memory device. Store the file in the USB memory device’s root
directory.
UPDATE ERROR 1 to
UPDATE ERROR 7
Turn the receiver’s power off, then turn it back on and try updating the software again.
Update via USB
If this message flashes, updating has failed. Update via a USB memory device. Put the update file on a
USB memory device and connect the device to the USB port. When the file is found, software updating
starts automatically.
UE11
Updating has failed. Use the same procedure to update the software again.
UE22
UE33
On Screen Display Setup
When the receiver is operated, its status (the input name, listening mode, etc.) is displayed superimposed over
the video output on the display. This status display can be turned off by switching this setting to OFF. The setting
can be made for the main zone and HDZONE, respectively.
! Default: ON (both the main zone and HDZONE)
1 Select ‘On Screen Display Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.
2 Select and set the main zone or HDZONE (excluding VSX-830) for which you wish to
change the setting.
3 Select the On Screen Display setting you want.
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
Notes
! The on-screen display is only displayed for video output from the HDMI terminal.
! When the video input signal is a 3D signal, the on-screen display may not be displayed.
! The size of the characters displayed differs according to the output resolution.
Remote Control Mode Setup
Excluding VSX-830
! Default setting: 1
This sets this receiver’s remote control mode to prevent erroneous operation when multiple units of the receiver
are being used.
1 Select ‘Remote Control Mode Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.
2 Select the Remote Control Mode setting you want.
3 Select ‘OK’ to change the remote control mode.
4 Follow the instructions on the screen to change the remote control’s setting.
See Operating multiple receivers on page 93 .
5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
 
111
The System Setup and Other Setup menus
13
ZONE Setup
Excluding VSX-830
Switches the sub-zone setting.
1 Select ‘ZONE Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.
2 Select ‘MAIN/HDZONE’, then press ENTER.
3 Set the usage of the HDMI OUT 2 terminal.
! MAIN: Select this to output the same input source as in the main zone.
After setting this to MAIN, exit the home menu, then press OUT P. and select the terminal for HDMI output
(page 88 ).
! HDZONE (default): Use the HDMI output’s multizone function (HDZONE) to output an input source different
from the one in the main zone (page 89 ).
4 Select ‘OK’, then press ENTER.
5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
Making network settings using Safari
1 Launch Safari on your computer.
2 Press Bookmark icon. Click Bonjour list (a), and then select this receiver’s name
(Friendly Name) (b) in Bookmark.
If Bonjour list is not displayed, access the IP address“http://(the receiver’s IP address)” from Safari.
(Model No.)
(Model No.)
a
b
3 On the AVNavigator menu screen, select Network Setup.
4 Click IP, Proxy Setting.
5 Setup the network settings manually and then press Apply.
Note
This setting for the network has been confirmed for OS X v 10.7 and Safari 5.1.
Using Safari to set a friendly name
1 Launch Safari on your computer.
2 Press Bookmark icon. Click Bonjour list (a), and then select this receiver’s name
(Friendly Name) (b) in Bookmark.
If Bonjour list is not displayed, access the IP address“http://(the receiver’s IP address)” from Safari.
3 On the AVNavigator menu screen, select Network Setup.
4 Click Friendly Name.
5 Input a friendly name, then press Apply.
Note
This setting for the network has been confirmed for OS X v 10.7 and Safari 5.1.
 
112
The System Setup and Other Setup menus
13
Using Safari to update the firmware
1 Launch Safari on your computer.
2 Press Bookmark icon. Click Bonjour list (a), and then select this receiver’s name
(Friendly Name) (b) in Bookmark.
If Bonjour list is not displayed, access the IP address“http://(the receiver’s IP address)” from Safari.
3 On the AVNavigator menu screen, select Network Setup.
4 Click Firmware Update.
5 Press Start.
The firmware update prepare screen is displayed. If the screen does not switch automatically, click Click here.
6 Browse the latest firmware on your computer (a) and then press Upload (b).
Firmware files have the extension “fw”. Select a file with the extension “fw”.
The confirmation screen is displayed. If you continue the firmware update, press OK. Once the firmware update
process starts, you cannot stop it. Wait until the file is uploaded (about one minute may be required depending
on your LAN connection environment).
a
b
7 The firmware upload status screen is displayed.
The upload process finished successfully.” will be shown when the update is completed.
Once updating is completed, the receiver’s power automatically turns off.
16
Note
This setting for the network has been confirmed for OS X v 10.7 and Safari 5.1.
 
113
 
Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................................................114
Power ............................................................................................................................................114
No sound ......................................................................................................................................114
Other audio problems .................................................................................................................115
BT AUDIO ......................................................................................................................................116
Video .............................................................................................................................................116
Settings .........................................................................................................................................116
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output ...........................................................................117
Display .......................................................................................................................................... 117
Remote control ............................................................................................................................117
HDMI .............................................................................................................................................118
MHL ...............................................................................................................................................119
Built-in AVNavigator ...................................................................................................................119
USB interface ................................................................................................................................119
iPod ...............................................................................................................................................120
Network........................................................................................................................................120
Wireless LAN ................................................................................................................................122
FAQ
114
FAQ
14
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong
with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate
the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercis-
ing the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair
work.
! If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug
from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting below, if the screen freezes unexpectedly or if the buttons on
the remote control or front panel stop working completely, do the following:
! Press u STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn off the power, then turn the power back on.
If this does not solve the problem, turn off the power again, then press and hold the u STANDBY/ON button
on the front panel for at least five seconds. (The power turns on, then turns off after five seconds.)
! If the power cannot be turned off, press and hold u STANDBY/ON on the front panel for over five seconds. The
power will turn off. In this case, the various settings made on the receiver may be cleared.
Power
Symptom Remedy
The power does not turn on. Make sure that the power cord is plugged in to an active power outlet.
Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.
Power automatically turns off.
When Auto Power Down is set, the power automatically turns off at the set time (page
109 ).
When the power is turned on, the
WIRELESS indicator slowly flashes.
After unpacking, turning on the power, and returning to initial factory settings (page 91 ),
the WIRELESS indicator slowly flashes. This is not a malfunction.
This receiver is designed to automatically enter WAC mode when turning on the power of
this receiver in the initial factory settings state. For details about WAC mode, please refer
to page 53 . After the network settings (page 51 ) have been completed, the WIRELESS
indicator flashing disappears.
When the network is not connected, even though the WIRELESS indicator is blinking,
there is no problem using it in this state.
Excluding VSX-830: Power cannot
be turned off. (HDZONE ON is
displayed.)
Press the HDZ button on the remote control for 1.5 seconds and then press the
u STANDBY/ON button to turn OFF the power.
The receiver suddenly switches off or
the WIRELESS indicator blinks.
Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another
set of wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.
The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer
authorized independent service company.
During loud playback the power sud-
denly switches off.
Turn down the volume.
Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 101 .
Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down ENTER on the front panel,
press u STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby mode. Use TUNE i/j to
select D.SAFETY cOFFd, and then use PRESET k/l to select 1 or 2 (select D.SAFETY
cOFFd to deactivate this feature). If the power switches off even with 2 switched on, turn
down the volume. With 1 or 2 on, some features may be unavailable.
If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your
speaker settings to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS
(see Speaker Setting on page 107 ).
Symptom Remedy
The unit does not respond when the
buttons are pressed.
Try switching the receiver off, then back on again.
Try disconnecting the power cord, then connect again.
AMP ERR is indicated and
the main power turns off. The
MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-930) /
Advanced MCACC (VSX-830) indica-
tor blinks and the main power does
not turn on.
The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Unplug
the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.
The receiver suddenly switches off or
the FL OFF indicator blinks.
There is a possibility that the power supply circuit of the receiver has failed. Wait at least
one minute and then turn ON the power again. If the same symptom appears again after
turning ON the power again, stop using the receiver, disconnect the power cable and
request repair.
AMP OVERHEAT blinks in the dis-
play and the FL OFF indicator flash
and the power turns off.
Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on (see
Installing the receiver on page 10 ).
Check whether the cables used to connect the speakers are short-circuited.
Wait at least 1 minute, then try turning the power on again.
The temperature within the unit has exceeded the allowablevalue.
Lower the volume level.
The main power suddenly turns off,
and MCACC PRO (VSX-1130/VSX-
930) /Advanced MCACC (VSX-830)
indicator blinks.
The power unit is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer autho-
rized independent service company.
No sound
Symptom Remedy
There is no sound output, the sound
gets cut off, or there is noise present.
If Fixed PCM in audio parameter is set to ON, you will not be able to playback audio in
formats other than PCM audio. For other audio formats than PCM audio, select OFF (See
Setting the Audio options on page 85 ).
No sound is output when an input
function is selected.
Turn the volume up to approx. –30 dB.
Check that the speaker selector setting is set to OFF (page 88 ).
Make sure the correct input function is selected.
Make sure the correct input signal is selected (see Choosing the input signal on page
73 ).
Check that the source equipment is correctly connected (Refer to page 19 (VSX-1130/
VSX-930) or page 37 (VSX-830)) for Connecting your equipment.
Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers on page
23 ).
No sound from the surround or
center speakers.
Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn’t
selected; select one of the surround listening modes (see Enjoying various types of play-
back using the listening modes on page 71 ).
Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page
107 ).
Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 23 ).
 
115
FAQ
14
Symptom Remedy
Excluding VSX-830: No sound from
surround back speakers.
Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL, and the surround
speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 107 ).
Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 23 ). If only
one surround back speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel
speaker terminal.
When Speaker System is set to 7.2ch/5.2.2ch and SP: TMd ON is selected with the
OUT P. button, no sound will be output from the surround back speakers. Select SP:
SB ON or SP: SB/TMd ON (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 88 ).
When Speaker System is set to 7.2ch SB/FW and SP: FW ON is selected with the OUT P.
button, no sound will be output from the surround back speakers. Select SP: SB ON or
SP: SB/FW ON (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 88 ).
When Dolby Surround is selected, audio is not output from the surround back speaker
when it is the only one connected (set).
Excluding VSX-830: No sound from
front wide speakers.
Check that the front wide speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL, and the surround speak-
ers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 107 ).
Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 23 ).
When Speaker System is set to 7.2ch SB/FW and SP: SB ON is selected with the OUT P.
button, no sound will be output from the front wide speakers. Select SP: FW ON or SP:
SB/FW ON (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 88 ).
When Speaker System is set to 7.2ch SB/FW and Dolby Surround is selected, audio is
not output from the front wide speakers.
No sound from subwoofer. Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume turned up.
If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.
Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 107 ).
The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the characteris-
tics of your other speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 107 ).
If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your
speaker settings to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS
(see Speaker Setting on page 107 ).
Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or to a very quiet setting (see Setting the
Audio options on page 85 ).
Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 108 ).
No sound from one speaker.
Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 23 ).
Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 108 ).
Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 107 ).
The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced effect
listening modes, you may be able to create the missing channel (see Enjoying various
types of playback using the listening modes on page 71 ).
No digital sound is output.
Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is
connected to (see The Input Setup menu on page 59 ).
Check the digital output settings on the source component.
Other audio problems
Symptom Remedy
Broadcast stations cannot be
selected automatically, or there is
considerable noise in radio broad-
casts.
Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and secure to a
wall, etc.
Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see pages 31 , 45 ).
Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.
Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluorescent light,
motor, etc. Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the AM antenna.
Subwoofer output is very low.
To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL
(see Speaker Setting on page 107 ).
Everything seems to be set up cor-
rectly, but the playback sound is odd.
The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker terminals on
the receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see Con-
necting the speakers on page 23 ).
The Phase Control feature doesn’t
seem to have an audible effect.
If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass
cutoff is set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your sub-
woofer, set it to 0º (or depending on the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the
best overall effect on the sound).
Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker Distance
on page 108 ).
Can’t select some Input functions
by the INPUT SELECTOR on the
front panel or the ALL button on the
remote control.
Check the Input Skip settings in the Input Setup menu (see The Input Setup menu on
page 59 ).
Check the HDMI Input assignment in the Input Setup menu then try OFF (see The Input
Setup menu on page 59 ).
There seems to be a time lag
between the speakers and the output
of the subwoofer.
See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 57
to set up your system again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay
in the subwoofer output).
The maximum volume available
(shown in the front panel display) is
lower than the +12dB maximum.
Check that the Volume Limit is set to OFF (see Volume Setup on page 109 ).
The channel level setting may be over 0.0dB.
Certain listening modes or
HOME MENU items cannot be
selected.
Some functions cannot be selected, depending on the input signal and listening mode.
The volume level drops automati-
cally.
The temperature within the unit has exceeded the allowable value. Try moving the unit for
better ventilation (see Installing the receiver on page 10 ).
Volume seems different when input
is switched.
Set the Channel Level setting to ALL, then adjust the volume of the respective input
sources (see Input Volume Absorber on page 89 ).
Excluding VSX-830: When HDZONE is
ON, multi-channel audio sources are
not output in the main zone.
When HDZONE is selected in Speaker System and also the same HDMI input is selected
for both the main zone and HDZONE, 2-channel PCM audio sources are output from the
main zone as well. To output multi-channel audio sources, set HDZONE to OFF or change
the HDZONE input.
Excluding VSX-830: No HDZONE
sound is output.
With HDZONE, multi-channel audio may not be output. In this case, set the audio output
setting of your playback device to 2-channel PCM.
 
116
FAQ
14
BT AUDIO
Symptom Remedy
The Bluetooth wireless technology
device cannot be connected or oper-
ated. Sound from the Bluetooth wire-
less technology device is not emitted
or the sound is interrupted.
Check that no object that emits electromagnetic waves in the 2.4 GHz band (microwave
oven, wireless LAN device or Bluetooth wireless technology apparatus) is near the unit. If
such an object is near the unit, set the unit far from it. Or, stop using the object emitting
the electromagnetic waves.
Check that the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not too far from the unit and that
obstructions are not set between the Bluetooth wireless technology device and the unit.
Set the Bluetooth wireless technology device and the unit so that the distance between
them is less than about 10 m (33 ft.) and no obstructions exist between them.
The Bluetooth wireless technology device may not be set to the communication mode
supporting the Bluetooth wireless technology. Check the setting of the Bluetooth wireless
technology device.
Check that pairing is correct. The pairing setting was deleted from this unit or the Blue-
tooth wireless technology device. Reset the pairing.
Check that the profile is correct. Use a Bluetooth wireless technology device that sup-
ports A2DP profile and AVRCP profile.
Video
Symptom Remedy
No image is output when an input is
selected.
Check the video connections of the source component.
Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component
video or HDMI cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 59 ).
Check the video output settings of the source component.
Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.
Excluding VSX-830: When the HDMI OUT 1/2 setting of the output parameter function is
set to OFF, set it to ON.
Excluding VSX-830: If HDZONE is set to on, video images connected using a video cable or
component cable are not output from the HDMI terminal. To output video images, turn
HDZONE off (page 89 ).
When content that is protected by the HDCP 2.2 protocol is output from a source player,
output of video is not possible on televisions and projectors that do not support HDCP
2.2. Please prepare a television or projector that supports HDCP 2.2. Also, this receiver’s
HDCP 2.2 compatible input terminals are BD, HDMI IN 1, and HDMI IN 2. When making
connections other than the said terminal(s), please use these terminals instead.
Noisy, intermittent, or distorted
picture.
Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example),
or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The pic-
ture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Reconnect the
source and display device using the same type of connection (component or composite),
then start playback again.
Video parameters cannot be used. For audio only input (TUNER, CD, and TV), the video parameter function cannot be used.
Use for video or input with a GUI display.
Settings
Symptom Remedy
The Auto MCACC Setup continually
shows an error.
The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as pos-
sible (see also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 58 ). If the noise
level cannot be kept low enough, you will have to set up the surround sound manually
(page 106 ).
When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L
(Single) terminals.
To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround channel,
not the surround back channel.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.
If Reverse Phase is displayed, try the following:
— The speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker connections.
— Depending on the type of speakers and their installation conditions, Reverse Phase
may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected. If this happens, select
GO NEXT and continue.
— If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using
speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), it may not be
possible to properly identify the polarity.
After using the Auto MCACC Setup,
the speaker size setting is incorrect.
There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-conditioner,
motor, etc. Switch off all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.
Depending on a number of factors (bass reproduction capabilities of the speakers, room
size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some cases. Change the speaker setting
manually in Speaker Setting on page 107 , and use the ALL (Keep SP System) option for
the Auto MCACC menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 99 if this is a recurring
problem.
Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker Dis-
tance setting properly.
Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–)
terminals are matched up properly).
The display shows KEY LOCK ON
when you try to make settings.
With the receiver in standby, press u STANDBY/ON for about 5 seconds while holding
down SPEAKERS to disable the key lock.
Most recent settings have been
erased.
The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.
Settings are only stored if all the zones are turned off. Turn off all the zones before
unplugging the power cord.
The various system settings are not
stored.
Do not pull out the power cord while conducting the settings. (The settings will be stored
when both the main zone and sub zone turn off. Turn off all zones before pulling out the
power cord.)
Feels like there is no subwoofer EQ
effect.
The effect becomes less when the set frequency value of the crossover frequency is low.
When setting a high frequency value, the subwoofer EQ effect becomes stronger. How-
ever, setting a higher crossover frequency increases the share that the subwoofer bears
for low-frequency playback. For that reason, it is disadvantageous in terms of the phase
point of view. Set to your preference.
 
117
FAQ
14
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output
Symptom Remedy
The reverb characteristics graph
after EQ calibration does not appear
entirely flat.
There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJ
in the Auto MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room character-
istics to achieve optimal sound.
Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no
adjustment needed.
The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after mea-
surements.
EQ adjustments made using the
Manual MCACC setup do not appear
to change the reverb characteristics
graph after EQ calibration.
Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these
adjustments in the reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibration. However, these
adjustments are taken into account by the filters dedicated to overall system calibration.
Lower frequency response curves do
not seem to have been calibrated for
SMALL speakers.
Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for
speakers that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these
frequencies.
Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measur-
able sound is output for display.
Display
Symptom Remedy
The display is dark or off. Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.
The OSD screen is not displayed. The on-screen display is not displayed unless this receiver’s HDMI OUT terminal is con-
nected to the TV by HDMI cable. If the TV does not support HDMI, watch this receiver’s
front panel display when performing operations and making settings.
When the input is a 3D signal, OSD cannot be displayed.
Even through the input is switched,
DIGITAL does not light.
Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned cor-
rectly (see The Input Setup menu on page 59 ).
When playing Dolby Digital or DTS
sources, the receiver’s format indica-
tors do not light.
Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to
PCM.
Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or DTS is
selected.
When AUTO is set with the Auto
Phase Control Plus feature, ‘---’ is
displayed.
There are disks that cannot be adjusted using AUTO. Please adjust manually (page 85 ).
Remote control
Symptom Remedy
Cannot be remote controlled. Set the remote control unit’s remote control mode so that it matches the setting on the
main unit (see Operating multiple receivers on page 93 ).
Check whether the receiver’s remote control mode is properly set (see Remote Control
Mode Setup on page 110 ).
Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on page 10 ).
Be sure to operate within 7 m and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the front panel
(see Operating range of remote control unit on page 10 ).
Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control.
Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote
sensor.
Excluding VSX-830: Other compo-
nents can’t be operated with the
system remote.
If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the preset
codes.
The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset codes.
When commands from the remote control units of other devices are registered using the
learning function, in some cases they may not be learned properly. In this case, register
the commands again using the learning function (see page 94 ). If they still do not work,
they may be in a special format that cannot be registered on this receiver’s remote con-
trol. Operate the device using another remote control.
 
118
FAQ
14
HDMI
Symptom Remedy
The HDMI indicator blinks continu-
ously.
Check all the points below.
Video/audio is not output or is inter-
rupted.
This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are
also HDCP-compatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component or
composite video jacks.
Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with
this receiver (even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect using the component
or composite video jacks between source and receiver.
If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your
monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer
for support.
If video images do not appear on your TV, try adjusting the resolution, Deep Color or other
setting for your component.
While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate connection for
audio output.
To output signals in Deep Color, use an HDMI cable (High Speed HDMI
®
/
TM
Cable) to
connect this receiver to a component or TV with the Deep Color feature.
The picture and sound output get cut
off, or there is no output produced.
Influence from a TV whose power is set to standby may cause the picture or sound output
to not be produced or to get cut off. In this case, press OUT P., and make sure to use an
output other than the HDMI output to which that TV is connected.
No picture.
Try changing the SCAL setting (in Setting the Video options on page 87 ).
Excluding VSX-830: To use the HDMI OUT 2 terminal in the main zone, set the
MAIN/HDZONE Output Setting to MAIN (page 111 ).
No sound, or sound suddenly
ceases.
Check that the HDMI Audio setting is set to AMP (Setting the Audio options on page 85 ).
If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.
If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection for the
audio.
Check the audio output settings of the source component.
HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to be recognized. Due
to this, interruption in the audio may occur when switching between audio formats or
beginning playback.
Turning on/off the device connected to this unit’s HDMI OUT terminal during playback,
or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI cable during playback, may cause noise or inter-
rupted audio.
Noisy or distorted picture. Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example),
or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The
picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off
the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of
connection (component or composite), then start playback again.
If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your
monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer
for support.
Symptom Remedy
Synchronized operation not possible
using Control with HDMI function.
Check the HDMI connections.
The cable may be damaged.
Select ON for the Control Mode with HDMI setting (see HDMI Setup on page 82 ).
Turn the TV’s power on before turning on this receiver’s power.
Set the TV side Control with HDMI setting to on (see TV’s operating instructions).
Excluding VSX-830: Connect the TV to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal and set the HDMI output
to OUT 1. Then turn on first the TV’s power, then this receiver’s power.
Excluding VSX-830: When HDZONE is
set to ON, the video resolution and
number of audio channels for the
main zone side changes.
This is due to the HDMI connection specifications; it is not a malfunction. When play-
ing the same input in the main zone and HDZONE, video and audio signals that can be
output in common for all the devices connected to the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2
(HDZONE) terminals are set.
Excluding VSX-830: HDZONE cannot
be turned on.
Set Output Setting at MAIN/HDZONE to HDZONE (page 111 ).
Excluding VSX-830: When the input
source for the main or HDZONE is
switched or when the power of the
respective zones is turned on and
off, the audio or video of the HDMI
output terminal that is not being
operated is sometimes interrupted.
This is because the HDMI devices need to recognize each other again. This is not a
malfunction. If the picture is disturbed or not displayed, turn off the power of the devices
in all the zones, then try again. Also try temporarily turning the Network Standby and
Standby Through settings OFF.
Excluding VSX-830: Such menus as
the HOME MENU as well as the on-
screen display are not displayed for
HDMI OUT 1 or HDMI OUT 2.
Press OUT P. and switch the HDMI OUT 1/2 setting.
Cannot upscale to 4K.
Change SCAL. (page 87 )
Excluding VSX-830: 4K video is not
output even though a 4K compliant
TV is connected.
When the MAIN/HDZONE setting is MAIN and the HDMI output setting is OUT 1+2 and
when the MAIN/HDZONE setting is HDZONE and HDZONE is the same input as with the
main zone, video is output with the lower resolution of the TV connected to HDMI OUT 1
and HDMI OUT 2. When there is only one 4K compliant TV, connect it to HDMI OUT 1
and set the HDMI output setting to OUT 1 or turn off HDZONE so that video is only output
to the 4K compliant TV.
Even though a 4K/60p 4:4:4 24 bit
compatible TV is connected, the
4K/60p 4:4:4 24 bit video image is not
output correctly.
Set the HDMI 4K/60p signal output setting to 4:4:4 (page 88 ).
When the HDMI cable does not support 4K/60p 4:4:4 24 bit (18 Gbps transmission),
video images may not be output properly. In that case, replace the cable with a compat-
ible HDMI cable or change the HDMI 4K/60p signal output setting to 4:2:0 to watch the
4K/60p 4:2:0 24 bit video image.
Excluding VSX-830: The HDMI OUT 2 terminal does not output a 4K/60p 4:4:4 24 bit video
image if MAIN/HDZONE is set to HDZONE. Set MAIN/HDZONE to MAIN or use the
HDMI OUT 1 terminals.
You cannot input 4K/60p 4:4:4 24 bit video from HDMI IN 3 to IN 5 terminal or HDMI IN 6
(excluding VSX-830). Use BD IN, HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 terminal.
 
119
FAQ
14
MHL
Symptom Remedy
When playing an MHL-compatible
device connected to the MHL termi-
nal, the Standby Through function
does not work and the power turns
off.
The MHL device will not operate unless power is being supplied from this receiver. When
this receiver is in the Standby Through mode, power cannot be supplied due to reduced
power consumption. Because of this, the MHL device will not operate. This is not a mal-
function.
MHL-compatible device cannot be
operated with the remote control.
Press MHL to set the remote control to the MHL control mode.
MHL POW ERR is displayed on the
display.
There is a problem with the power supply for the MHL device. After turning OFF the
receiver, disconnect the MHL device, connect the MHL device again and then turn ON
the power of the receiver.
If the error is displayed even though the above operation is repeated several times,
there is a problem with the receiver or the MHL device. Disconnect the power cable and
request repair.
Built-in AVNavigator
Symptom Cause Remedy
AVNavigator does not inter-
act well with the receiver.
The receiver’s power is not turned
on.
Turn the receiver’s power on. (Wait about 60 seconds after
the power turns on for network functions to start.)
The receiver or computer is not
connected to the LAN.
Connect a LAN cable to the receiver or computer (pages
33 , 46 ).
The router’s power is off. Turn the router’s power on.
Network connections could be
restricted due to the computer’s
network settings, security settings,
etc.
Check the computer’s network settings, security settings,
etc.
In the middle of Wiring Navi,
you are instructed to turn
off the power of the unit and
then connect other equip-
ment or speakers.
This is to avoid failure of the
receiver due to a short-circuit
between cables or from static
electricity.
Per the Wiring Navi instructions, turn OFF the power
of the receiver. As long as the browser has not quit,
Wiring Navi resumes guidance upon turning ON the
receiver.
When Wiring Navi or
Interactive Operation Guide
(excluding VSX-830) is
started up, an alarm for
security protection will be
displayed by the browser.
This is because of the browser’s
security function.
This is not a problem. Perform the operation to authorize
the blocked contents.
AVNavigator screen is not
displayed on the browser.
This receiver’s IP address has not
been entered into the browser
correctly.
Check the receiver’s IP address and enter it correctly in the
browser (page 56 ).
Receiver settings cannot be
made from a browser.
JavaScript is disabled on the inter-
net browser.
Enable JavaScript.
The browser is not compatible with
JavaScript.
Use an internet browser that is compatible with JavaScript.
USB interface
Symptom Cause Remedy
The folders/files stored on a
USB memory device are not
displayed.
The folders/files are currently stored
in a region other than the FAT (File
Allocation Table) region.
Store the folders/files in the FAT region.
The number of levels in a folder is
more than 9.
Limit the maximum number of levels in a folder to 9 (page
64 ).
The audio files are copyrighted.
Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB memory device
cannot be played back (page 64 ).
A USB memory device is
not recognized.
The USB memory device does not
support the mass storage class
specifications.
Try using a USB memory device compatible with the mass
storage class specifications. Note that there are cases
where even the audio files stored on a USB memory device
compatible with the mass storage class specifications are
not played back on this receiver (page 64 ).
Connect the USB memory device and switch on this
receiver (pages 34 , 46 ).
A USB hub is currently being used.
This receiver does not support USB hubs (page 64 ).
This receiver recognizes the USB
memory device as a fraud.
Switch off and on again this receiver.
Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched off.
Change to an input other than iPod/USB, then set the input
back to iPod/USB.
A USB memory device is
connected and displayed,
but the audio files stored
on the USB memory device
cannot be played back.
Some formats of USB memory
devices, including FAT 12, NTFS, and
HFS, cannot be played back on this
receiver.
Check whether the format of your USB memory device is
either FAT 16 or FAT 32. Note that the FAT 12, NTFS, and
HFS formats cannot be played back on this receiver (page
64 ).
The file format cannot be properly
played back on this receiver.
See the list of file formats that can be played back on this
receiver (page 65 ).
The USB memory cannot be
operated with the remote
control.
Press iPod USB to set the remote control to the iPod USB
control mode.
Over Current shows in the
display.
There is a problem with the power supply for the USB
memory. After turning off the receiver, disconnect the USB
memory, connect the USB memory again and then turn on
the power of the receiver.
If Over Current is displayed even though the above opera-
tion is repeated several times, there is a problem with the
receiver or USB memory. Disconnect the power cable and
request repair.
 
120
FAQ
14
iPod
Symptom Cause Remedy
iPod is not recognized. This receiver recognizes the iPod as
a fraud.
Switch off and on again this receiver.
Reconnect the iPod with the receiver switched off.
Change to an input other than iPod/USB, then set the input
back to iPod/USB.
iPod touch/iPhone is not
recognized or otherwise
does not operate properly.
The iPod’s operation may be
unstable.
Try performing the operation below.
1. Press the sleep/sleep cancel button on the iPod touch/
iPhone simultaneously with the home button for at least 10
seconds to restart the device.
2. Turn this receiver’s power on.
3. Connect the iPod touch/iPhone to this receiver.
iPod cannot be operated
with the remote control.
Press iPod USB to set the remote control to the iPod USB
control mode.
No audio is output when
operating from an iPod.
Press iPod iPhone DIRECT CONTROL on the front panel,
to switch to iPod operation.
Network
Symptom Cause Remedy
Cannot access the network. The LAN cable is not firmly con-
nected.
Firmly connect the LAN cable (pages 33 , 46 ).
The router is not switched on. Switch on the router.
Internet security software is cur-
rently installed in the connected
component.
There are cases where a component with Internet security
software installed cannot be accessed.
The audio component on the net-
work which has been switched off is
switched on.
Switch on the audio component on the network before
switching on this receiver.
Fails Wireless Accessory
Configuration.
iOS equipment is not connected to
the Wi-Fi equipment.
Connect the iOS equipment to Wi-Fi.
Playback does not start
while “Connecting...” con-
tinues to be displayed.
The component is currently discon-
nected from this receiver or the
power supply.
Check whether the component is properly connected to
this receiver or the power supply.
The network function can-
not be operated with the
remote control.
Press NET to set the remote control to the network function
control mode.
The PC or Internet radio is
not properly operated.
The corresponding IP address is not
properly set.
Switch on the built-in DHCP server function of your router,
or set up the network manually according to your network
environment (page 51 ).
The IP address is being automati-
cally configured.
The automatic configuration process takes time. Please
wait.
Symptom Cause Remedy
The audio files stored on
components on the net-
work, such as a PC, cannot
be played back.
Windows Media Player 11 or
Windows Media Player 12 is not cur-
rently installed on your PC.
Install Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player
12 on your PC (page 76 ).
The audio file currently being played
back was not recorded in a format
playable on this receiver.
Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC cannot be
played back on Windows Media Player 11 or Windows
Media Player 12. Try using another server. Refer to the
operation manual supplied with your server.
The component connected to the
network is not properly operated.
Check whether the component is affected by special cir-
cumstances or is in the sleep mode.
Try rebooting the component if necessary.
The component connected to the
network does not permit file sharing.
Try changing the settings for the component connected to
the network.
The folder stored on the component
connected to the network has been
deleted or damaged.
Check the folder stored on the component connected to
the network.
Network connections could be
restricted due to the computer’s net-
work settings, security settings, etc.
Check the computer’s network settings, security settings,
etc.
Supported file formats vary by server.
As such, files not supported by your
server are not displayed on this unit.
For more information check with the manufacturer of your
server.
The audio files are copyrighted. DRM-protected audio files cannot be played back on this
receiver.
Cannot access the com-
ponent connected to the
network.
The component connected to the
network is not properly set.
If the client is automatically authorized, you need to enter
the corresponding information again. Check whether the
connection status is set to “Do not authorize”.
There are no playable audio files on
the component connected to the
network.
Check the audio files stored on the component connected
to the network.
 
121
FAQ
14
Symptom Cause Remedy
Audio playback is undesir-
ably stopped or disturbed.
The audio file currently being played
back was not recorded in a format
playable on this receiver.
Check whether the audio file was recorded in a format sup-
ported by this receiver.
Check whether the folder has been damaged or corrupted.
Note that there are cases where even the audio files listed
as playable on this receiver cannot be played back or
displayed (page 80 ).
The LAN cable is currently discon-
nected.
Connect the LAN cable properly (pages 33 , 46 ).
There is heavy traffic on the network
with the Internet being accessed on
the same network.
Use 100BASE-TX to access the components on the net-
work.
When in the DMR mode, depend-
ing on the external controller being
used, playback may be interrupted
when a volume operation is per-
formed from the controller.
In this case, adjust the volume from the receiver or remote
control.
There is a connection routed through
a wireless LAN on the same network.
The band frequency used for wireless LAN may not be suf-
ficient. Connect using wired LAN.
Place away from equipment that releases band frequency
electromagnetic waves used in wireless LAN communica-
tions (microwave oven, game console, etc.). If there is still
no improvement, stop using other equipment that releases
electromagnetic waves.
Entry of password is
requested when starting
AirPlay.
Enter the password set with AirPlay Password at Wireless
Accessory Configuration or Network Option. If you have
forgotten the password, it can be reset.
Cannot access Windows
Media Player 11 or
Windows Media Player 12.
In case of Windows Media Player
11: You are currently logged onto
the domain through your PC with
Windows Vista installed.
In case of Windows Media Player
12: You are currently logged onto
the domain through your PC with
Windows 7 or Windows 8 installed.
Instead of logging onto the domain, log onto the local
machine (page 77 ).
Cannot listen to Internet
radio stations.
The firewall settings for components
on the network are currently in
operation.
Check the firewall settings for components on the network.
You are currently disconnected from
the Internet.
Check the connection settings for components on the
network, and consult with your network service provider if
necessary (page 51 ).
The broadcasts from an Internet
radio station are stopped or inter-
rupted.
There are cases where you cannot listen to some Internet
radio stations even when they are listed in the list of Inter-
net radio stations on this receiver (page 77 ).
Symptom Cause Remedy
This unit cannot be
selected from the Spotify
application.
An Internet connection is required for both the mobile
digital device and this unit.
Connect the mobile digital device by Wi-Fi to the wireless
LAN router of the same network as the one to which this
unit is connected.
A Spotify Premium account (for a charge) must be regis-
tered on the Spotify application.
When this unit is in standby, it cannot be selected from the
Spotify application.
The sound of the Spotify
audio stream is not pro-
duced.
Check whether this unit is selected on the Spotify applica-
tion.
Check that contents are playing on the Spotify application.
If the above does not solve the problem, turn this unit’s
power off then back on.
Excluding VSX-830: With
an AV receiver that has
the ‘Network, Bluetooth
dNetwork Optiond
Play ZONE Setup’ option, the sound
may be playing in another zone.
If this is the case, set which zone the sound is to be played
in at the play zone settings.
This unit’s volume does not
increase when the volume
slider in the Spotify applica-
tion is raised.
A volume upper limit is provided so
that the volume will not inadvertently
go up too much.
To further increase the volume, use the remote control.
When the iControlAV5 or built-in AVNavigator application
is being used, you can use the application to increase the
volume.
Playback continues on
this unit when the Spotify
application is quit.
The Spotify audio stream continues
from this unit, even when the Spotify
application is quit.
To operate again, relaunch the Spotify application.
The main power cannot be
turned on with iControlAV5
and the like during network
standby.
When network communication
is disconnected during network
standby, the device switches to nor-
mal standby mode to reduce power
consumption during standby.
Turn the main power on with the button on the remote
control or main device.
Excluding VSX-830: When
DMR mode or AirPlay is
used from a computer,
smartphone, etc., the
sound is played in subzone.
Play ZONE Setup is not set to
MAIN.
Change Play ZONE Setup to MAIN (page 57 ).
 
122
FAQ
14
Wireless LAN
Symptoms Causes Remedies
Network cannot be
accessed via wireless LAN.
SSID uses double-byte characters
such as in the Japanese language.
This receiver is compatible only with single-byte alphanu-
merical characters and some symbols such as the under-
bar. If characters other than these are used, change the
SSID before executing network settings. Refer to the user’s
manual for your router for information on SSID.
There is distance or obstacles
between this receiver and equipment
including the wireless LAN router.
Improve the wireless LAN environment such as making the
distance between this receiver and equipment including
wireless LAN router closer.
There is a microwave oven or other
device generating electromagnetic
waves near the wireless LAN envi-
ronment.
Use the system in a place away from microwave ovens or
others device generating electromagnetic waves.
Avoid using devices generating electromagnetic waves as
much as possible when using the system with the wireless
LAN.
Multiple devices are connected to
the wireless LAN router.
When connecting multiple devices to the wireless LAN
router, the IP address of the connected devices must be
changed.
The wireless LAN connection set-
tings of this receiver and equipment
such as wireless LAN router is not
correct.
When wireless LAN connections for this receiver and wire-
less LAN router are not setup, the connection between this
receiver and equipment such as the wireless LAN router
must be set.
The IP address settings of this
receiver do not match the settings of
the wireless LAN router and the like.
Check the IP address settings (including DHCP settings)
of this receiver.
If the receiver’s DHCP setting is “ON”, turn the receiver’s
power off, then turn the power back on.
Check that the IP address for this receiver matches the
settings of the wireless LAN router.
If the receiver’s DHCP setting is “OFF”, set an IP address
matching the network of the base unit (wireless LAN
router, etc.).
For example, if the wireless LAN router’s IP address
is “192.168.1.1”, set the receiver’s IP address to
“192.168.1.XXX” (*1), the subnet mask to “255.255.255.0”,
the gateway and DNS to “192.168.1.1”.
(*1) Set the “XXX” in “192.168.1.XXX” to a number between
2 and 248 that is not assigned to other devices.
The access point is set to conceal
the SSID.
In this case, it may not be shown in the access point list
screen. If it is not shown, set the SSID etc. of this receiver.
The access point’s security settings
use WEP 152-bit length code key or
shared key authentication.
The receiver does not support WEP 152-bit length code key
or shared key authentication.
There is a possibility that the chan-
nel used by the wireless network is
a wireless channel that cannot be
used with this receiver.
Change the wireless network channel to a wireless channel
that can be used with this receiver, then check the con-
nection.
Wireless Direct is not
connected when the main
power of this receiver is
turned off once and turned
on again.
The Security Protocol is set to
None.
Because there are security risks, settings are necessary to
connect to Wireless Direct again. Set Security Protocol of
Wireless Direct to WEP (page 55 ).
 
123
 
About Wi-Fi
®
.................................................................................................................................124
SABRE DAC
TM
................................................................................................................................124
About HDMI .................................................................................................................................124
HTC Connect .................................................................................................................................124
About iPod ...................................................................................................................................124
Windows 8 ...................................................................................................................................125
MHL ...............................................................................................................................................125
About Bluetooth wireless technology .......................................................................................125
Software license notice ............................................................................................................... 125
Surround sound formats .............................................................................................................126
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats .........................127
Speaker Setting Guide ................................................................................................................128
About messages displayed when using network functions ....................................................129
Important information regarding the HDMI connection .........................................................129
Cleaning the unit .........................................................................................................................129
Declaration of Conformity with regard to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC ............................130
Glossary ........................................................................................................................................ 131
Features index..............................................................................................................................134
Specifications ...............................................................................................................................135
Preset code list .............................................................................................................................137
Additional information
124
Additional information
15
About Wi-Fi
®
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance.
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Identifier Mark is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance.
SABRE DAC
TM
SABRE DAC
TM
and the logo are trademarks of ESS Technology, Inc.
About HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a digital transfer standard for receiving video and audio data with
a single cable. It is an adaptation of DVI (Digital Visual Interface), a display connection technology, for use in
home audio devices. This interface standard is for next-generation TVs providing High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection (HDCP).
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and other countries.
HTC Connect
HTC, HTC Connect and the HTC Connect logo are trademarks of HTC Corporation.
About iPod
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion or later,
and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
USB works with iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPod
touch (4th through 5th generation) and iPod nano (4th through 7th generation).
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect spe-
cifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance
standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory
standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
Apple, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, iTunes, Safari, Bonjour, Mac, Mac OS and OS X are trade-
marks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
The AirPlay logo is a trademark of Apple Inc.
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
 
125
Additional information
15
Windows 8
This product is Windows 8 Compatible.
Windows
®
and the Windows logo are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies.
MHL
MHL, the MHL Logo, and Mobile High-Definition Link are trademarks or registered trademarks of MHL, LLC in the
United States and other countries.
About Bluetooth wireless technology
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by PIONEER CORPORATION is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their
respective owners.
Software license notice
About Apple Lossless Audio Codec
Copyright © 2011 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
About FLAC
FLAC Decoder
Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
Josh Coalson
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
! Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
! Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the follow-
ing disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
! Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
About Spotify
The Spotify software is subject to third party licenses found here:
www.spotify.com/connect/third-party-licenses
 
126
Additional information
15
About Performance Audio Framework
Copyright (C) 2004-2014 Texas Instruments Incorporated - http://www.ti.com/
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
! Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
! Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the follow-
ing disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
! Neither the name of Texas Instruments Incorporated nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Surround sound formats
Below is a brief description of the main surround sound formats you’ll find on BDs, DVDs, satellite, cable and
terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes.
Dolby
The Dolby technologies are explained below. See http://www.dolby.com for more detailed information.
In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos, Dolby Surround, and the double-D sym-
bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
In case of VSX-830
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
DTS
The DTS technologies are explained below. See http://www.dts.com for more detailed information.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD,
the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of
DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD,
the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
 
127
Additional information
15
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal
formats
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Stream Direct
mode (see Using Stream Direct on page 72 ) you have selected.
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats
In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930
Input signal format
Auto Surround / PURE DIRECT / DIRECT
ALC
Rendering Mode :
OBJECT
Rendering Mode :
LEGACY
Dolby: 2.0 Surround
Dolby Surround Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Surround Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby Surround Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD
DTS Surround
Neo:6 CINEMA
DTS
Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback
Analog sources
As above/ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
<a>
As above
PCM sources Stereo playback As above
DVD-A sources As above As above
SACD sources
As above/DSD DIRECT (stereo)
<b>
As above
a ANALOG DIRECT is available when the listening mode set to PURE DIRECT.
b DSD DIRECT is available when the listening mode set to PURE DIRECT.
In case of VSX-830
Input signal format
Auto Surround /
DIRECT
ALC PURE DIRECT
Dolby: 2.0 Surround
Pro Logic II MOVIE
Dolby Digital
Pro Logic II MOVIE
DTS Surround
Neo:6 CINEMA
DTS
Neo:6 CINEMA
Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback Stereo playback
Analog sources As above As above ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
PCM sources As above As above Stereo playback
DVD-A sources As above As above As above
SACD sources As above As above As above
Multichannel signal formats
In case of VSX-1130/VSX-930
Input signal format
Auto Surround / PURE DIRECT / DIRECT
ALC
Rendering Mode :
OBJECT
Rendering Mode :
LEGACY
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected
Dolby: Surround EX
Dolby Surround Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Surround Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby Surround Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD
DTS-HD Master Audio ES (6.1
channel flagged)
DTS-ES (Matrix) DTS
DTS-ES (6.1 channel
sources/6.1 channel flagged)
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete) DTS
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel
sources
Straight decoding Straight decoding
Top middle/Front wide speakers: Connected
Dolby: Surround EX
Dolby Surround Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Surround Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby Surround Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD
DTS-HD Master Audio ES (6.1
channel flagged)
Straight decoding DTS
DTS-ES (6.1 channel
sources/6.1 channel flagged)
Straight decoding DTS
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel
sources
Straight decoding Straight decoding
Surround Back, Top middle and Front wide speakers: Not connected
All 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources Straight decoding Straight decoding
In case of VSX-830
Input signal format
Auto Surround /
DIRECT
ALC PURE DIRECT
All 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources Straight decoding Straight decoding Straight decoding
Dolby Atmos format
Excluding VSX-830
Input signal format
Auto Surround / PURE DIRECT / DIRECT
ALC
Rendering Mode :
OBJECT
Rendering Mode :
LEGACY
Surround Back/Top middle/Front wide speaker(s): Connected
Dolby Atmos
Dolby Atmos
Channel decode Channel decode
Surround Back, Top middle and Front wide speakers: Not connected
Dolby Atmos Channel decode Channel decode Channel decode
 
128
Additional information
15
Speaker Setting Guide
In order to achieve an even better surround effect, it is important to accurately position the speakers and make
their volume and tone characteristics uniform so as to finely focus the multi-channel sound.
The three major elements in positioning the speakers are distance, angle and orientation (the direction in
which the speakers are pointing).
Distance: The distance of all the speakers should be equal.
Angle: The speakers should be horizontally symmetrical.
Orientation: The orientation should be horizontally symmetrical.
In most homes, however, it is not possible to achieve this environment. For the distance, on this receiver it is pos-
sible to automatically correct the speaker distance electrically to a precision of 1 cm using the Full Auto MCACC
Setup function (page 57 ).
Step 1: Speaker layout and distance adjustment
Use speaker stands or the like to make sure the speakers are steady, and leave at least 10 cm from the surround-
ing walls. Position the speakers attentively so that the speakers on the left and right are at equal angles from the
listening position (center of the adjustments). (We recommend using cords, etc., when adjusting the layout.)
Ideally all the speakers should be equidistant from the listening position.
Note
If the speakers cannot be set at equal distances (on a circle), use the Auto MCACC Setup speaker distance cor-
rection and Fine Speaker Distance functions to make them equalize the distance artificially.
Step 2: Adjusting the speaker height
Adjust the heights (angles) of the different speakers.
Adjust so that the front speaker units reproducing mid- and high frequencies is roughly at the height of the ears.
If the center speaker cannot be set at the same height as the front speakers, adjust its angle of elevation to point
it to the listening position.
Set surround speaker 1 so that it is not under the height of the ears.
Step 3: Adjusting the speaker orientation
If the left and right speakers are not pointing in the same direction, the tone will not be the same on the right
and left, and as a result the sound field will not be reproduced properly. However, if all the speakers are pointed
towards the listening position, the sound field will seem cramped. Testing by the Pioneer Multi-channel Research
Group has shown that a good sense of sound positioning can be achieved by pointing all the speakers towards an
area 30 cm to 80 cm behind the listening position (between the surround speakers and the listening position).
However, the sense of sound positioning can differ according to the conditions in the room and the speakers
being used. In smaller environments in particular (when the front speakers are close to the listening position),
with this method the speakers will be pointed too inward. We suggest you use this example of installation as
reference when trying out different installation methods.
Step 4: Positioning and adjusting the subwoofer
Placing the subwoofer between the center and front speakers makes even music sources sound more natural (if
there is only one subwoofer, it doesn’t matter if it is placed on the left or right side). The low bass sound output
from the subwoofer is not directional and there is no need to adjust the height. Normally the subwoofer is placed
on the floor. Put it in a position at which it will not cancel out the bass sound output from the other speakers.
Also note that placing it near a wall may result in sympathetic vibrations with the building that could excessively
amplify the bass sound.
If the subwoofer must be installed near a wall, place it at an angle so that it is not parallel to the wall surface. This
can help reduce any sympathetic vibrations, but depending on the shape of the room this could result in stand-
ing waves. However, even if standing waves are generated, their influence on the sound quality can be prevented
using the Auto MCACC’s standing wave control function (page 102 ).
Step 5: Default settings with the Auto MCACC Setup (auto sound field
correction) function
It is more effective to perform the Full Auto MCACC Setup (page 57 ) procedure once the adjustments described
above have been completed.
Note
The distance to the subwoofer may be slightly larger than the distance actually measured with a tape measure,
etc. This is because this distance is corrected for electric delay, and is not a problem.
Positional relationship between speakers and monitor
Position of front speakers and monitor
The front speakers should be as equidistant as possible to the monitor.
L
R
45° to 60°
 
129
Additional information
15
Position of center speaker and monitor
Since mostly dialogs are output from the center speaker, keeping the center speaker as close as possible to the
screen makes the overall sound more natural. For TVs using Braun tubes, however, when installing the center
speaker on the floor, adjust its angle of elevation to point it towards the listening position.
Installation on floor
(Diagram as seen
from the side)
Monitor
! If the center speaker is not of the shielded type, install it away from the TV.
! When installing the center speaker on top of the monitor, place it facing slightly downwards towards the listen-
ing position.
About messages displayed when using network functions
Refer to the following information when you come up with a status message while operating the Network
functions.
Status messages Descriptions
Connection Down
The selected category or Internet radio station cannot be accessed.
File Format Error
Cannot be played back for some reasons.
Track Not Found
The selected song has not been found anywhere on the network.
Server Error
The selected server cannot be accessed.
Server Disconnected
The server has been disconnected.
Empty
There are no files stored in the selected folder.
License Error
The license for the contents to be played back is invalid.
Item Already Exists
This is displayed when the file you have attempted to register in the Favorites folder has
already been registered.
Favorite List Full
This is displayed when you have attempted to register a file in the Favorites folder but the
Favorites folder is already full.
Important information regarding the HDMI connection
There are cases where you may not be able to route HDMI signals through this receiver (this depends on
the HDMI-equipped component you are connecting-check with the manufacturer for HDMI compatibility
information).
If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly through this receiver (from your component), please try one of the
following configurations when connecting up.
Configuration A
Use component video cables to connect the video output of your HDMI-equipped component to the receiver’s
component video input. The receiver can then convert the analog component video signal to a digital HDMI sig-
nal for transmission to the display. For this configuration, use the most convenient connection (digital is recom-
mended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the operating instructions for more on audio connections.
Note
The picture quality will change slightly during conversion.
Configuration B
Connect your HDMI-equipped component directly to the display using an HDMI cable. Then use the most conve-
nient connection (digital is recommended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the operating instructions for
more on audio connections. Set the display volume to minimum when using this configuration.
Notes
! If your display only has one HDMI terminal, you can only receive HDMI video from the connected component.
! Depending on the component, audio output may be limited to the number of channels available from the
connected display unit (for example audio output is reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with stereo audio
limitations).
! If you want to switch the input function, you’ll have to switch functions on both the receiver and your display
unit.
! Since the sound is muted on the display when using the HDMI connection, you must adjust the volume on the
display every time you switch input functions.
Cleaning the unit
! Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and dirt.
! When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six times with
water, and wrung out well, and then wipe again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or cleansers.
! Never use thinners, benzene, insecticide sprays or other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will cor-
rode the surface.
 
130
Additional information
15
Declaration of Conformity with regard to the R&TTE Directive
1999/5/EC
Manufacturer:
PIONEER HOME ELECTRONICS
CORPORATION
1-1, Shin-ogura, Saiwai-ku,
Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa
212-0031, Japan
EU Representative’s:
Pioneer Europe NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1,
9120 Melsele, Belgium
http://www.pioneer.eu
English:
Suomi:
Nederlands
:
Français:
Svenska:
Dansk:
Deutsch:
Ελληνικά:
Italiano:
Español:
Hereby, Pioneer, declares that this [*] is
in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Pioneer vakuuttaa täten että [*]
tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY
oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä
koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen
mukainen.
Hierbij verklaart Pioneer dat het toestel
[*] in overeenstemming is met de
essentiële eisen en de andere
relevante bepalingen van richtlijn
1999/5/EG
Par la présente Pioneer déclare que
l’appareil [*] est conforme aux
exigences essentielles et aux autres
dispositions pertinentes de la directive
1999/5/CE
Härmed intygar Pioneer att denna [*]
står I överensstämmelse med de
väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga
relevanta bestämmelser som framgår
av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Undertegnede Pioneer erklærer
herved, at følgende udstyr [*]
overholder de væsentlige krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF
Hiermit erklärt Pioneer, dass sich
dieses [*] in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den
anderen relevanten Vorschriften der
Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet". (BMWi)
ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Pioneer ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ
ΟΤΙ
[*] ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ
ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ
ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ
ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ
Con la presente Pioneer dichiara che
questo [*] è conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni
pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva
1999/5/CE.
Por medio de la presente Pioneer
declara que el [*] cumple con los
requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera
otras disposiciones aplicables o
exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE
[*] VSX-1130-K, VSX-930-K, VSX-930-S, VSX-830-K, VSX-830-S
Indoor use only
Português:
Čeština:
Eesti:
Magyar
:
Latviešu valoda:
Lietuvių kalba:
Malti
:
Slovenčina:
Slovenščina:
Română:
български:
Polski:
Norsk:
Íslenska:
Pioneer declara que este [*] está
conforme os requisitos essenciais e
outras disposições da Directiva
1999/5/CE.
Pioneer tímto prohlašuje, že tento [*] je
ve shodě se základními požadavky a
dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními
směrnice 1999/5/ES
Käesolevaga kinnitab Pioneer seadme
[*] vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist
tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele
sätetele.
Alulírott, Pioneer nyilatkozom, hogy a
[*] megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC
irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Ar šo Pioneer deklarē, ka [*] atbilst
Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem
noteikumiem.
Šiuo Pioneer deklaruoja, kad šis [*]
atitinka esminius
reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB
Direktyvos nuostatas.
Hawnhekk, Pioneer jiddikjara li dan [*]
jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma
provvedimenti oħrajn
relevanti li hemm
fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC
Pioneer týmto vyhlasuje, že [*] spĺňa
základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné
ustanovenia Smernice
1999/5/ES.
Pioneer izjavlja, da je ta [*] v skladu z
bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi določili direktive
1999/5/ES.
Prin prezenta, Pioneer declara ca acest
[*] este in conformitate cu cerintele
esentiale si alte prevederi ale Directivei
1999/5/EU.
С настоящето, Pioneer декларира, че
този [*] отговаря на основните
изисквания и други съответни
постановления на Директива
1999/5/EC.
Niniejszym Pioneer oświadcza, że
[*] jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymo-
gami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi
postanowieniami
Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC
Pioneer erklærer herved at utstyret [*]
er i samsvar med de grunnleggende
krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv
1999/5/EF.
Hér með lýsir Pioneer yfir því að
[*] er í samræmi við
grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar
eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC
Hrvatski:
Ovime tvrtka Pioneer izjavljuje da je
ovaj [*] u skladu osnovnim zahtjevima i
ostalim odredbama Direktive
1999/5/EC.
R-TTE-24L_C2_En
 
131
Additional information
15
Glossary
Audio formats/Decoding
Dolby
The Dolby technologies are explained below. See http://www.dolby.com for more detailed information.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD and
digital broadcast soundtracks.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is the lossless encoding technology developed for high-definition optical discs in the upcoming
era.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is the audio technology for all high-definition programming and media. It combines the effi-
ciency to meet future broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to realize the full audio potential expected
in the upcoming high-definition era.
Dolby Atmos
Features
! Provides a powerful and dramatically new listening experience for cinema sound.
! Creates a 3 dimensional listening environment where sounds can be transported through the room.
! Reproduces a natural sound that matches the story exactly and sounds as if real.
! Addition of audio elements in the height space above the listener. Height audio is reproduced by either over-
head or Dolby enabled speakers.
! The original intention of the producers can be expressed, no matter what kind of system setup you have in your
home.
Technical information
! Placement for clearer, more accurate cinema sound is possible. With mixing that uses “objects”, independent
sound elements can be superimposed on channel-based material.
! By importing all of the intentions of the director as meta data, it is possible to customize play back for every
home.
! Soundtracks are scaled to achieve best performance through your specific speaker system.
! Dolby Atmos uses a multi layering approach for building soundtracks. In combination with the conventional
channel-based method, the base layer is composed of mainly motionless environmental sounds. On top of
this layer is the layer that realizes the sound elements that have “movement”. Here, sound can be placed and
moved so that it is linked accurately with the images on-screen.
In the meta data, it is indicated how this type of sound element will act when it is played back. This indication
enables playback that reflects the intention of the director as much as possible, in any playback environment.
This dual-layer approach not only allows moviemakers to freely make full use of a variety of expressions, but
also enables users to experience the intentions of the producer in any type of home theater setup.
! Dolby Atmos contents are required to enjoy Dolby Atmos. For Blu-ray discs with Dolby Atmos, Dolby Atmos
can be played by connecting most conventional Blu-ray discs with this receiver using HDMI.
DTS
The DTS technologies are explained below. See http://www.dts.com for more detailed information.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding system from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video, DVD-
Audio, 5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and video games.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master audio sources recorded in a professional studio to
listeners without any loss of data, preserving audio quality.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
A high definition audio technology by which signals can be transferred over HDMI cables.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources.
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 can generate 7.1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and
from 5.1 channel sources.
Decoding
A technology for converting digital signals that have been compressed upon recording by a digital signal process-
ing circuit, etc., into the original signals. The term “decoding” (or “matrix decoding”) is also used for the technol-
ogy which converts 2-channel sound sources into multiple channels or expands 5.1-channel signals into 6.1 or
7.1 channels.
Calibrating the sound field/Improving the sound quality
Phase Control
The Phase Control technology incorporated into this receiver’s design provides coherent sound reproduction
through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound image at your listening position.
Phase Control Plus (Auto Phase Control Plus)
Corrects the delay in the contents’ low frequency effects (LFE). When properly corrected, the bass sound is more
powerful, improving the balance of the sound.
When AUTO is selected, the contents are analyzed in real time, allowing them to be played in optimal conditions.
This is effective for contents with low frequency effects (LFE), such as Dolby Digital 5.1-channel contents.
Virtual Speakers
Virtual playback of a maximum of 11.2 channels combining the actually installed speakers and the virtual speak-
ers is possible. This makes for smoother connection between the sounds and an improved 3D feel.
Virtual Surround Back
When you’re not using surround back speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround back
channel through your surround speakers. You can choose to listen to sources with no surround back channel
information.
Virtual Height
Settings to create virtual front height channel audio.
Virtual Wide
When you’re not using front wide speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual front wide channel
through your front speakers.
Auto Sound Retriever
The Auto Sound Retriever feature employs DSP technology to restore sound pressure and smooth jagged arti-
facts left over after compression.
With some audio inputs, the Sound Retriever effect is automatically optimized based on the bitrate information of
the contents that have been input to achieve high sound quality.
Sound Retriever Air
Sound Retriever Air compensates for reduced sound quality due to compression when sending Bluetooth signals.
 
132
Additional information
15
ALC (Auto Level Control)
In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this receiver equalizes playback sound levels.
Also, the low and high frequency sounds, dialogs, surround effects, etc., that are difficult to hear when the vol-
ume is low are adjusted to be optimal for the volume level. This mode is particularly optimum when listening at
night.
Front Stage Surround Advance
With the Front Stage Surround Advance feature, you can enjoy seamless, natural surround sound effects using
only the front speakers, without deteriorating the quality of the original sound.
MCACC
The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate surround sound setup, which includes the advanced fea-
tures of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ.
HDMI
Control with HDMI function
Synchronized operations below with a Control with HDMI-compatible Pioneer TV or Blu-ray Disc player are pos-
sible when the component is connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable.
! The receiver’s volume can be set and the sound can be muted using the TV’s remote control.
! The receiver’s input switches over automatically when the TV’s input is changed or a Control with HDMI-
compatible component is played.
! The receiver’s power is also set to standby, when the TV’s power is set to standby.
ARC (Audio Return Channel)
When a TV supporting the HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel) function is connected to the receiver, the sound of
the TV can be input via the HDMI OUT terminal.
The sound of the TV can be input from the receiver’s HDMI OUT terminal, so connection with the TV can be com-
pleted with a single HDMI cable.
Network function
AirPlay
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion or later,
and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
For more information, see the Apple website (http://www.apple.com).
DLNA
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a cross-industry organization of consumer electronics, comput-
ing industry and mobile device companies. Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of digital media
through a wired or wireless network in the home.
vTuner
vTuner is a paid online database service that allows you to listen to radio and TV broadcasts on the Internet.
vTuner lists thousands of stations from over 100 different countries around the globe. For more detail about
vTuner, visit the following website:
http://www.radio-pioneer.com
“This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of NEMS and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of
such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from NEMS and BridgeCo or an authorized
subsidiary.”
Apple Lossless (ALAC)
“ALAC” stands for Apple Lossless Audio Codec. This is a loseless type audio codec and is used for example for
iTunes
®
. It compresses non-compressed files (such as WAV and AIFF) to about one half the original size with no
loss of sound quality.
FLAC
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) is an audio format allows lossless codec. Audio is compressed in FLAC with-
out any loss in quality. For more details about FLAC, visit the following website:
http://flac.sourceforge.net/
Windows Media
Windows Media is a multimedia framework for media creation and distribution for Microsoft Windows. Windows
Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Use an application licensed by Microsoft Corporation to author, distribute, or play Windows Media formatted
content. Using an application unauthorized by Microsoft Corporation is subject to malfunction.
Windows Media Player 11/Windows Media Player 12
Windows Media Player is software to deliver music, photos and movies from a Microsoft Windows computer to
home stereo systems and TVs.
With this software, you can play back files stored on the PC through various devices wherever you like in your
home.
This software can be downloaded from Microsoft’s website.
! Windows Media Player 11 (for Windows Vista)
! Windows Media Player 12 (for Windows 7 or Windows 8)
For more information check the official Microsoft website.
Router
A device for relaying data flowing on a network to another network. In homes, routers often also function as
DHCP servers. Products with built-in wireless LAN access points are called “wireless LAN routers”.
DHCP
Abbreviation of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol for automatically assigning such setting infor-
mation as IP addresses within network connections. This offers convenience in that, when enabled, it allows
network functions to be used simply by connecting the devices to the network.
Wireless LAN/Wi-Fi
“Wi-Fi” (Wireless Fidelity) is a trademark coined by the Wi-Fi Alliance trade association to increase recognition
of wireless LAN standards. With the increase in the number of devices connected to computers in recent years,
Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with LAN cables by using wire-
less connection. As a way of reassuring users, products that have passed interoperability tests carry the logo
“Wi-Fi Certified” to indicate that compatibility is assured.
WPS
Abbreviation of Wi-Fi Protected Setup. A standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance industry group for a function
allowing settings related to interconnection of WPS-compatible wireless LAN devices and encryption to be made
with simple operations. There are a number of methods, including push-button configuration and PIN code con-
figuration. This AV receiver supports both push-button configuration and PIN code configuration.
SSID
Abbreviation of Service Set IDentifier. A wireless LAN access point identifier. Can be set as desired using up to 32
characters of English letters and numbers.
 
133
Additional information
15
Bluetooth function
Bluetooth wireless technology
A short-range wireless communications standard for digital devices. Information is exchanged between devices
several meters to several tens of meters apart using radio waves. It uses radio waves on the 2.4 GHz band which
does not require applications for licenses or usage registration for applications conducting wireless exchange
of digital information at relatively low speeds, such as computer mouses and keyboards, mobile phones, smart-
phones, text and audio information for PDAs, etc.
Receiver function
MHL
MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is an interface standard for transmitting digital signals with mobile devices.
MHL can carry high quality multi-channel audio data and 3D/Full-HD video formats.
“This receiver incorporates MHL 2.”
 
134
Additional information
15
Features index
AVNavigator
See How to use the built-in AVNavigator on page 49 .
ECO MODE 1, 2
See Using the Advanced surround effects on page 72 .
HDZONE
See Making MULTI-ZONE connections on page 32 .
HTC Connect
See About HTC Connect on page 77 .
Pandora
See Listening to Pandora Internet Radio on page 78 .
Play ZONE
See Play ZONE Setup on page 57 .
4K pass through/up scaling
See About HDMI on page 27 .
Full Auto MCACC
See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 57 .
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 99 .
Manual MCACC setup
See Manual MCACC setup on page 101 .
Phase Control
See Better sound using Phase Control on page 73 .
Standing Wave
See Setting the Audio options on page 85 .
Phase Control Plus
See Setting the Audio options on page 85 .
Auto Sound Retriever
See Setting the Audio options on page 85 .
ALC (Auto Level Control)
See Auto playback on page 71 .
Front Stage Surround Advance
See Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes on page 71 .
Sound Retriever Air
See Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes on page 71 .
Dialog Enhancement
See Setting the Audio options on page 85 .
Internet radio
See Listening to Internet radio stations on page 77 .
vTuner
See Listening to Internet radio stations on page 77 .
DLNA
See About network playback on page 79 .
AirPlay
See Using AirPlay on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad, and iTunes on page 76 .
Wireless LAN
See Connecting to the network through LAN interface on page 33 (VSX-1130/VSX-930) or 46 (VSX-830).
Playback High Resolution audio file
See About playable file formats on page 80 .
See Playing a USB device on page 64 .
Slideshow
See Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device on page 64 .
Bluetooth
See Music playback using Bluetooth wireless technology on page 67 .
ARC (Audio Return Channel)
See HDMI Setup on page 82 .
Auto delay
See Setting the Audio options on page 85 .
Virtual Surround Back
See Setting the Audio options on page 85 .
Virtual Height
See Setting the Audio options on page 85 .
Virtual Wide
See Setting the Audio options on page 85 .
Digital Video Converter
See Setting the Video options on page 87 .
Pure Cinema
See Setting the Video options on page 87 .
Progressive Motion
See Setting the Video options on page 87 .
Advanced Video Adjust
See Setting the Video options on page 87 .
Auto Power Down
See The Other Setup menu on page 109 .
 
135
Additional information
15
Specifications
Audio Section (VSX-1130/VSX-930)
Rated power output (1 kHz, 6 W, 1 %)
Front, Center, Surround, Surround back ....................................................................................150 W per channel
Rated power output (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 W, 0.09 %)
Front, Center, Surround, Surround back ....................................................................................105 W per channel
For Oceania model: Maximum power output (1 kHz, 6 W, 10 %)
Front, Center, Surround, Surround back ....................................................................................160 W per channel
Total harmonic distortion ....................................................................................0.06 % (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W/ch, 8 W)
Guaranteed speaker impedance ..................................................................................................................... 6 W to 16 W
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)
LINE .................................................................................................................................................................. 101 dB
Frequency Response ................................................................................ 5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB (Pure Direct Mode)
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)
LINE .......................................................................................................................................................315 mV/47 kW
Audio Section (VSX-830)
Rated power output (1 kHz, 6 W, 1 %)
Front, Center, Surround ...............................................................................................................130 W per channel
Rated power output (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 W, 0.09 %)
Front, Center, Surround ...............................................................................................................100 W per channel
Total harmonic distortion ....................................................................................0.06 % (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W/ch, 8 W)
Guaranteed speaker impedance ..................................................................................................................... 6 W to 16 W
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)
LINE .................................................................................................................................................................. 100 dB
Frequency Response ................................................................................ 5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB (Pure Direct Mode)
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)
LINE .......................................................................................................................................................315 mV/47 kW
Tuner Section
Frequency Range (FM) ....................................................................................................................87.5 MHz to 108 MHz
Antenna Input (FM) ................................................................................................................................ 75 W unbalanced
Frequency Range (AM) ..................................................................................................................... 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
Antenna (AM) ............................................................................................................................ Loop antenna (balanced)
Video Section
Signal level
Composite Video .................................................................................................................................... 1 Vp-p (75 W)
Component Video (excluding VSX-830) .................................................. Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 W), PB/PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 W)
Corresponding maximum resolution
Component Video (excluding VSX-830) ...............................................................................................1080p (1125p)
Bluetooth Section
Version ................................................................................................................ Bluetooth Specification Ver. 2.1 + EDR
Output .............................................................................................................................. Bluetooth Specification Class 2
Estimated line-of-sight transmission distance* ............................................................................................About 10 m
*The line-of-sight transmission distance is an estimate. Actual transmission distances supported may differ
depending on surrounding conditions.
Frequency range .................................................................................................................................................... 2.4 GHz
Supported Bluetooth profiles ..................................................................................................................... A2DP, AVRCP
Supported Codec .................................................................................................................SBC (Subband Codec), AAC
Digital In/Out Section
HDMI terminal ......................................................................................................................................... 19-pin (Not DVI)
HDMI output type .............................................................................................................................................. 5 V, 55 mA
HDMI input/MHL terminal ............................................................................................................................. 5 V, 900 mA
USB terminal ..........................................................................................................USB2.0 High Speed (Type A) 5 V, 1 A
iPod terminal ............................................................................................................................................................... USB
Integrated Control Section (excluding VSX-830)
Control (IR) terminal ....................................................................................................................ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)
IR signal .............................................................................................................................High Active (High Level: 2.0 V)
Network Section (Wired)
LAN terminal ...............................................................................................................................10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX
Network Section (Wireless)
WLAN standards .................................................................... IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
Frequency band
2.4 GHz band (2.412 GHz to 2.472 GHz) ............................................................................. Channel 1 to Channel 13
5 GHz band (5.180 GHz to 5.240 GHz) .............................................................................. Channel 36 to Channel 48
Security .......................................................................................................................................Disabled (no encryption)
WEP (Key length: 64 bit/128 bit, Key format: ASCII/Hex)
WPA2 Mixed (WPA/WPA2, Encryption method: TKIP/AES, Recognition method: PSK)
Miscellaneous
Power requirements ........................................................................................................ AC 220 V to 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption ...................................................................................550 W (VSX-1130/VSX-930)/450 W (VSX-830)
In standby ............................................................................................................................................................0.1 W
In standby (HDMI control on) ............................................................................................................................0.3 W
In standby (Network standby on) .......................................................................................................................2.7 W
In standby (Network standby on, wireless LAN connected) ............................................................................3.0 W
In standby (HDMI control on, Network standby on) .........................................................................................2.7 W
In standby (HDMI control on, Network standby on, wireless LAN connected) ..............................................3.0 W
Auto power down .....................................................................................................15 min (default), 30 min, 60 min, off
Dimensions
VSX-1130/VSX-930 ..................................................................................... 435 mm (W) x 168 mm (H) x 363 mm (D)
VSX-830 ................................................................................................... 435 mm (W) x 168 mm (H) x 331.5 mm (D)
Weight (without package)
VSX-1130 ........................................................................................................................................................... 10.2 kg
VSX-930 ............................................................................................................................................................... 9.8 kg
VSX-830 ............................................................................................................................................................... 8.7 kg
Number of Furnished Parts
MCACC Setup microphone .............................................................................................................................................. 1
Remote control unit .......................................................................................................................................................... 1
AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries .................................................................................................................................. 2
AM loop antenna ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
FM wire antenna ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
Power cord
CD-ROM
Quick start guide
Safety Brochure
Warranty sheet
 
136
Additional information
15
Notes
! These specifications are applicable when the power supply is 230 V.
! Specifications and the design are subject to possible modifications without notice, due to improvements.
! This product includes FontAvenue
®
fonts licensed by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of
NEC Corporation.
! iOS is a trademark on which Cisco holds the trademark right in the US and certain other countries.
! Microsoft, Windows, Windows Media and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
! Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
! Corporation and product names mentioned herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective
corporations.
 
137
Additional information
15
Preset code list
Excluding VSX-830
You should have no problem controlling a component if you find the manufacturer in this list, but please note that
there are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using. There
are also cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code.
Important
! We do not guarantee the operations of all the manufacturers and devices listed. Operation may not be possible
even if a preset code is entered.
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control, you can still teach the remote
individual commands from another remote control (see Programming signals from other remote controls on
page 94 ).
 
TV
Pioneer 0113, 0233, 0252,
0275, 0291, 0295, 0296, 0305
A.R. Systems 0155
Acme 0141
Acura 0142, 0154
ADC 0140
Admiral 0138, 0139, 0140,
0145, 0146
Adyson 0141, 0228, 0229
Agashi 0228, 0229
Agazi 0140
Aiko 0141, 0142, 0154, 0155,
0228, 0229
Aim 0155
Aiwa 0199
Akai 0142, 0143, 0149, 0152,
0154, 0155, 0228, 0229
Akiba 0143, 0155
Akura 0140, 0143, 0154,
0155
Alaron 0228
Alba 0125, 0141, 0142, 0143,
0147, 0150, 0152, 0154, 0155,
0190, 0193, 0203, 0228
Alcyon 0132
Allorgan 0229
Allstar 0149, 0155
AMOi 0224
Amplivision 0125, 0141,
0156, 0229
Amstrad 0140, 0142, 0143,
0154, 0155
Anam 0142
Anglo 0142, 0154
Anitech 0132, 0140, 0142,
0154, 0155
Ansonic 0125, 0133, 0142,
0144, 0154, 0155
Arcam 0228, 0229
Arcam Delta 0141
Aristona 0149, 0152, 0155
Arthur Martin 0156
ASA 0138, 0146
Asberg 0132, 0149, 0155
Astra 0142
Asuka 0140, 0141, 0143,
0228, 0229
Atlantic 0141, 0149, 0152,
0155, 0228
Atori 0142, 0154
Auchan 0156
Audiosonic 0125, 0141,
0142, 0143, 0149, 0152, 0155,
0229
AudioTon 0125, 0141, 0229
Ausind 0132
Autovox 0132, 0138, 0140,
0141, 0229
Awa 0228, 0229
Baird 0229
Bang & Olufsen 0138, 0230
Basic Line 0142, 0143, 0149,
0154, 0155, 0229
Bastide 0141, 0229
Baur 0152, 0155
Bazin 0229
Beko 0125, 0150, 0155, 0175
Benq 0219
Beon 0149, 0152, 0155
Best 0125
Bestar 0125, 0149, 0155
Binatone 0141, 0229
Blue Sky 0143, 0155
Blue Star 0151
Boots 0141, 0229
BPL 0151, 0155
Brandt 0148, 0153, 0157,
0159
Brinkmann 0155
Brionvega 0138, 0149, 0152,
0155
Britannia 0141, 0228, 0229
Bruns 0138
BTC 0143
Bush 0142, 0143, 0145, 0147,
0149, 0151, 0152, 0154, 0155,
0180, 0193, 0229
Capsonic 0140
Carena 0155
Carrefour 0147
Cascade 0142, 0154, 0155
Casio 0221
Cathay 0149, 0152, 0155
CCE 0229
Centurion 0149, 0152, 0155
Century 0138
CGE 0125, 0132
Cimline 0142, 0154
City 0142, 0154
Clarivox 0152
Clatronic 0125, 0132, 0140,
0141, 0142, 0143, 0149, 0150,
0154, 0155, 0229
CMS 0228
CMS Hightec 0229
Concorde 0142, 0154
Condor 0125, 0141, 0149,
0150, 0154, 0155, 0228
Contec 0141, 0142, 0147,
0154, 0228
Continental Edison 0148
Cosmel 0142, 0154
Crosley 0132, 0138
Crown 0125, 0132, 0142,
0149, 0150, 0152, 0154, 0155
CS Electronics 0141, 0143,
0228
CTC Clatronic 0144
Cybertron 0143
Daewoo 0128, 0141, 0142,
0149, 0154, 0155, 0169, 0179,
0206, 0228, 0229
Dainichi 0143, 0228
Dansai 0140, 0149, 0152,
0155, 0228, 0229
Dantax 0125, 0152
Dawa 0155
Daytron 0142, 0154
De Graaf 0145
Decca 0141, 0149, 0152,
0155, 0229
Denver 0213, 0218
Desmet 0149, 0152, 0155
Diamant 0155
Diamond 0228
Dixi 0142, 0149, 0152, 0154,
0155, 0229
DTS 0142, 0154
Dual 0141, 0155, 0229
Dual-Tec 0141, 0142
Dumont 0138, 0141, 0144,
0229
Dux 0152
Dynatron 0149, 0152, 0155
Elbe 0125, 0133, 0155, 0229
Elcit 0138
Electa 0151
ELECTRO TECH 0142
Elin 0141, 0149, 0152, 0154,
0155, 0228
Elite 0143, 0149, 0155
Elman 0144
Elta 0142, 0154, 0228
Emerson 0125, 0138, 0155
Epson 0216
Erres 0149, 0152, 0155
ESC 0229
Etron 0142
Eurofeel 0229, 0140
Euroline 0152
Euroman 0125, 0140, 0141,
0149, 0155, 0228, 0229
Europhon 0141, 0144, 0149,
0155, 0228, 0229
Expert 0156
Exquisit 0155
Fenner 0142, 0154
Ferguson 0148, 0152, 0153,
0157
Fidelity 0141, 0145, 0155,
0228
Filsai 0229
Finlandia 0145
Finlux 0132, 0138, 0141,
0144, 0149, 0152, 0155, 0229
Firstline 0141, 0142, 0149,
0154, 0155, 0228, 0229
Fisher 0125, 0138, 0141,
0147, 0150, 0229
Flint 0149, 0155
Formenti 0132, 0138, 0139,
0141, 0152, 0228
Formenti/Phoenix 0228
Fortress 0138, 0139
Fraba 0125, 0155
Friac 0125
Frontech 0140, 0142, 0145,
0146, 0154, 0229
Fujitsu 0229
Fujitsu General 0229
Funai 0140
Galaxi 0155, 0150
Galaxis 0125, 0155
GBC 0142, 0147, 0154
Geant Casino 0156
GEC 0141, 0146, 0149, 0152,
0155, 0229
Geloso 0142, 0145, 0154
General Technic 0142, 0154
Genexxa 0143, 0146, 0149,
0155
Giant 0229
GoldHand 0228
Goldline 0155
Goldstar 0125, 0141, 0142,
0145, 0149, 0152, 0154, 0155,
0228, 0229
Goodmans 0140, 0142,
0147, 0149, 0152, 0154, 0155,
0222, 0229
Gorenje 0125, 0150
GPM 0143
Graetz 0146
Granada 0132, 0141, 0145,
0147, 0149, 0152, 0155, 0156,
0229
Grandin 0142, 0143, 0151,
0152
Gronic 0229
Grundig 0124, 0125, 0132,
0155, 0162
Halifax 0140, 0141, 0228,
0229
Hampton 0141, 0228, 0229
Hanseatic 0125, 0133, 0141,
0142, 0147, 0149, 0152, 0154,
0155, 0229
Hantarex
0142, 0154, 0155
Hantor 0155
Harwood 0154, 0155
HCM 0140, 0141, 0142, 0151,
0154, 0155, 0229
Hema 0154, 0229
Higashi 0228
HiLine 0155
Hinari 0142, 0143, 0147,
0149, 0152, 0154, 0155
Hisawa 0143, 0151, 0156
Hitachi 0137, 0141, 0145,
0146, 0147, 0155, 0191, 0226,
0229
Hornyphon 0149, 0155
Hoshai 0143
Huanyu 0141, 0228
Hygashi 0141, 0228, 0229
Hyper 0141, 0142, 0154,
0228, 0229
Hypson 0140, 0141, 0149,
0151, 0152, 0155, 0156, 0229
Iberia 0155
ICE 0140, 0141, 0142, 0143,
0149, 0154, 0155, 0228, 0229
ICeS 0228
Imperial 0125, 0132, 0146,
0149, 0150, 0155
Indiana 0149, 0152, 0155
Ingelen 0146
Ingersol 0142, 0154
Inno Hit 0132, 0141, 0142,
0143, 0149, 0152, 0154, 0155,
0229
Innovation 0140, 0142
Interactive 0125
Interbuy 0142, 0154
Interfunk 0125, 0138, 0146,
0149, 0152, 0155
International 0228
Intervision 0125, 0140,
0141, 0144, 0155, 0229
Irradio 0132, 0142, 0143,
0149, 0152, 0154, 0155
Isukai 0143, 0155
ITC 0141, 0229
ITS 0143, 0149, 0151, 0155,
0228
ITT 0142, 0146
ITV 0142, 0152, 0155
JVC 0134, 0135, 0147, 0149,
0192
Kaisui 0141, 0142, 0143,
0151, 0154, 0155, 0228, 0229
Kamosonic 0141
Kamp 0141, 0228
Kapsch 0146
Karcher 0125, 0141, 0142,
0152, 0155
Kawasho 0228
Kendo 0125, 0144, 0145,
0155
KIC 0229
Kingsley 0141, 0228
Kneissel 0125, 0133, 0155
Kolster 0149, 0155
Konka 0143
Korpel 0149, 0152, 0155
Korting 0125, 0138
Kosmos 0155
Koyoda 0142
KTV 0141, 0229
Kyoto 0228, 0229
Lasat 0125
Lenco 0142, 0154
Lenoir 0141, 0142, 0154
Leyco 0140, 0149, 0152, 0155
LG 0125, 0136, 0141, 0142,
0145, 0149, 0152, 0154, 0155,
0186, 0189, 0196, 0220, 0228,
0229
LG/GoldStar 0129
Liesenk 0152
Liesenkotter 0155
Life 0140, 0142
Lifetec 0140, 0142, 0154,
0155
Lloyds 0154
Loewe 0125, 0133, 0155,
0166, 0167
Loewe Opta 0138, 0149,
0152
Luma 0145, 0152, 0154, 0155
Lumatron 0145, 0149, 0152,
0155, 0229
Lux May 0149
Luxor 0141, 0145, 0229
M Electronic 0141, 0142,
0146, 0148, 0149, 0152
Magnadyne 0138, 0144,
0152
Magnafon 0132, 0141, 0144,
0228
Magnum 0140, 0142
Mandor 0140
Manesth 0140, 0141, 0149,
0152, 0155, 0229
Marantz 0149, 0152, 0155
Marelli 0138
Mark 0149, 0152, 0154, 0155,
0228, 0229
Masuda 0229
Matsui 0141, 0142, 0145,
0147, 0149, 0152, 0154, 0155,
0229
Mediator 0149, 0152, 0155
Medion 0140, 0142, 0155
M-Electronic 0154, 0155,
0228, 0229
Melvox 0156
Memorex 0142, 0154
Memphis 0142, 0154
Mercury 0154, 0155
Metz 0138, 0299, 0300, 0301,
0302
Micromaxx 0140, 0142
Microstar 0140, 0142
Minerva 0132
Minoka 0149, 0155
Mitsubishi 0138, 0147, 0149,
0155, 0200
Mivar 0125, 0132, 0133,
0141, 0228, 0229
Motion 0132
MTC 0125, 0228
Multi System 0152
Multitech 0125, 0141, 0142,
0144, 0145, 0147, 0152, 0154,
0155, 0228, 0229
Murphy 0141, 0228
138
Additional information
15
 
Naonis 0145
NEC 0147, 0229
Neckermann 0125, 0138,
0141, 0145, 0149, 0150, 0152,
0155, 0229
NEI 0149, 0152, 0155
Neufunk 0154, 0155
New Tech 0142, 0149, 0154,
0155, 0229
New World 0143
Nicamagic 0141, 0228
Nikkai 0140, 0141, 0143,
0149, 0152, 0154, 0155, 0228,
0229
Nobliko 0132, 0141, 0144,
0228
Nokia 0146
Nordic 0229
Nordmende 0138, 0146,
0148, 0149
Nordvision 0152
Novatronic 0155
Oceanic 0146, 0156
Okano 0125, 0150, 0155
ONCEAS 0141
Opera 0155
Orbit 0149, 0155
Orion 0142, 0149, 0152,
0154, 0155, 0194
Orline 0155
Osaki 0140, 0141, 0143,
0155, 0229
Oso 0143
Otto Versand 0139, 0141,
0147, 0149, 0151, 0152, 0155,
0229
Pael 0141, 0228
Palladium 0125, 0141, 0150,
0155, 0229
Palsonic 0229
Panama 0140, 0141, 0142,
0154, 0155, 0228, 0229
Panasonic 0123, 0146, 0155,
0158, 0164, 0214, 0217
Panavision 0155
Pathe Cinema 0125, 0133,
0141, 0156, 0228
Pausa 0142, 0154
Perdio 0155, 0228
Perfekt 0155
Philco 0125, 0132, 0138,
0155
Philharmonic 0141, 0229
Philips 0115, 0117, 0138,
0141, 0149, 0152, 0155, 0160,
0163, 0165, 0170, 0171, 0173,
0174, 0182, 0183, 0195, 0196,
0202, 0205, 0212, 0215
Phoenix 0125, 0138, 0149,
0152, 0155, 0228
Phonola 0138, 0149, 0152,
0155, 0228
Plantron 0140, 0149, 0154,
0155
Playsonic 0229
Poppy 0142, 0154
Prandoni-Prince 0132, 0145
Precision 0141, 0229
Prima 0142, 0146, 0154
Profex 0142, 0154
Profi-Tronic 0149, 0155
Proline 0149, 0155
Prosonic 0125, 0141, 0152,
0155, 0228, 0229, 0232
Protech 0140, 0141, 0142,
0144, 0149, 0152, 0229
Provision 0152, 0155
Pye 0149, 0152, 0155, 0198
Pymi 0142, 0154
Quandra Vision 0156
Quelle 0140, 0141, 0149,
0152, 0155, 0229
Questa 0147
Radialva 0155
Radio Shack 0155
Radiola 0149, 0152, 0155,
0229
Radiomarelli 0138, 0155
Radiotone 0125, 0149, 0154,
0155
Rank 0147
Recor 0155
Redstar 0155
Reflex 0155
Revox 0125, 0149, 0152,
0155
Rex 0140, 0145, 0146
RFT 0125, 0133, 0138
Rhapsody 0228
R-Line 0149, 0152, 0155
Roadstar 0140, 0142, 0143,
0154
Robotron 0138
Rowa 0228, 0229
Royal Lux 0125
RTF 0138
Saba 0138, 0146, 0148, 0153,
0157, 0159
Saisho 0140, 0141, 0142,
0154, 0229
Salora 0145, 0146
Sambers 0132, 0144
Samsung 0119, 0120, 0125,
0140, 0141, 0142, 0149, 0150,
0152, 0154, 0155, 0177, 0178,
0181, 0204, 0208, 0228, 0229
Sandra 0141, 0228, 0229
Sansui 0149, 0155
Sanyo 0125, 0133, 0141,
0147, 0154, 0187, 0228, 0229
SBR 0152, 0155
SCHAUB LORENTZ 0146
Schneider 0141, 0143, 0149,
0152, 0155, 0190, 0229
SEG 0140, 0141, 0144, 0147,
0152, 0154, 0155, 0190, 0228,
0229
SEI 0155
SEI-Sinudyne 0138, 0144,
0146
Seleco 0145, 0146, 0147
Sencora 0142, 0154
Sentra 0154
Serino 0228
Sharp 0130, 0131, 0139,
0147, 0184, 0207
Siarem 0138, 0144, 0155
Sierra 0149, 0155
Siesta 0125
Silva 0228
Silver 0147
Singer 0138, 0144, 0156
Sinudyne 0138, 0144, 0152,
0155
Skantic 0146
Skyworth 0307
Solavox 0146
Sonitron 0125, 0229
Sonoko 0140, 0141, 0142,
0149, 0152, 0154, 0155, 0229
Sonolor 0146, 0156
Sontec 0125, 0149, 0152,
0155
Sony 0116, 0118, 0142, 0147,
0161, 0168, 0172, 0185, 0188,
0197, 0201, 0211, 0225, 0227
Sound & Vision 0143, 0144
Soundwave 0149, 0152,
0155
Standard 0141, 0142, 0143,
0149, 0154, 0155, 0229
Starlight 0152
Starlite 0154, 0155
Stenway 0151
Stern 0145, 0146
Strato 0154, 0155
Stylandia 0229
Sunkai 0142
Sunstar 0154, 0155
Sunwood 0142, 0149, 0154,
0155
Superla 0141, 0228, 0229
SuperTech 0154, 0155, 0228
Supra 0142, 0154
Susumu 0143
Sutron 0142, 0154
Sydney 0141, 0228, 0229
Sysline 0152
Sytong 0228
Tandy 0139, 0141, 0143,
0146, 0229
Tashiko 0144, 0145, 0147,
0228, 0229
Tatung 0141, 0149, 0152,
0155, 0229
TCL 0308
TCM 0140, 0142
Teac 0155, 0229
Tec 0141, 0142, 0154, 0229
TEDELEX 0229
Teleavia 0148
Telecor 0155, 0229
Telefunken 0148, 0149,
0155, 0157
Telegazi 0155
Telemeister 0155
Telesonic 0155
Telestar 0155
Teletech 0142, 0152, 0154,
0155
Teleton 0141, 0229
Televideon 0228
Televiso 0156
Tensai 0142, 0143, 0149,
0154, 0155, 0229
Tesmet 0149
Tevion 0140, 0142
Texet 0141, 0154, 0228, 0229
Thomson 0121, 0122, 0141,
0148, 0149, 0153, 0155, 0157,
0159, 0210
Thorn 0152, 0155
Tokai 0149, 0155, 0229
Tokyo 0141, 0228
Tomashi 0151
Toshiba 0126, 0127, 0147,
0176, 0209, 0229
Towada 0146, 0229
Trakton 0229
Trans Continens 0155, 0229
Transtec 0228
Trident 0229
Triumph 0155
Vestel 0145, 0146, 0149,
0150, 0152, 0155, 0229
Vexa 0142, 0152, 0154, 0155
Victor 0147, 0149
VIDEOLOGIC 0228
Videologique 0141, 0143,
0228, 0229
VideoSystem 0149, 0155
Videotechnic 0228, 0229
Viewsonic 0223
Visiola 0141, 0228
Vision 0149, 0155, 0229
Vortec 0149, 0152, 0155
Voxson 0132, 0138, 0145,
0146, 0149, 0155
Waltham 0141, 0155, 0229
Watson 0149, 0152, 0155
Watt Radio 0141, 0144,
0228
Wega 0138, 0147, 0155
Wegavox 0154
Weltblick 0149, 0152, 0155,
0229
White Westinghouse 0141,
0144, 0152, 0155, 0228
Xrypton 0155
Yamishi 0155, 0229
Yokan 0155
Yoko 0125, 0140, 0141, 0142,
0143, 0149, 0152, 0154, 0155,
0228, 0229
Yorx 0143
Zanussi 0145, 0229
Pioneer 2014
AEG 2188
Aiwa 2149
Akai 2096
Akura 2186
Alba 2122, 2133, 2143
Amitech 2188
AMW 2189
Awa 2189
Bang & Olufsen 2191
Bellagio 2189
Best Buy 2185
Brainwave 2188
Brandt 2112, 2139
Bush 2122, 2143, 2177, 2184
Cambridge Audio 2180
CAT 2182, 2183
Centrum 2183
CGV 2180, 2188
Cinetec 2189
Clatronic 2184
Coby 2190
Conia 2177
Continental Edison 2189
Crown 2188
C-Tech 2181
CyberHome 2103, 2132
Daenyx 2189
Daewoo 2130, 2154, 2188,
2189
Daewoo International
2189
Dalton 2187
Dansai 2179, 2188
Daytek 2105, 2128, 2189
Dayton 2189
DEC 2184
Decca 2188
Denon 2161, 2163
Denver 2164, 2184, 2186,
2190
Denzel 2178
Diamond 2180, 2181
DK Digital 2129
Dmtech 2095
Dual 2178
DVX 2181
Easy Home 2185
Eclipse 2180
Electrohome 2188
Elin 2188
Elta 2142, 2188
Enzer 2178
Finlux 2180, 2188
Gericom 2145
Global Solutions 2181
Global Sphere 2181
Goodmans 2122, 2165, 2184
Graetz 2178
Grundig 2148
Grunkel 2188
H&B 2184
Haaz 2180, 2181
HiMAX 2185
Hitachi 2110, 2178, 2185
Innovation 2097
JVC 2119, 2136, 2152
Kansai 2190
Kennex 2188
Kenwood 2146
KeyPlug 2188
Kiiro 2188
Kingavon 2184
Kiss 2178
Koda 2184
KXD 2185
Lawson 2181
Lecson 2179
Lenco 2184, 2188
LG 2111, 2115, 2135, 2138,
2160, 2171
Life 2097
Lifetec 2097
Limit 2181
Loewe 2151
LogicLab 2181
Magnavox 2184
Majestic 2190
Marantz 2157
Marquant 2188
Matsui 2139
Mecotek 2188
Medion 2097
MiCO 2180
Micromaxx 2097
Microstar 2097
Minoka 2188
Mizuda 2184, 2185
Monyka 2178
Mustek 2101
Mx Onda 2180
Naiko 2188
Neufunk 2178
Nevir 2188
NU-TEC 2177
Onkyo 2167
Optim 2179
Optimus 2099
Orava 2184
Orbit 2189
Orion 2156
P&B 2184
Pacific 2181
Panasonic 2113, 2114, 2121,
2127, 2131, 2170
Philips 2100, 2106, 2117,
2118, 2126, 2134, 2157
Pointer 2188
Portland 2188
Powerpoint 2189
Prosonic 2190
Provision 2184
Raite 2178
RedStar 2186, 2188, 2190
Reoc 2181
Roadstar 2116, 2184
Ronin 2189
Rowa 2177
Rownsonic 2183
Saba 2112, 2139
Sabaki 2181
Saivod 2188
Samsung 2110, 2137, 2158,
2173, 2176
Sansui 2180, 2181, 2188
Sanyo 2140, 2166
ScanMagic 2101
Schaub Lorenz 2188
Schneider 2095
Scientific Labs 2181
Scott 2120, 2187
SEG 2116, 2178, 2181, 2189
Sharp 2097, 2141, 2174
Sigmatek 2185
Silva 2186
Singer 2180, 2181
Skymaster 2153, 2181
Skyworth 2186
Slim Art 2188
SM Electronic 2181
Sony 2104, 2108, 2123, 2124,
2125, 2150, 2175
Soundmaster 2181
Soundmax 2181
Spectra 2189
Standard 2181
Star Cluster 2181
Starmedia 2184
Sunkai 2188
DVD
If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations with the preset
codes for the BD, DVR (BDR, HDR).
139
Additional information
15
 
BD
If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations with the preset
codes for the DVD, DVR (BDR, HDR).
Pioneer 2034, 2192, 2255,
2258, 2259, 2260, 2281
Denon 2310, 2311, 2312
Hitachi 2307, 2308, 2309
JVC 2290, 2291, 2293, 2294,
2295, 2296
LG 2286, 2287
Marantz 2302, 2303
Mitsubishi 2300, 2301
Onkyo 2289
Panasonic 2277, 2278, 2279
Philips 2280
Samsung 2282
Sharp 2304, 2305, 2306
Sony 2283, 2284, 2285, 2292
Toshiba 2288, 2262
Yamaha 2297, 2298, 2299
DVR (BDR, HDR)
If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations with the preset
codes for the DVD, BD.
Pioneer 2078, 2099, 2107,
2109, 2144, 2157, 2193, 2194,
2195, 2196, 2258, 2259, 2260,
2261, 2264, 2265, 2266, 2270
Panasonic 2263, 2269
Sharp 2267, 2275
Sony 2268, 2271, 2272, 2273,
2276
Toshiba 2274
VCR
Pioneer 1053, 1108
Adyson 1050
Aiwa 1033, 1034, 1035
Akai 1034
Akiba 1040, 1050
Akura 1034, 1040, 1050
Alba 1035, 1036, 1037, 1040,
1050, 1051
Ambassador 1037
Amstrad 1033, 1050, 1051
Anitech 1040, 1050
ASA 1038, 1039
Asuka 1033, 1038, 1039,
1040, 1050
Audiosonic 1051
Baird 1033, 1034, 1036, 1051
Bang & Olufsen 1052
Basic Line 1035, 1036, 1037,
1040, 1050, 1051
Baur 1039
Bestar 1036, 1037, 1051
Black Panther Line 1036,
1051
Blaupunkt 1039
Bondstec 1037, 1050
Bush 1035, 1036, 1040, 1050,
1051
Cathay 1051
Catron 1037
CGE 1033, 1034
Cimline 1035, 1040, 1050
Clatronic 1037, 1050
Condor 1036, 1037, 1051
Crown 1036, 1037, 1040,
1050, 1051
Daewoo 1036, 1037, 1051
Dansai 1040, 1050, 1051
Dantax 1035
Daytron 1036, 1051
De Graaf 1039
Decca 1033, 1034, 1039
Denko 1050
Dual 1034, 1051, 1060
Dumont 1033, 1039
Elbe 1051
Elcatech 1050
Elsay 1050
Elta 1040, 1050, 1051
Emerson 1050
ESC 1036, 1051
Etzuko 1040, 1050
Ferguson 1034
Fidelity 1033, 1050
Finlandia 1039
Finlux 1033, 1034, 1039
Firstline 1035, 1038, 1040,
1050
Flint 1035
Formenti/Phoenix 1039
Frontech 1037
Fujitsu 1033
Funai 1033
Galaxy 1033
GBC 1037, 1040
GEC 1039
Geloso 1040
General 1037
General Technic 1035
GoldHand 1040, 1050
Goldstar 1033, 1048
Goodmans 1033, 1036,
1037, 1038, 1040, 1050, 1051
Graetz 1034
Granada 1039
Grandin 1033, 1036, 1037,
1038, 1040, 1050, 1051
Grundig 1039, 1040
Hanseatic 1038, 1039, 1051
Harwood 1050
HCM 1040, 1050
Hinari 1035, 1040, 1050,
1051
Hisawa 1035
Hitachi 1033, 1034, 1039,
1045
Hypson 1035, 1040, 1050,
1051
Impego 1037
Imperial 1033
Inno Hit 1036, 1037, 1039,
1040, 1050, 1051
Innovation 1035
CD
Pioneer 5000, 5011, 5062,
5063, 5064, 5067, 5068, 5070,
5071, 5072, 5073, 5074, 5075
AKAI 5043
Asuka 5045
Denon 5019
Fisher 5048
Goldstar 5040
Hitachi 5042
Kenwood 5020, 5021, 5031
Luxman 5049
Marantz 5033
Onkyo 5017, 5018, 5030,
5050
Panasonic 5036
Philips 5022, 5032, 5044
RCA 5013, 5029
Roadstar 5052
Sharp 5051
Sony 5012, 5023, 5026, 5027,
5028, 5039
TEAC 5015, 5016, 5034, 5035,
5037
Technics 5041
Victor 5014
Yamaha 5024, 5025, 5038,
5046, 5047
Supervision 2181
Synn 2181
Tatung 2130, 2188
TCM 2097
Teac 2162, 2177, 2181
Tec 2186
Technika 2188
Telefunken 2183
Tensai 2188
Tevion 2097, 2181, 2187
Thomson 2098, 2112, 2155,
2159
Tokai 2178, 2186
Toshiba 2102, 2156, 2168,
2169, 2172
TRANScontinents 2189
Trio 2188
TruVision 2185
Wharfedale 2180, 2181
Xbox 2098
Xlogic 2181, 2188
XMS 2188
Yamada 2189
Yamaha 2106
Yamakawa 2178, 2189
Yukai 2101, 2147
Interbuy 1038, 1050
Interfunk 1039
Intervision 1033, 1051
Irradio 1038, 1040, 1050
ITT 1034
ITV 1036, 1038, 1051
JVC 1034, 1046
Kaisui 1040, 1050
Karcher 1039
Kendo 1035, 1036, 1037,
1050
Korpel 1040, 1050
Kyoto 1050
Lenco 1036
Leyco 1040, 1050
LG 1033, 1038, 1049
Lifetec 1035
Loewe Opta 1038, 1039
Logik 1040, 1050
Lumatron 1036, 1051
Luxor 1050
M Electronic 1033
Manesth 1040, 1050
Marantz 1039
Mark 1051
Matsui 1035, 1038
Matsushita 1033, 1039
Mediator 1039
Medion 1035
Memorex 1033, 1038
Memphis 1040, 1050
Micromaxx 1035
Microstar 1035
Migros 1033
Multitech 1033, 1037, 1039,
1040, 1050
Murphy 1033
NEC 1034
Neckermann 1034, 1039
NEI 1039
Nesco 1040, 1050
Nikkai 1037, 1050, 1051
Nokia 1034, 1051
Nordmende 1034
Oceanic 1033, 1034
Okano 1035, 1050, 1051
Orion 1035
Orson 1033
Osaki 1033, 1038, 1040, 1050
Otto Versand 1039
Palladium 1034, 1038, 1040,
1050
Panasonic 1043
Pathe Marconi 1034
Perdio 1033
Philco 1050
Philips 1039, 1045, 1052
Phonola 1039
Portland 1036, 1037, 1051
Prinz 1033
Profex 1040
Proline 1033
Prosonic 1035, 1051
Pye 1039
Quelle 1033, 1039
Radialva 1050
Radiola 1039
Rex 1034
RFT 1037, 1039, 1050
Roadstar 1036, 1038, 1040,
1050, 1051
Royal 1050
Saba 1034
Saisho 1035, 1040
Samsung 1041
Samurai 1037, 1050
Sansui 1034
Saville 1051
SBR 1039
Schaub Lorenz 1033, 1034
Schneider 1033, 1035, 1036,
1037, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1050,
1051
SEG 1040, 1050, 1051
SEI-Sinudyne 1039
Seleco 1034
Sentra 1037, 1050
Sentron 1040, 1050
Sharp 1042
Shintom 1040, 1050
Shivaki 1038
Siemens 1038
Silva 1038
Silver 1051
Sinudyne 1039
Solavox 1037
Sonneclair 1050
Sonoko 1036, 1051
Sontec 1038
Sony 1044
Standard 1036, 1051
Stern 1051
Sunkai 1035
Sunstar 1033
Suntronic 1033
Sunwood 1040, 1050
Symphonic 1050
Taisho 1035
Tandberg 1051
Tashiko 1033
Tatung 1033, 1034, 1039
TCM 1035
Teac 1051
Tec 1037, 1050, 1051
Teleavia 1034
Telefunken 1034
Teletech 1050, 1051
Tenosal 1040, 1050
Tensai 1033, 1038, 1040,
1050
Tevion 1035
Thomson 1034, 1048
Thorn 1034
Tokai 1038, 1040, 1050
Tonsai 1040
Toshiba 1034, 1039, 1047
Towada 1040, 1050
Towika 1040, 1050
TVA 1037
Uher 1038
Ultravox 1051
United Quick Star 1036,
1051
Universum 1033, 1038, 1039
Videon 1035
Weltblick 1038
Yamishi 1040, 1050
Yokan 1040, 1050
Yoko 1037, 1038, 1040, 1050
140
Additional information
15
 
Satellite Set Top Box
Pioneer 6220, 6219, 6204
@sat 6251
@Sky 6238
ABsat 6180
Acoustic Solutions 6217
ADB 6174
Akai 6214
Akura 6228
Alba 6176, 6200, 6180, 6217
Allsat 6214
Alltech 6180
Allvision 6252, 6238, 6199
Amitronica 6180
Ampere 6256, 6261
Amstrad 6202, 6243, 6256,
6261, 6236, 6180
Anglo 6180
Ankaro 6180
Ansonic 6245
Anttron 6200
Apollo 6176
Apro 6232
Arcon 6192
Arcus 6193
Armstrong 6214
Arnion 6251
ASA 6230
Asat 6214
ASCI 6213, 6238
ASLF 6180
AssCom 6220
Astra 6255, 6180
Astratec 6268, 6269
Astrell 6202
Astro 6177, 6236, 6255,
6200, 6246, 6215, 6222, 6243
Atlanta 6245
Atsat 6251
AtSky 6238
Audioline 6232
Audioton 6200
Austar 6174
Avalon 6261
Axil 6244, 6186, 6245
Axis 6267
Axitronic 6228
B.net 6232
B@ytronic 6230, 6199
Balmet 6186
Beko 6176
Belson 6245
Big Sat 6186
Black Diamond 6217
Blaupunkt 6177
Blue Sky 6180
Boca 6256, 6180, 6252, 6185,
6257, 6237, 6187, 6188
Bodner & Mann 6194
Boshmann 6244, 6247
Boston 6227
Brainwave 6232, 6231
British Sky Broadcasting
6210
Broco 6180
BskyB 6210
BT 6195
Bubu Sat 6180
Bush 6254, 6217, 6264, 6228,
6190, 6232, 6268, 6201, 6265,
6182
Cambridge 6236
Canal Digital 6220
Canal Satellite 6220, 6219,
6278, 6277
Canal+ 6220, 6277
CGV 6244, 6183
Cherokee 6194
Chess 6213, 6180, 6238, 6228
CityCom 6229, 6255, 6179,
6192, 6241, 6252
Clark 6200
Classic 6232
Clatronic 6244
Clayton 6228
Clemens Kamphus 6261
Cobra 6261
Colombia 6256
Columbia 6256
Comag 6256, 6252, 6185,
6199, 6244, 6257, 6237, 6189,
6187, 6188
Comsat 6244
Condor 6255, 6253
Connexions 6261
Conrad 6256, 6236, 6207,
6255
Coship 6186, 6232
Crown 6217
Cryptovision 6176
CS 6247
Cyfrowy Polsat 6220
Cyrus 6214
D-box 6275
Daewoo 6267, 6180, 6195,
6268, 6182
Dantax 6228
Deltasat 6192
Denver 6245
Digatron 6231
Digenius 6229, 6226
Digiality 6255, 6238
Digifusion 6268, 6269
Digihome 6217, 6265, 6218
DigiLogic 6217
DigiQuest 6251, 6186, 6247
DigiSat 6252
Digisky 6186
Digital 6187
Digital Vision 6269
DigitalBox 6222, 6247
Dijam 6195
DirecTV 6263
Discovery 6194
Distratel 6202, 6250
DMT 6192
DNT 6214, 6261
Doro 6232
Dual 6252
Durabrand 6217, 6218
Echolink 6185
Echostar 6220, 6233, 6261,
6176, 6180, 6181, 6239
Edision 6247
Einhell 6256, 6236, 6180
Elap 6180, 6244, 6183
Elbe 6245
Elless 6230
Elsat 6180
Elta 6214
eMTech 6196
Energy Sistem 6247
Engel 6180, 6227
EP Sat 6176
Eurieult 6202
Eurocrypt 6176
EuroLine 6227
Europa 6236, 6255
Europhon 6256, 6229, 6255
Eurosat 6189
Eurosky 6256, 6213, 6229,
6236, 6255, 6230
Eurostar 6255, 6179
Eutelsat 6180
Eutra 6230
Evesham 6218
Exator 6200
Fagor 6203
Fenner 6180
Ferguson 6176, 6264, 6268,
6269
Fidelity 6236
Finlandia 6176
Finlux 6176, 6207, 6228
FinnSat 6230
Flair Mate 6180
Fly Com 6186
FMD 6213, 6244, 6186
Freecom 6236
FTEmaximal 6180, 6189
Fuba 6177, 6229, 6261, 6207,
6226, 6196
Galaxis 6220, 6267
Gardiner 6179
Garnet 6192
GbSAT 6196
Gecco 6246, 6199
General Satellite 6241
Globo 6230, 6227, 6238,
6199, 6257
GOD Digital 6214
Gold Box 6220, 6219
Gold Vision 6247
Golden Interstar 6250
Goodmans 6176, 6254,
6217, 6264, 6271, 6218, 6201,
6190
Gran Prix 6230
Granada 6176
Grandin 6228
Grocos 6239, 6186
Grundig 6220, 6177, 6217,
6264, 6232, 6218, 6201, 6190
Haensel & Gretel 6256
Haier 6245
Hama 6183
Hanseatic 6215, 6222
Hauppauge 6231, 6232
HB 6196
Heliocom 6255
Helium 6255
Hiro 6189
Hirschmann 6267, 6177,
6229, 6261, 6236, 6207, 6255,
6230, 6252, 6199, 6189
Hitachi 6176, 6217, 6218
HNE 6256
Hornet 6251
Houston 6261
Humax 6241, 6268, 6242
Huth 6256, 6255, 6192, 6193
Hyundai
6192
ID Digital 6241
ILLUSION sat 6247
Imperial 6222, 6216, 6223,
6238, 6232
Ingelen 6213, 6261
Inno Hit 6228
International 6256
Interstar 6196
Intervision 6255
Inves 6268
iotronic 6244
ITT Nokia 6176, 6207
Jaeger 6238
K-SAT 6180
Kamm 6180
Kaon 6251
KaTelco 6267
Kathrein 6177, 6214, 6213,
6262, 6200, 6180, 6179, 6272,
6183
Kendo 6252
Kenwood 6220
Key West 6256
Kiton 6213
KR 6200
Kreiling 6213, 6194, 6228
Kreiselmeyer 6177
Kyostar 6200
L&S Electronic 6256, 6238
Labgear 6195
LaSAT 6177, 6256, 6229,
6255, 6230
Leiko 6228
Lemon 6238
Lenco 6255, 6180
Lenson 6236
LG 6192
Lifesat 6256, 6229, 6180
Listo 6228
Lodos 6217
Logik 6217
Logix 6192
Lorenzen 6256, 6229, 6255,
6226, 6231, 6257, 6237
Luxor 6236, 6207, 6265
M Electronic 6179
Manata 6256, 6180
Manhattan 6176, 6251
Marantz 6214
Maspro 6177, 6180
Matsui 6177, 6217, 6271,
6228, 6268, 6269
Max 6255
Maximum 6192, 6238
Mediabox 6220, 6219
Mediacom 6198
MediaSat 6220, 6219, 6236,
6278, 6277
Medion 6256, 6229, 6180,
6230, 6192, 6252, 6238, 6199,
6228
Medison 6180
Mega 6214
MegaSat 6189
Metronic 6256, 6200, 6180,
6179, 6202, 6250, 6238, 6244
Metz 6177
Micro 6236, 6255, 6200,
6180, 6231
Micro Elektronic 6180
Micro Technology 6180
Micromaxx 6229
Microstar 6229, 6192, 6226
Microtec 6180
Mitsubishi 6176
Morgan’s 6214, 6256, 6180,
6252, 6199
Multibroadcast 6174
Multichoice 6174
Myryad 6214
Mysat 6180
MySky 6212, 6211
NEOTION 6238
Netsat 6263
Neuhaus 6236, 6255, 6180
Neuling 6256, 6252, 6257,
6188
Neusat 6180
Neveling 6226
Newton 6261
NextWave 6193
Nichimen 6254
Nikko 6214, 6180
Noda Electronic 6202
Nokia 6220, 6176, 6207, 6206
Nordmende 6176
Octagon 6200
OctalTV 6231
Onn 6217, 6218
Opentel 6252, 6199
Optex 6213, 6180, 6250,
6244, 6203, 6228
Orbis 6252, 6238, 6199
Orbitech 6213, 6236, 6215,
6222, 6216, 6223
P/Sat 6252
Pace 6220, 6214, 6176, 6181,
6273, 6212, 6211
Pacific 6217
Packard Bell 6267
Palcom 6229, 6226, 6239
Palladium 6261, 6236
Palsat 6236
Panasonic 6176, 6178
Panda 6177, 6176, 6255
Pansat 6191
Pass 6183
Patriot 6256
peeKTon 6186, 6245
Philips 6220, 6177, 6214,
6275, 6219, 6277, 6268, 6232,
6179, 6200, 6176, 6263
Phoenix 6245
Phonotrend 6233
Pilotime 6278
Pino 6238
Pixx 6191
Planet 6261
PMB 6180, 6203
Polytron 6261
Portland 6195
Preisner 6256, 6261, 6243,
6185
Premier 6219
Primacom 6267
Pro Basic 6220, 6184
Proline 6217
Promax 6176
Proscan 6234
Quelle 6229, 6255
Radiola 6214
Radix 6261, 6243
Rainbow 6200
RCA 6234
Rebox 6196
Regal 6227
RFT 6214
Roadstar 6220, 6180
Rollmaster 6244
Rover 6180
Rownsonic 6183
SAB 6227, 6251
Saba 6255, 6230, 6202, 6184
Sabre 6176
Sagem 6275, 6258, 6277
Saivod 6245
Salora 6252
Samsung 6220, 6198, 6197,
6273, 6253
Sanyo 6228
SAT 6236
Sat Control 6251
Sat Partner 6236, 6200
Sat Team 6180
SAT+ 6239
Satcom 6255
Satec 6180
Satelco 6252
Satplus 6222
SatyCon 6247
Schaecke 6200
Schaub Lorenz 6196, 6245
Schneider 6198, 6227
Schwaiger 6267, 6256, 6262,
6255, 6230, 6202, 6192, 6238,
6199, 6186, 6257, 6247, 6232,
6187, 6188
Scientific Atlanta 6209
SCS 6229, 6230
Sedea Electronique 6256,
6213, 6198, 6250, 6228
Seemann 6261
SEG 6213, 6192, 6227, 6217,
6228
Septimo 6202
Serd 6199
Servimat 6203
ServiSat 6180, 6227
Shark 6247
Sharp 6265, 6218
Siemens 6177, 6261, 6238
Sigmatek 6245
Silva 6229
SilverCrest 6187
Skantin 6180
SKR 6180
SKT 6256
SKY 6263, 6210, 6212, 6211
SKY Italia 6220, 6212
Sky XL 6227, 6199
Skymaster 6233, 6180, 6192,
6238, 6239, 6183, 6203, 6184
Skymax 6214, 6244
Skypex 6230
Skyplus 6230, 6252, 6238,
6199
SkySat 6213, 6236, 6255,
6180
Skyvision 6238
SL 6256, 6229, 6230, 6231,
6257, 6232
SM Electronic 6233, 6180,
6239
Smart 6256, 6261, 6180,
6243, 6252, 6246, 6244, 6257,
6247
SmartVision 6186
Sony 6235, 6220, 6219, 6176
SR 6256
Star Sat 6196
141
Additional information
15
 
Starland 6180
Starlite 6214
Stream 6212
Stream System 6251
Strong 6220, 6228, 6256,
6200, 6180, 6245, 6217, 6239
Sumin 6199
Sunny 6251
Sunsat 6180
Sunstar 6174, 6256
SuperMax 6193
Supratech 6244
Systec 6238
Tantec 6176
Targa 6191
Tatung 6176
TBoston 6227, 6245
Tecatel 6233
Technical 6228
Technika 6217, 6232, 6218
TechniSat 6213, 6261, 6176,
6236, 6215, 6222, 6216, 6223
Technomate 6250
Technosat 6193
Technosonic 6254, 6232
Technotrend 6232
Technowelt 6256, 6255
Techwood 6213, 6217, 6228,
6218
Telasat 6255
TELE System 6261, 6227,
6239, 6203
Teleciel 6200
Teleka 6261, 6236, 6255,
6200
Telesat 6255
Telestar 6213, 6236, 6215,
6222, 6216, 6223, 6227, 6238,
6228, 6232
Teletech 6213
Televes 6256, 6176, 6236,
6196, 6251, 6238, 6257
Telewire 6252
Tempo 6193
Tevion 6254, 6180, 6239,
6232, 6184
Thomson 6220, 6219, 6180,
6255, 6176, 6265, 6277, 6234,
6264, 6210, 6212
Thorn 6176
Tiny 6232
Tioko 6256
Titan 6189, 6184
TNT SAT 6258
Tokai 6214
Tonna 6176, 6236, 6180,
6203
Topfield 6198
Toshiba 6176, 6217
Trevi 6227
Triasat 6236
Triax 6220, 6214, 6256, 6189,
6253, 6228, 6203, 6261, 6213,
6257, 6244, 6195, 6264, 6227,
6243, 6180, 6236
Turnsat 6180
Twinner 6180, 6203
Unisat 6214, 6256
United 6227
Univers 6189
Universum 6177, 6213,
6229, 6255, 6230, 6215, 6227
Van Hunen 6226
Variosat 6177
VEA 6245
Ventana 6214
Vestel 6213, 6227, 6217,
6218
VH Sat 6229
Viasat 6273
Viola Digital 6232
Vision 6228, 6189
Visionic 6250
Visiosat 6213, 6254, 6180,
6244, 6186, 6191
Vitecom 6244
Volcasat 6245
VTech 6179
Wetekom 6236
Wewa 6176
Wharfedale 6217, 6265,
6218
Wisi 6177, 6256, 6229, 6261,
6176, 6236, 6255, 6230, 6252,
6199
Worldsat 6213, 6196, 6227,
6194
WorthIt! 6190
Woxter 6245
Xoro 6191
Xsat 6180, 6196, 6181
Xtreme 6251
Yakumo 6244
ZapMaster 6230
Zehnder 6213, 6262, 6179,
6192, 6252, 6227, 6238, 6199,
6244, 6247, 6249
Zeta Technology 6214
Zodiac 6261, 6200
Satellite Set Top Box (SAT/PVR Combination)
@sat 6251
Allvision 6199
Atsat 6251
B@ytronic 6230, 6199
Boca 6187
BskyB 6210
Bush 6254
Canal Satellite 6278
Comag 6199, 6187
Daewoo 6182
Digifusion 6269
Digihome 6218
DigiQuest 6251
Digital 6187
DMT 6192
Edision 6247
eMTech 6196
GbSAT 6196
Gecco 6199
Globo 6199
Goodmans 6254, 6218
Hirschmann 6230, 6199
Humax 6241, 6242
Huth 6192
Hyundai 6192
Kathrein 6272
LaSAT 6230
LG 6192
Luxor 6265
Maximum 6238
Mediacom 6198
MediaSat 6277
Medion 6230, 6199
Microstar 6192
Morgan’s 6199
MySky 6212, 6211
NEOTION 6238
Nichimen 6254
Nokia 6206
Opentel 6199
Orbis 6199
Pace 6273, 6211
Panasonic 6178
Philips 6263, 6277
Pilotime 6278
Pixx 6191
Proscan 6234
Rebox 6196
Sagem 6258
Samsung 6198, 6197, 6273
Sat Control 6251
Schneider 6198
Schwaiger 6230, 6192, 6199,
6187
Sedea Electronique 6198
Serd 6199
Sharp 6218
SilverCrest 6187
SKY 6210, 6212, 6211
SKY Italia 6212
Sky XL 6199
Skymaster 6192
Skypex 6230
Skyplus 6230, 6238, 6199
Stream System 6251
Sumin 6199
Sunny 6251
Targa 6191
TechniSat 6216, 6223
Technosonic 6254
Telestar 6216, 6223
Thomson 6210, 6265
TNT SAT 6258
Topfield 6198
Viasat 6273
Visiosat 6254, 6191
Wisi 6230
Xoro 6191
Xtreme 6251
Zehnder 6192, 6199, 6249
Cable Set Top Box
Pioneer 6205, 6325, 6328,
6329
ABC 6266
ADB 6175
Auna 6175
Austar 6276
Bell & Howell 6266
Birmingham Cable
Communications 6276
Cablecom 6270
Fosgate 6276
France Telecom 6260
Freebox 6274
General Instrument 6276,
6266
Humax 6224, 6248
Jerrold 6276, 6266
Kabel Deutschland 6224
Macab 6260
Madritel 6175
Magnavox 6266
Memorex 6240
Motorola 6276
Nokia 6208
Noos 6260
NTL 6276, 6221
Optus 6276
Orange 6260
Pace 6221
Panasonic 6240
Paragon 6240
Philips 6260, 6270
Pulsar 6240
Runco 6240
Sagem 6260
Salora 6240
Samsung 6221, 6240
Scientific Atlanta 6225
StarHub 6276
Supercable 6276
Telewest 6225
Thomson 6270, 6224
Toshiba 6240
UPC 6270
US Electronics 6276
Virgin Media 6225, 6221
Visiopass 6260
Zenith 6240
Ziggo 6208
Cable Set Top Box (Cable/PVR Combination)
Freebox 6274
Humax 6248, 6224
Nokia 6208
Scientific Atlanta 6225
Telewest 6225
Thomson 6270
UPC 6270
Virgin Media 6225
CD-R
Pioneer 5001, 5053, 5071
Philips 5054
Yamaha 5055
Cassete Deck
Pioneer 5058, 5059
Laser Disc Player
Pioneer 5002, 5003, 5004, 5005, 5006, 5007, 5008, 5009, 5010
Digital Tape
Pioneer 5057
Network Audio Player
Pioneer 5063
MD
Pioneer 5056
Game
X-Box 2313
AV Receiver
Pioneer 5096 (ID 1), 5097 (ID 2), 5098 (ID 3), 5099 (ID 4),
© 2015 PIONEER HOME ELECTRONICS CORPORATION.
All rights reserved.
<ARB7592-B>
PIONEER HOME ELECTRONICS CORPORATION
1-1, Shin-ogura, Saiwai-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa 212-0031, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P. O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
340 Ferrier Street, Unit 2, Markham, Ontario L3R 2Z5, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
5 Arco Lane, Heatherton, Victoria, 3202, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002_B3_En
142


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Pioneer VSX-930 K-S at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Pioneer VSX-930 K-S in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 20,41 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Pioneer VSX-930 K-S

Pioneer VSX-930 K-S User Manual - German - 146 pages

Pioneer VSX-930 K-S User Manual - Dutch - 146 pages

Pioneer VSX-930 K-S User Manual - French - 145 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info